Table of Contents -...

Environment Impact Assessment Report Proposed Independent Floor Development (18.138 Acres), Sector-61,

Village Ullawas, Gurgaon

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. i

Table of Contents

1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 PROFILE OF PROJECT PROPONENT ................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 NAME AND CONTACT ADDRESS OF PROJECT PROPONENT .................................................................................. 1

1.3 IMPLEMENTING ORGANIZATION: ................................................................................................................... 1

1.4 ORGANIZATIONAL CHART............................................................................................................................. 1

1.5 LAND DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 2

1.5.1 License and its Validity ................................................................................................................. 2

1.5.2 Status of Ownership and Collaboration Agreement ..................................................................... 3

1.5.3 Land Details showing Plot Nos. / Survey Nos. .............................................................................. 3

1.6 LITIGATION(S) OR ORDERS PASSED BY ANY COURT OF LAW / ANY STATUTORY AUTHORITY .......................................... 4

1.7 OBJECTIVES OF THE EIA STUDY ..................................................................................................................... 4

1.8 SCOPE OF THE STUDY .................................................................................................................................. 4

1.9 EIA METHODOLOGY ................................................................................................................................... 4

1.10 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT ............................................................................................................................ 5

1.11 STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT ................................................................................................................... 6

2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................ 7

2.1 GOAL AND OBJECTIVES OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT .......................................................................................... 7

2.2 SIGNIFICANCE OF PROPOSED PROJECT AT REGIONAL LEVEL ................................................................................. 7

2.3 SIGNIFICANCE OF PROJECT AT LOCAL LEVEL ..................................................................................................... 8

2.4 PROJECT BACKGROUND ............................................................................................................................... 9

2.5 SITE SELECTION CRITERIA ............................................................................................................................. 9

2.6 NATURE AND SIZE OF THE PROJECT ................................................................................................................ 9

2.7 PROJECT SITE LOCATION .............................................................................................................................. 9

2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL SENSITIVITY WITHIN 15 KM AND 1 KM RADIUS OF THE PROJECT SITE ................................. 13

2.9 ENVIRONMENT LIABILITY OF THE SITE ........................................................................................................... 13

2.10 SITE CONNECTIVITY .................................................................................................................................. 13

2.11 SITE AND SITE SURROUNDINGS WITHIN 500 M BOUNDARY OF PROJECT SITE ......................................................... 14

2.12 PROJECT SITE AND SURROUNDING PHOTOGRAPHS ........................................................................................... 15

2.13 PROJECT COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................................. 16

2.13.1 Development Concept ................................................................................................................ 16

2.13.2 Land Use Distribution and Area Statement ................................................................................ 16

2.13.3 Project Site Elevation and Sections ............................................................................................. 18

2.13.4 Population Details ...................................................................................................................... 20

2.14 UTILITIES PROPOSED DURING CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION PHASES ............................................................ 20

2.14.1 Water Requirement and Supply.................................................................................................. 21

2.14.2 Sewage System ........................................................................................................................... 21

2.14.3 Rainwater Harvesting System .................................................................................................... 22

2.14.4 Power Requirement and Supply ................................................................................................. 22



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. ii

2.14.5 Parking........................................................................................................................................ 23

2.14.6 Municipal Solid Waste Management ......................................................................................... 23

2.14.7 E-Waste Management................................................................................................................ 23

2.14.8 Sewage Sludge ............................................................................................................................ 24

2.14.9 Energy Conservation Measures .................................................................................................. 24

2.14.10 Fire Safety Facilities .................................................................................................................... 24

2.14.11 Demolition .................................................................................................................................. 24

2.14.12 Building Materials and Technologies for Construction ............................................................... 24

2.14.13 Quantity of Natural Resources ................................................................................................... 24

2.15 RESOURCE AND MANPOWER ....................................................................................................................... 25

2.16 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD & SCHEDULE .......................................................................................................... 25

2.17 PROJECT COST ......................................................................................................................................... 26

2.18 COMPATIBILITY WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS .................................................................................................... 26

2.19 SOCIAL ACTIVITIES IN THE PROJECT .............................................................................................................. 26

2.20 OTHER RELEVANT INFORMATION ................................................................................................................ 27

3 LEGAL & ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK .............................................................................................. 28

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICIES ........................................................................................................................ 28

3.2 LEGAL PROVISIONS FOR ENVIRONMENT RELATED TO BUILDING / CONSTRUCTION / AREA DEVELOPMENT & TOWNSHIP

PROJECTS ............................................................................................................................................................ 29

3.3 SITING OF PROJECTS ................................................................................................................................. 31

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE OF DEVELOPMENTAL PROJECTS .......................................................................... 31

3.5 URBAN PLANNING & LAND USE .................................................................................................................. 32

3.6 USAGE OF WATER & WATER POLLUTION...................................................................................................... 33

3.7 AIR QUALITY ........................................................................................................................................... 33

3.8 NOISE LEVEL ........................................................................................................................................... 34

3.9 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................ 34

3.10 STORAGE AND USE OF PETROLEUM AND HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS ..................................................................... 35

3.11 CENTRAL GROUND WATER AUTHORITY (CGWA) NOTIFICATION ...................................................................... 36

3.12 STATUTORY NATIONAL CAPITAL REGION (NCR) REGIONAL PLAN-2021 ............................................................. 37

3.13 OPERATION OF MOTOR VEHICLES ............................................................................................................... 38

3.14 INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK ...................................................................................................................... 38

3.14.1 Ministry of Environment & Forests ............................................................................................. 38

3.14.2 Central & State Pollution Control Boards ................................................................................... 39

3.14.3 Municipalities & the Municipal Corporations ............................................................................. 39

3.14.4 Haryana Urban Development Authority (HUDA) Administration ............................................... 40

3.14.5 Haryana State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (HSEIAA) / Haryana State Expert

Appraisal Committee (HSEAC) ..................................................................................................................... 41

3.15 ENERGY CONSERVATION BUILDING CODE (ECBC) .......................................................................................... 41

3.16 MANUAL ON NORMS & STANDARDS FOR LARGE CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS ........................................................... 42

4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT STATUS ......................................................................................................... 43



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. iii

4.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 43

4.2 METHODOLOGY OF CONDUCTING BASELINE STUDY ........................................................................................ 43

4.3 CRITERIA FOR BASELINE ENVIRONMENT STUDY ............................................................................................... 44

4.4 COMPONENTS AND PARAMETERS FOR BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY .......................................................... 44

4.5 PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................................... 48

4.5.1 Land Use Pattern ........................................................................................................................ 48

4.5.2 Geography & Topography .......................................................................................................... 48

4.5.3 Geology ....................................................................................................................................... 50

4.5.4 Seismo-Tectonic & Nature of Study ............................................................................................ 51

4.5.5 Cyclones and Storm Surges ......................................................................................................... 53

4.5.6 Mineral Resources ...................................................................................................................... 53

4.5.7 Drainage Pattern ........................................................................................................................ 53

4.6 CROPPING PATTERN .................................................................................................................................. 54

4.7 AIR ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................................... 54

4.7.1 Meteorological Data from Secondary Sources ........................................................................... 55

4.7.2 Atmospheric Stability .................................................................................................................. 61

4.7.3 Mixing Height ............................................................................................................................. 61

4.7.4 Site Specific Meteorological Data ............................................................................................... 62

4.7.5 Air Quality ................................................................................................................................... 62

4.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................................... 66

4.8.1 Noise Quality .............................................................................................................................. 67

4.9 TRAFFIC .................................................................................................................................................. 68

4.10 TRAFFIC PROJECTION ............................................................................................................................. 69

4.10.1 Population and Trips Generation for Horizon Year 2021 ............................................................ 69

4.10.2 Assumptions for Trip Generation ................................................................................................ 69

4.10.3 Results of Traffic Analysis Study ................................................................................................. 70

4.10.4 Conclusion: ................................................................................................................................. 70

4.10.5 Hierarchy of Road within Proposed Project Site as per IRC: 86-1983 ......................................... 70

4.11 WATER ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................................. 71

4.11.1 Ground Water Resources & Availability ..................................................................................... 71

4.11.2 Hydro-geological ........................................................................................................................ 73

4.11.3 Vertical Electric Soundings (VES) ................................................................................................ 74

4.11.4 Surface Water Availability during Construction Phase ............................................................... 76

4.11.5 Surface Water Availability during Operation Phase ................................................................... 76

4.11.6 Alternate Sustainable Water Management Strategies during Operational Phase .................... 77

4.11.7 Water Quality ............................................................................................................................. 77



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. iv

4.11.8 Construction Water Quality ........................................................................................................ 80

4.12 LAND ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................................ 80

4.12.1 Soil .............................................................................................................................................. 80

4.12.2 Soil Quality .................................................................................................................................. 81

4.12.3 Soil Fertility ................................................................................................................................. 83

4.12.4 Soil Permeability ......................................................................................................................... 83

4.12.5 Soil Porosity ................................................................................................................................ 83

4.13 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................................................................... 84

4.13.1 Habitat Assessment .................................................................................................................... 84

4.13.2 Terrestrial Ecology ...................................................................................................................... 84

4.14 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................... 87

4.14.1 General Socio-Economic Profile .................................................................................................. 88

4.14.2 Demographic Profile ................................................................................................................... 88

4.14.3 Education & Literacy ................................................................................................................... 88

4.14.4 Economic Activity and Livelihood Pattern .................................................................................. 88

4.14.5 Existing Physical & Social Infrastructure Facilities in the Region ............................................... 88

5 POLLUTION SOURCES, IMPACT PREDICTION & IMPACT ASSESSMENT ................................................... 90

5.1 POLLUTION SOURCES ................................................................................................................................ 90

5.2 IMPACT PREDICTION AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT ............................................................................................. 91

5.3 IMPACT ON PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................... 93

5.3.1 Impact on Land use & Aesthetic ................................................................................................. 93

5.3.2 Impact on Topography ............................................................................................................... 94

5.3.3 Impact on Geology ..................................................................................................................... 94

5.3.4 Impact on Drains ........................................................................................................................ 94

5.3.5 Impact due to Tectonics / Earthquakes ...................................................................................... 95

5.3.6 Impact on Mineral Resources ..................................................................................................... 95

5.3.7 Climate & Meteorology .............................................................................................................. 95

5.4 IMPACT ON AIR ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................... 95

5.4.1 Air Emissions Sources ................................................................................................................. 95

5.4.2 Fugitive Emissions from site preparation ................................................................................... 96

5.4.3 Impact on Air Environment due to Construction Activities ......................................................... 96

5.4.4 Impact on Air Environment during Operation .......................................................................... 103

Model Assumption ..................................................................................................................................... 104

Table 5:11 Max. Resultant GLCs due to Vehicular Movement .................................................................. 104

5.5 IMPACT ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................. 111



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. v

5.5.1 Impact on Noise Environment during Construction Phase ....................................................... 111

5.5.2 Impact on Noise Environment during Operation Phase ........................................................... 113

5.6 IMPACT ON WATER ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................... 114

Impact on Water Environment during Construction Phase ...................................................... 114

5.6.1 114

5.6.2 Impact on Water Environment during Operation Phase .......................................................... 116

5.7 IMPACT ON LAND ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................................. 122

5.7.1 Impact on Land Environment during Construction Phase ........................................................ 122

5.7.2 Impact on Land Environment during Operation Phase ............................................................. 124

5.8 IMPACT ON BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................. 127

5.8.1 Impact during Construction Phase ........................................................................................... 127

5.8.2 Impact during Operation Phase ................................................................................................ 128

5.9 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................. 128

5.9.1 Positive Impacts ........................................................................................................................ 128

5.9.2 Negative Impacts ...................................................................................................................... 129

5.9.3 Negligible Impacts .................................................................................................................... 130

5.10 IMPACT ON HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL SITES ............................................................ 130

5.11 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS ........................................................................................................................... 130

6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................................................................................. 134

6.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 134

6.2 CAPACITY BUILDING FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION ........................................................................................ 134

6.3 IMPLEMENT ARRANGEMENTS FOR EMP ..................................................................................................... 134

6.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN MATRIX .......................................................................................... 134

6.5 EMP FOR AIR ENVIRONMENT................................................................................................................... 149

6.5.1 Site Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 149

6.5.2 Noise Environment ................................................................................................................... 150

6.5.3 Construction Material Management ........................................................................................ 151

6.5.4 Vehicle Emission Controls and Alternatives .............................................................................. 152

6.6 EMP FOR NOISE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................... 158

6.6.1 Construction Phase ................................................................................................................... 158

6.6.2 Operation Phase ....................................................................................................................... 159

6.7 EMP FOR WATER ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................. 159


6.7.2 Water Source Development ...................................................................................................... 160

6.7.3 Provision of Water Body ........................................................................................................... 163

6.7.4 Promoting Reuse of Water after Treatment ............................................................................. 163



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. vi

6.8 EMP FOR LAND ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................ 167

6.8.1 Construction Debris .................................................................................................................. 167

6.8.2 Waste from Labour Colonies & Biomass .................................................................................. 167

6.8.3 Topsoil Management ................................................................................................................ 168

6.8.4 Solid Waste Management ........................................................................................................ 168

6.9 EMP FOR E-WASTE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 170

6.10 EMP FOR ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................... 171


6.10.2 Operational Phase .................................................................................................................... 171

6.10.3 Green Belt Plan ......................................................................................................................... 171

6.10.4 Greenbelt Design for Site .......................................................................................................... 172

6.11 EMP FOR SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................... 175

6.11.1 Mitigative Measures ................................................................................................................. 175

6.11.2 Social Activities Proposed to be undertaken ............................................................................. 176

6.12 EMP FOR ENERGY CONSERVATION ............................................................................................................ 176

6.12.1 Solar Passive Techniques .......................................................................................................... 177

6.12.2 Adoption of Lighting Control .................................................................................................... 178

6.12.3 Light Power Density (LPD) ........................................................................................................ 179

6.12.4 Use of renewable energy system .............................................................................................. 179

6.12.5 Use of Energy Efficient Building Material ................................................................................. 179

6.12.6 Thermal Properties of Building Components ............................................................................ 182

6.12.7 Thermal Properties of Enhance Building Material .................................................................... 182

6.13 ENERGY BALANCE .................................................................................................................................. 184

6.13.1 Shadow Analysis ....................................................................................................................... 185

6.13.2 Ventilation ................................................................................................................................ 191

6.13.3 Energy Consumption ................................................................................................................. 191

6.13.4 Energy Saving in the Project ..................................................................................................... 191

6.14 STRUCTURAL SAFETY MEASURES .......................................................................................................... 194

6.15 ELECTRICAL HAZARDOUS AND SAFETY MEASURE PLAN .................................................................................. 194

6.16 EMP FOR GREEN HOUSE EFFECTS, RADIATION EFFECTS, OZONE DEPLETION EFFECTS AND ACID RAIN EFFECTS ............. 201

6.17 EMP FOR FIRE FIGHTING ......................................................................................................................... 203

6.18 HEALTH AND WELFARE PLAN.................................................................................................................... 206

6.18.1 Fixation of Hours of Work and Interval of Rest & Spread Over ................................................ 206

6.18.2 Weekly rest, payment of work dones on the day of rest at overtime rate, etc. ....................... 206

6.18.3 Notice of Wage Period .............................................................................................................. 206

6.18.4 Accommodation ....................................................................................................................... 206



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. vii

6.18.5 Latrine and Urinal ..................................................................................................................... 207

6.18.6 Canteens ................................................................................................................................... 207

6.18.7 Medical Facilities ...................................................................................................................... 208

6.18.8 Emergency Care Services or Emergency Treatment ................................................................. 209

6.19 SAFETY MEASURES................................................................................................................................. 209

6.19.1 General Safety Measures .......................................................................................................... 209

6.19.2 Safety for Welding & Cutting .................................................................................................... 210

7 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN ................................................................................................ 212

7.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 212

7.2 OBJECTIVES OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN ................................................................................... 212

7.3 SUGGESTED ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN ....................................................................................... 212

7.3.1 Data Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 217

7.3.2 Reporting Schedule ................................................................................................................... 217

7.3.3 Emergency Procedures/Corrective Measures ........................................................................... 217

8 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN ......................................................................... 218

8.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 218

8.2 HAZARD ............................................................................................................................................. 218

8.3 RISK .................................................................................................................................................... 218

8.4 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND RISK ASSESSMENT DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE ........................................... 219

8.5 METHOD STATEMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 219

8.6 SAFE WORK METHOD STATEMENT STEP BY STEP ......................................................................................... 219

8.7 PERMITS TO WORK................................................................................................................................. 220

8.8 RISK ASSESSMENT DURING THE OPERATION PHASE ......................................................................................... 222

8.8.1 Earthquake Hazard ................................................................................................................... 222

8.8.2 Drought .................................................................................................................................... 223

8.8.3 Flood ......................................................................................................................................... 223

8.8.4 Fire ............................................................................................................................................ 223

8.9 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE ........................................................................... 224

8.10 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR OPERATION PHASE ................................................................................ 225

8.10.1 On Site Emergency Management Plan ..................................................................................... 225

8.11 KEY PERSONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 226

8.11.1 Site Main Controller .................................................................................................................. 226

8.11.2 Work Incident Controller .......................................................................................................... 227

8.11.3 Safety Coordinator .................................................................................................................... 227

8.11.4 Medical Officer ......................................................................................................................... 227

8.11.5 Maintenance Support Officer ................................................................................................... 227

8.11.6 Civil Support Officer .................................................................................................................. 227



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. viii

8.11.7 Material Support Officer ........................................................................................................... 227

8.11.8 Area Staff .................................................................................................................................. 227

8.11.9 Running Messengers ................................................................................................................ 228

8.11.10 Employees ................................................................................................................................. 228

8.11.11 Technical Coordinator............................................................................................................... 228

8.11.12 Utilities Coordinator ................................................................................................................. 228

8.11.13 Liaison and Public Relations Coordinator ................................................................................. 228

8.11.14 Transportation Coordinator ...................................................................................................... 228

8.11.15 Communication Coordinator .................................................................................................... 228

8.12 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS .................................................................................................................... 228

8.12.1 Fire Detection and Fire Fighting ............................................................................................... 229

8.12.2 Personal Protective Equipment ................................................................................................ 229

8.12.3 Communication System ............................................................................................................ 229

8.12.4 Training .................................................................................................................................... 229

8.12.5 Emergency Control Center ........................................................................................................ 229

8.13 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 229

8.14 OFF-SITE EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS PLAN ............................................................................................... 230

8.14.1 Emergency Code of Practices .................................................................................................... 231

8.14.2 Fire fighting COP ....................................................................................................................... 231

8.15 MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORKS AND CONCLUSION ......................................................................................... 232

8.15.1 Coordination with Concerned Authorities ................................................................................ 232

9 CORPORATE ENVIROMENT RESPONSIBILITY ........................................................................................ 234

9.1 ENVIRONMENT POLICY ............................................................................................................................ 234

9.2 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................... 234

9.3 HIERARCHICAL SYSTEM OF THE ORGANIZATION ............................................................................................ 234

9.4 REPORTING MECHANISM OF NON-COMPLIANCE .......................................................................................... 235

10 DISCLOSURE OF EIA PREPARES ............................................................................................................ 237

10.1 THE PROJECT PROPONENT - M/S COMMANDER REALTORS PVT. LTD. ....................................................... 237

10.2 EIA CONSULTANTS – GREENC INDIA CONSULTING PRIVATE LIMITED ...................................................... 238

10.3 AREA OF EXPERTISE (GCPL) .................................................................................................................... 239

10.4 QCI/NABET ACCREDITATION STATUS OF THE EIA CONSULTANT .................................................................... 240

10.5 BRIEF RESUME OF TEAM MEMBERS .......................................................................................................... 242

10.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING LABORATORY ............................................................................................. 243

11 SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS ............................................................................................................... 245

11.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 245

11.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................ 245

11.2.1 Salient Features of the Project.................................................................................................. 245



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. ix

11.3 CONCLUSIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 247

11.4 OVERALL JUSTIFICATION FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE PROJECT..................................................................... 247



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. x

List of Table

Table 1:1 License Details of Proposed Project Site ................................................................................ 2

Table 1:2 Survey Nos. / Plot Nos. of Proposed Project Site ................................................................... 3

Table 1:3 General Conditions as per EIA Notification 2006 .................................................................. 5

Table 2:1 Project Site Coordinates........................................................................................................ 13

Table 2:2 Landuse Distribution of Project Site ..................................................................................... 17

Table 2:3 Area Statement for Proposed Independent Floors ................................................................ 18

Table 2:4 Population Details for Proposed Independent Floors Project ............................................... 20

Table 2:5 Water Demand in Proposed Independent Floors Project ...................................................... 21

Table 2:6 Wastewater Generation in Proposed Independent Floors Project ......................................... 22

Table 2:7 RWH and Water Body Details in in Proposed Project ......................................................... 22

Table 2:8 Power Demand in Proposed Independent Floors Project...................................................... 23

Table 2:9 Parking Details of Proposed Independent Floors Project ..................................................... 23

Table 2:10 Quantity of Natural Resources ........................................................................................... 25

Table 2:11 Proposed Construction Schedule (Month Wise) ................................................................. 25

Table 3:1 Summary of Environmental Legislation concerning Proposed Project ................................ 29

Table 4:1 Environmental Components & Parameters for Baseline Study ............................................ 45

Table 4:2 Geological Sequence of the Area .......................................................................................... 50

Table 4:3 History of Earth Quake in NCR Region from April 1980 to March 2013 ............................ 52

Table 4:4 Area, production and productivity of Major Crops in Gurgaon .......................................... 54

Table 4:5 Primary Sources & Effects of Air Pollutants due to Proposed Project ................................. 54

Table 4:6 Averaged Minimum Temperature Profile (1997 to 2011) –Met station Palam .................... 55

Table 4:7 Averaged Maximum Temperature Profile (1997 to 2011) –Met station Palam ................... 55

Table 4:8 Rainfall Data for Last Fifteen Years in Delhi (Palam) ......................................................... 56

Table 4:9 Cloud Cover Data for Last Fifteen Years of Delhi (Safdarjung), Morning Hours (8.30 IST)

.............................................................................................................................................................. 56

Table 4:10 Cloud Cover Data for Last Fifteen Years of Delhi (Safdarjung), Evening Hours (17.30

IST) ....................................................................................................................................................... 56

Table 4:11 Monthly Mean Wind Speed in KMPH (Year 1993 – 2005) .............................................. 57

Table 4:12 Monthly Mean Speed in KMPH (Year 2009 – 2014) ......................................................... 57

Table 4:13 Stability Class ..................................................................................................................... 61

Table 4:14 Meteorological Monitoring Data (Winter Season – 01.01. 2015 to 31.01.2015) ............... 62

Table 4:15 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations ....................................................... 63



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. xi

Table 4:16 Monitoring Program Results SO2 (g/m3) .......................................................................... 63

Table 4:17 Monitoring Program Results – Nox (g/m3) ...................................................................... 64

Table 4:18 Monitoring Program Results – CO (g/m3) ........................................................................ 64

Table 4:19 Monitoring Program Results – PM10 (g/m3) ..................................................................... 65

Table 4:20 Monitoring Program Results -PM 2.5 (g/m3) ..................................................................... 66

Table 4:21 Primary Effects of Noise Pollution from Construction & Operation Activities of the Site ... 67

Table 4:22 Ambient Noise Standards as per CPCB .............................................................................. 67

Table 4:23 Baseline Background Noise Quality Monitoring Results ................................................... 68

Table 4:24 Traffic Volume Count ......................................................................................................... 68

Table 4.25 Population and Trip generation in horizon year 2021 ......................................................... 69

Table 4.26 Traffic projection and road capacity requirement ............................................................... 70

Table 4.27 Capacity standards (IRC 106) ............................................................................................. 70

Table 4.28 Categorization of Road based on UDFI Norms and as Proposed in the Project Site ......... 71

Table 4:29 True Resistivity in ohm meters for Surveyed point VES-1 ............................................... 75

Table 4:30 Baseline Water Quality Monitoring Location ..................................................................... 78

Table 4:31 Ground Water Quality near the Project Site ....................................................................... 78

Table 4:32 Soil Type based on Particle Size ......................................................................................... 81

Table 4:33 Soil Characteristics at Different Depths ............................................................................. 81

Table 4:34 List of Floral Species found within 10 km radius .............................................................. 85

Table 4:35 List of Avifauna within 10 Km Radius ............................................................................... 86

Table 4:36 Demographic Details .......................................................................................................... 88

Table 5:1 Potential Pollutant Sources & Characteristics ...................................................................... 90

Table 5:2 Identification of potential Impacts during Construction & Operation Phase ........................ 92

Table 5:3 Quantity of Quarry Material ................................................................................................ 94

Table 5:4 Diesel Generator Set Specifications...................................................................................... 97

Table 5:5 Ground Level SO2 (µG/M3) Concentration at Different Locations (24 hourly Averaged) .... 98

Table 5:6 Ground Level NOx (µG/M3) Concentration At Different Locations (24 hours Averaged) .... 99

Table 5:7 Ground Level PM10 Concentration (µG/M3) At Different Locations (24 hours Averaged) . 100

Table 5:8 Ground Level PM2.5 Concentration (µG/M3) At Different Locations (24 hours Averaged) 101

Table 5:9 Ground Level CO (µG/M3) Concentration at Different Locations (1 hours Averaged) ....... 102

Table 5:10 Vehicle Emission Statement ............................................................................................. 104

Table 5:13 Ground Level SO2 (µG/M3) Concentration (24 hourly Averaged) due to DG sets ............ 106

Table 5:14 Ground Level NOx (µG/M3) Concentration (24 hours Averaged) due to DG sets ............. 107



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. xii

Table 5:15 Ground Level PM10 Concentration (µG/M3) (24 hours Averaged) due to D.G. Sets ......... 108

Table 5:16 Ground Level PM2.5 Concentration (µG/M3) (24 hours Averaged) due To D.G. Sets ....... 109

Table 5:17 Ground Level CO (µG/M3) Concentration (1 hours Averaged) due to D.G. sets .............. 110

Table 5:18: Noise levels Generated from Construction Equipment ................................................... 111

Table 5:19: Ultimate Water Requirements for Proposed Project ........................................................ 117

Table 5:20: Expected Treated Wastewater Characteristics ................................................................. 121

Table 5:21: Standards for Effluent Disposal ....................................................................................... 121

Table 5:22: Expected Solid Waste Generation ................................................................................... 125

Table 5:23 E-waste Generated – Independent Floors Project ............................................................. 126

Table 5:24 Summary Matrix of Predicted Impacts due to Proposed Project ..................................... 130

Table 6:1 : Environmental Management Plan Matrix ......................................................................... 136

Table 6:2 Parking Details – Independent Floors Project .................................................................... 153

Table 6:3 Trees that can be used as barrier for Air Pollution ............................................................. 153

Table 6:5 Run-Off Coefficient Parameters ......................................................................................... 160

Table 6:6 Wastewater Inlet and Outlet Characteristics ....................................................................... 166

Table 6:7: Proposed List of Plant Species .......................................................................................... 175

Table 6:8 LPD Levels for the Design of Residential Block ............................................................... 179

Table 6:9 Used of Material with Recycled Contents .......................................................................... 182

Table 6:10 Thermal Factors for Building component ....................................................................... 182

Table 6:11 Thermal Properties of Enhance Building Material ........................................................... 183

Table 6:12 List of Codes Adopted for Structural Safety..................................................................... 194

Table 7:2: Applicable Standards for different Environmental Components ....................................... 217



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. xiii

List of Figures

Figure 1.1 Organisation Chart ................................................................................................................ 2

Figure 1.2 EIA Methodology .................................................................................................................. 5

Figure 2.1 Location of the Proposed Project Site on GMUC 2031 AD Map ....................................... 10

Figure 2.3 Location of the Proposed Site on District Map ................................................................... 11

Figure 2.4 Location Map of the Proposed Site on Survey of India Toposheet No H43X3 .................. 12

Figure 2.5 Location of Site on Google Image ....................................................................................... 12

Figure 2.6 Geographical Setting of Project Site.................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.

Figure 2.7 Environmental Sensitivity with 15 km & 1 km radius of the Project SiteError! Bookmark

not defined.

Figure 2.8 Site Connectivity at Project Site ......................................................................................... 14

Figure 2.9 Site Features within 500 m Boundary of Project Site .......................................................... 15

Figure 2.10 Photographs - Site and Surrounding Features ................................................................... 16

Figure 2.12 Land-use Distribution of Proposed Project Site ................................................................ 17

Figure 2.13 Section of Proposed Independent Floors ........................................................................... 19

Figure 2.14 Elevation of Proposed Independent Floors ........................ Error! Bookmark not defined.

Figure 2.15 Perspective View of Proposed Independent Floors ........................................................... 20

Figure 4.1 Contour Plan of the Project Site .......................................................................................... 49

Figure 4.2 Locations of Field Investigations points at Project Site ..................................................... 51

Figure 4.4 Drainge Pattern within 500 m Radius of Project Site ......................................................... 54

Figure 4.5 Wind Rose Diagrams for 8.30 Hrs. (Morning ) for the Year 1985-2002 ........................... 58

Figure 4.6 Wind Rose Diagrams for 17.30 Hrs. (Evening) for the Year 1985-2002 ............................ 59

Figure 4.7 Wind Rose Diagram for Year 2009 – 2014 ......................................................................... 59

Figure 4.8 Wind Rose at Project Site .................................................................................................... 62

Figure 4.9 Air, Noise, Water and Soil Monitoring Locations .............................................................. 63

Figure 4.10 Concentration of SO2 (g/m3) ............................................................................................ 64

Figure 4.11 Concentration of NOx (g/m3) .......................................................................................... 64

Figure 4.12 Concentration of CO (g/m3) ............................................................................................ 65

Figure 4.13 Concentration of PM10 (g/m3) .......................................................................................... 65

Figure 4.14 Concentration of PM 2.5 (g/m3) ........................................................................................ 66

Figure 4.15 Location of Traffic Volume Count .................................................................................... 68



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. xiv

Figure 4.17 Road network considered for traffic forecasting ............................................................... 70

Figure 4.18 Hierachy of Roads within Project Site .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.

Figure 4.19 Groundwater User Map of Gurgaon District ..................................................................... 73

Figure 4.20 Site Plan showing location of surveyed points .................................................................. 75

Figure 4.21 Resistivity Curve for surveyed point VES-1 Obtanied for Proposed Project Site ............. 76

Figure 5.1: Spatial Distribution of 24 Hours Average SO2 GLC (µG/M3) ............................................. 99

Figure 5.2: Spatial Variation of 24 hours averaged NOx GLC (µG/M3) .............................................. 100

Figure 5.3: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM10 GLC (µG/M3) ......................................... 101

Figure 5.4: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM2.5 GLC (µG/M3) ........................................ 102

Figure 5.5: Spatial Distribution of 1 hours averaged CO GLC (µG/M3) ............................................. 103

Figure 5.6: Spatial Distribution of 24 Hours Average SO2 GLC (µG/M3) ........................................... 107

Figure 5.7: Spatial Variation of 24 hours averaged NOx GLC (µG/M3) .............................................. 108

Figure 5.8: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM10 GLC (µG/M3) ......................................... 109

Figure 5.9: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM2.5 GLC (µG/M3) ........................................ 110

Figure 5.10: Spatial Distribution of 1 hourly averaged CO GLC (µG/M3) .......................................... 111

Figure 5.11: Spatial Variation of Incremental Noise Level during Construction Phase without Control

............................................................................................................................................................ 113

Figure 5.12: Spatial Variation of DG-set Noise Levels around the Project Site during Operation Phase

without Control ................................................................................................................................... 114

Figure 5.13: Water Balance for Proposed Project ............................................................................... 120

Figure 6.1: EMP Implementation Chart .............................................................................................. 135

Figure 6.2 Schematic layout of Cement Godown ............................................................................... 152

Figure 6.3 Traffic Circulation and Parking Plan ................................................................................. 155

Figure 6.4 Traffic Circulation & Parking Plan: Stilt Level (A4 type Typical) ................................... 156

Figure 6.5 Traffic Circulation & Parking Plan: Stilt Level (A3 type Typical) ................................... 157

Figure 6.6 Section of RWH Pit Proposed ........................................................................................... 161

Figure 6.8 Dual Plumbing Line Diagram .............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.

Figure 6.9 Waste Management Flow Diagram ................................................................................... 170

Figure 6.10 Landscape Plan – Proposed Independent Floors Project ... Error! Bookmark not defined.

Figure 6.11 Electrical Line Diagram.................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.

Figure 6.12 Earth Pit Layout Plan (ESS) .............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.

Figure 6.13 Location of Lightning Arrestors in Proposed Project (TYPICAL UNIT) ...................... 200

Figure 6.14 Fire Tender Plan for Proposed Independent Floors Project ............................................. 204

Figure 6.15 Proposed Fire Escape Route Plan (TYPICAL) ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. xv

Figure 9.1 Hierarchical System of the Organisation ........................................................................... 235

Figure 9.2 Reporting Mechanism of Non-Compliance ..................................................................... 236



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. xvi

List of Annexures

Annexure 1.1 : License copy issued by DTCP (11.7188 Acres)

Annexure 1.2 : License copy issued by DTCP (1.3438 Acres)

Annexure 1.3 : Copy of Order no. 593 (Land Exchange Order) (5.075 Acres)

Annexure 1.4 : Copy of Approved ToR issued by HSEAC

Annexure 2.1 : Environment Sensitivity Map

Annexure 2.2 : Application to HUDA for Water Supply Assurance

Annexure 2.3 : Electrical Load Calculation

Annexure 2.4 : List of Building Material

Annexure 3.1 : Discharge Standards

Annexure 3.2 : Drinking Water Quality Standards

Annexure 3.3 : Ambient Air Quality Standards

Annexure 3.4 : Ambient Noise Quality Standards.

Annexure 4.1 : Site specific Metrological Data

Annexure 4.2 : CPCB Notification

Annexure 4.3 : Ambeint Air Quality Results for Winter season (Nov.’2014 to Mar.’ 2015)

Annexure 4.4 : Noise Quality Results for Winter season (Nov.’2014 to Mar.’ 2015)

Annexure 4.5 : Traffic Results for Winter season (Nov.’2014 to Mar.’ 2015)

Annexure 4.6 : Groundwater Quality Results for Winter season (Nov.’2014 to Mar.’ 2015)

Annexure 4.7 : Soil Quality Results for Winter season (Nov.’2014 to Mar.’ 2015)

Annexure 4.8 : Forest NOC

Annexure 4.9 : NOC from Depty Comissioner (DC) regarding Aravali Notification

Annexure 6.1 : Noise & Vibration Control Plan

Annexure 6.2 : Parking Calculation

Annexure 6.3 : Rainwater Harvesting Design Calculation

Annexure 6.4 : STP Design Details Report

Annexure 6.5 : Ventilation Plan

Annexure 6.6 : Energy Saving Calculations for Solar Water Heating



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. xvii

Annexure 6.7 : Energy Saving using energy efficient equipments / devices

Annexure 6.8 : List of Electrical Code

Annexure 9.1 : Standard Operating Procedures

Annexure 10.1 : Copy of MoEF accreditation of ITL Labs Private Limited

Environment Impact Assessment Report Proposed Independent Floor Development (18.138 Acres),Sector 61,


M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. P a g e | 1.

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 PROFILE OF PROJECT PROPONENT

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. Limited is one of the associate companies of Ireo Pvt. Ltd. Ireo is

amongst the largest focused Foreign Direct Investment ( FDI ) in the Indian Real Estate managing

approximately USD 2 billion of capital having the backing of Blue Chip Investors and respected

Financial Institutions. They have emerged as a major pan-India developer equipped with financial

strength to fully leverage available opportunities in this sector. All the policies and standard operating

procedures followed by Ireo Pvt. Ltd. are applicable to and are abide by all its subsidiary companies

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. , proposing to develop a Independent Floors at Sector 61, Village

Ullawas, Tehsil Sohna, District-Gurgaon, in the State of Haryana as a part of its vision to develop

state-of-the-art infrastructure for the Nation. The establishment of the project will bring more

developmental activities in the area and there will be an enhancement in the living standards of local

people.

1.2 NAME AND CONTACT ADDRESS OF PROJECT PROPONENT

The contact Name and address of M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. is as given below:

Dr. Asha Sharma, Authorized Signatory

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd.

C/o Ireo Pvt. Ltd.

Ireo Campus, Sector-59, Village-Behrampur

Gurgaon -122011

Ph.No – 0124 – 4795000,

Fax. No. 0124 -4795100

1.3 IMPLEMENTING ORGANIZATION:

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. will be developing organization and will develop Independent

Floors at Sector 61, Village Ullawas, Tehsil Sohna, District-Gurgaon, in the State of Haryana as a part

of its vision to develop state-of-the-art infrastructure for the Nation. The project will know as

“Independent Floors Development, Sector 61, Gurgaon”

1.4 ORGANIZATIONAL CHART

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. is one of the associate companies of Ireo Pvt. Ltd. Hence, all the

policies and standard operating procedures followed by Ireo Pvt. Ltd. are applicable to and are abide

by all its subsidiary companies.

The organization chart of M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. is shown in Figure 1.1




Figure 1.1 Organisation Chart

1.5 LAND DESCRIPTION

The proposed Independent Floors project has total area of 73,401.77 sq m (18.138 Acres) at Sector

61, falling under the revenue boundary of village Ullawas, Tehsil Sohna, District Gurgaon, State

Haryana. The land details showing plot no. / survey nos, status of ownership of land, license and its

validity and its collaboration agreement are given below.

1.5.1 License and its Validity

The proposed project is Independent Floors project and the license & order details granted by DTCP

are given below in Table 1.1

Table 1:1 License Details of Proposed Project Site

S.No License No // Order Date Validity Annexure

1. License No. 63 of 2009 03.11.2009 02.11.2015 1.1

2. License No. 60 of 2012 11.06.2012 10.06.2016 1.2

3. Order No. 593

(Land Exchange Order) 19.08.2014 __ 1.3




1.5.2 Status of Ownership and Collaboration Agreement

The details of land ownership along with collaboration agreement have been submitted along with

Form 1 and appraised during the 116th Meeting of HSEAC held on 07.02.2015 for ToR approval. The

summary of the land schedule is given in subsequent section.

1.5.3 Land Details showing Plot Nos. / Survey Nos.

Refer Table 1.2 given below for the details of Khasra nos.

Table 1:2 Survey Nos. / Plot Nos. of Proposed Project Site

LICENSE DETAILS ISSUED BY DTCP

Land owned by

Land schedule

Village Rect. Kila

A License No. 63 of 2009

1 Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas 15 6 min

2 Ornamental Realtors Pvt. Ltd Ullawas

14 12

15 15

14 11

20

3 BTVS Buildwell Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas

14

19

21/1

22

15 25/1

23 5/1

24 2/1/1/1

1/1/1

4 Buzz Hotels Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas 15

16

17

24

25/2

5 Regal Green Lands Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas 14 8/2 min

6 Massifcon Buildwell Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas 15 7 min

7 KSS Properties Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas 14 23/1

8 Golden View Builders Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas

15 23/2 min

23 3/1/2 min

4/1

Sub Total (A) 11.7188 Acres

B License No. 60 of 2012

1 Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. Ullawas 14 18/2

15 18 min

2

Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. (118/135), Smt.

Ramrati w/o. Lakhpat, Giriraj S/o. Lakhpat &

Baleshwari, Suman D/o. Lakhpat (2/135)

share, Smt. Sansaar Devi w/o. Hemchand

(15/135) share

Ullawas 14 21/2

3 Rampal, Kishan Ss/o. Shyamlal Ullawas 14 13/1




Sub Total (B) 1.3438 Acres

C Order no. 593 (Land Exchange Order) 5.075 Acres

Total (A+B+C)

18.138 Acres

(73,401.77 sqm)

1.6 LITIGATION(S) OR ORDERS PASSED BY ANY COURT OF LAW / ANY

STATUTORY AUTHORITY

There are no litigation pending or filled against the proposed project and / or directions orders passed

by any court of law or any statutory authority against the project.

1.7 OBJECTIVES OF THE EIA STUDY

The basic objective of this EIA study is to collect the baseline data within the impact zone so as to

identify the associated impacts and propose suitable mitigation measures due to the construction and

operation of the proposed project. The area for the general study has been identified as 10 km radius

around the proposed project. The core study area is within 500 m radius from the boundary of the

project site as per EIA Guidance Manual for Building, Construction, Township and Area

Development Projects issued by MoEF (section 3.3). The objectives of the EIA study are as follows:

i. to describe the proposed project and associated works together with the requirements for

carrying out the proposed development;

ii. to identify and describe the elements of the community and environment likely to be

affected by the proposed developments;

iii. to identify, predict and evaluate environmental and social impacts expected to arise during

the construction and operation phase of the project in relation to the sensitive receptors;

iv. to identify the negative impacts and develop mitigation measures so as to minimize

pollution, environmental disturbance and nuisance during construction and operations of the

development; and

v. to design and specify the monitoring and audit requirements necessary to ensure the

implementation and the effectiveness of the mitigation measures adopted.

1.8 SCOPE OF THE STUDY

The study involves, detailed reconnaissance visit to the site to assess the existing environmental

baseline condition of the area, subsequent assessment of potential impact from the construction

activity and operation phase of the proposed development in order to suggest the necessary mitigation

measures, required to be taken for the protection of the environment.

1.9 EIA METHODOLOGY




Project Scoping

Identify potential sources of

Impact

Predict consequences and

likelihood of Impact

Project Site

Evaluate the significance

Investigate options for

mitigation

Prepare final EIA report

(Along with EMP and

DMP)

EC from regulatory

authorities

Inte

ract

ion

wit

h P

roje

ct P

rop

on

ents

Co

nsu

ltatio

n w

ith sta

keh

old

ers

Ba

seli

ne

Stu

die

s( E

xis

tin

g d

ata

Co

llec

tio

n a

nd

new

su

rvey

s

The EIA study for the proposed project has been carried out as per the EIA guidelines of the Ministry

of Environment and Forest (MoEF) and to meet the general requirement of the Haryana State

Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (Haryana SEIAA). The EIA methodology for the

proposed project has been described in Figure 1.2

Figure 1.2 EIA Methodology

1.10 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

The proposed Independent Floors is a designated project under Category B of the Schedule and falls

under Item 8b (Townships and Area Development projects) of the Environmental Impact Assessment

(EIA) Notification dated September 14, 2006 and requires Environmental Clearance from the State

Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA).

As per the EIA notification 2006, the proposed project being a construction project, none of the

following General conditions (GC) are applicable for this development.

Table 1:3 General Conditions as per EIA Notification 2006

S.No. Criteria (within 10 km from boundary)

1 Protected Areas notified under the Wildlife (Protection Act), 1972




2 Critically Polluted Areas as notified by CPCB from time to time

3 Notified Eco-sensitive areas

4 Interstate boundaries and International boundaries

The purpose of this report is to document the outcome of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)

study for the proposed development of the Independent Floors at Sector 61, Village Ullawas, Tehsil

Sohna, District Gurgaon. M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. has retained M/s GreenC India

Consulting Private Limited to conduct the Environmental Impact Assessment study for the proposed

project as per the structure, given in the EIA Notification 2006 (and subsequent amendment made

thereof) and in accordance with the Terms of Reference (ToR) approved and issued by HSEAC

during its 116th Meeting held on 07.02.2015. The copy of approved ToR issued by HSEAC is

enclosed as Annexure 1.4.

The purpose of the EIA report is to address the information on the nature and extent of potential

environmental impacts, both negative and positive, during the construction and operative phase of the

proposed project and related activities taking place concurrently.

1.11 STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT

The Rapid Environment Impact Assessment (REIA) Report presents the existing baseline scenario,

assessment and evaluation of the environmental impacts that may arise during the construction and

operation period. Following impact prediction, required mitigation measures and Environmental

Monitoring Plan have been formulated. The content of the remainder part of the report is as follows:

Chapter 2: Project Description

Chapter 3: Legal & Administrative Framework

Chapter 4: Baseline Environment Status

Chapter 5: Pollution Sources, Impact Prediction and Impact Assessment

Chapter 6: Environment Management Plan

Chapter 7: Environmental Monitoring Plan

Chapter 8: Risk Assessment & Disaster Management Plan

Chapter 9: Corporate Environment Responsibility

Chapter 10: EIA Prepares

Chapter 11: Summary & Conclusion




2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 GOAL AND OBJECTIVES OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT

The objectives of the EIA study are as follows:

1) To describe the proposed project and associated works together with the requirements for

carrying out the proposed development.

2) To identify and describe the elements of the community and environment likely to be affected

by the proposed developments.

3) To establish the baseline environmental and social scenario of the project site and its

surroundings.

4) To identify, predict and evaluate environmental and social impacts expected to rise during the

construction and usage of the project in relation to the sensitive receptors.

5) To develop an Environmental Management Plan that identifies the negative impacts and

develops mitigation measures so as to minimize pollution, environmental disturbance and

nuisance during construction and operation of the development.

6) To design and specify the monitoring requirements necessary to ensure the implementation

and the effectiveness of the mitigation measures adopted.

2.2 SIGNIFICANCE OF PROPOSED PROJECT AT REGIONAL LEVEL

The real estate sector in India assumed greater prominence with the liberalisation of the economy, as

the consequent increase in business opportunities and labour migration led to rising demand for

commercial and housing space. At present, the real estate and construction sectors are playing a

crucial role in the overall development of India’s core infrastructure.

Residential real estate industry has witnessed stupendous growth in the past few years owing to the

following reasons:

• Continuous growth in population

• Migration towards urban areas

• Ample job opportunities in service sectors

• Growing income levels

• Rise in nuclear families

• Easy availability of finance

Demand for houses increased considerably whilst supply of houses could not keep pace with demand

thereby leading to a steep rise in residential capital values especially in urban areas. Despite

slowdown of the economy, the demand for housing continues to be strong in the country, particularly




in the National Capital Region (NCR). Real estate consultants say that the strong demand in the

housing sector in the NCR is mainly due to strong growth in the service sector in the economy, at

around 9%.

At the same time, the government's decision to open up foreign direct investment (FDI) in multi-brand

retail will also give boost to demand in several cities, including those in the NCR. At the same time,

FDI in real estate has also started picking up as the sector has emerged as one of the best sector for

investment. According to a report by Cushman and Wakefield, the total FDI in construction

development has seen a significant fall since 2008. But the recent years have seen a strong rebound.

According to the report, the first half of 2012 recorded nearly Rs 27,600 crore inflow, which is close

to breaching the total level in 2011.

As investment increase in the sector, the construction activities are also likely to further pick up in the

coming years. This will certainly add to fresh supply in the housing sector. But at the same time, the

demand for residential real estate has also picked up in the country, particularly in the NCR.

According to C&W (Cushman and Wakefield), the demand for residential units will be around 3.80

lakh during 2012-16 in the NCR.

2.3 SIGNIFICANCE OF PROJECT AT LOCAL LEVEL

Achieving land potential in a rational and judicious manner is one of the prime objectives of this

Independent Floors development. This will be done by minimizing the impact on environmental

resources, enhancing the infrastructure quality to allow uninhibited freedom for human resource

development and provide gainful economic opportunities for employment. Urban environment on

sustainable lines will be developed, by harnessing the existing environmental resources, adopting state

of the art technologies to minimize waste generation (through recycling) and dependency on

motorized modes of transportation.

This part of the district of Gurgaon is slowly experiencing new and an upgraded emerging trend in

terms of improvement in infrastructure, new roads development etc with a real urgency of new area

development. As the area will achieve good connectivity through the sector level road development

by HUDA and through the existing southern peripheral road and Golf link road and railways, hence

these factors are likely to attract the building construction sector to come up to provide the better

infrastructure facility for the increased population.

The proposed project will lead to following benefits.

Improvement in social infrastructure by providing additional employment oppurtunities to the

skilled as well as unskilled people;

Trigger growth in the district and in the region as the area will be developed and will result in

associated development;




The planned development with modern infrastructure facilities and source of income would

improve quality of life of local community.

Provision of residential development to cater to the increased

2.4 PROJECT BACKGROUND

The proposed project is a designated Residential Project as per Gurgaon Manesar Urban Complex

Plan(GMUC) 2031 AD, and the license/order has been accorded by Directorate of Town & Country

Planning (DTCP) for the above said development. The copy of the license/order granted by DTCP is

enclosed as mentioned in Chapter 1. The entire Independent Floors complex would be developed in

an area of 18.138 acres, which comprises of 184 Nos. of Plots with Stilt +3 level.

2.5 SITE SELECTION CRITERIA

The overall development in Gurgaon is governed as per approved Gurgaon Manesar Urban Complex

Plan (GMUC) 2031 AD.

The proposed site is selected as per the Gurgaon Manesar Urban Complex Plan (GMUC) 2031 AD.

The project site and site surrounding areas do not have any ecological sensitive areas and will be

designed to minimize the environmental impact associated with the development. The design brief

places a strong emphasis on achieving a high level of environmental performance, durability, and

healthy indoor air quality through integrated design, best practices and emerging technologies.

Sustainability is integrated into all phases of the design process using an integrated approach which

balances social, economic, and environmental factors.

2.6 NATURE AND SIZE OF THE PROJECT

As mentioned above the proposed Independent Floors Project will be developed as an area

development project spread over a total plot area of 18.138 acres (73,401.77 sqm) in the Sector 61,

village Ullawas, Gurgaon, Haryana.

The proposed project is a designated residential project as per Gurgaon Manesar Urban Complex Plan

(GMUC) 2031 AD. The proposed project will comprise of 184 Nos. of Plots with Stilt +3 level.

The project will also involve internal development of basic infrastructure such as internal roads,

power supply, water supply, sewer and storm water pipe network, waste management system along

with landscape development within the project premises.

2.7 PROJECT SITE LOCATION

The proposed project site is strategically located within the National Capital Region of New Delhi, in

the State of Haryana.The site falls in the Gurgaon district of State Haryana, which is one of the fastest

growing districts in India with a huge demand of commercial & residential development to cater the

need of public & private sector companies and for increased population respectively. The site is well

connected with Existing Golf course extension road (Southern peripheral Road). Apart from this, the




60 m wide HUDA sector road has been developed recently which also increases the connectivity of

the proposed development. The project location/site marked on GMUC 2031 AD is given in Figure

2.1. The Approved Sectoral Plan with project site superimposed on the same and approach roads for

the site are shown in Figure 2.2.

The proposed project site is located in the revenue village of Ullawas, Tehsil Sohna, Gurgaon,

Haryana. The location of the proposed site on District Map, SOI Topo sheet and Satellite Image is

given in Figure 2.3, Figure 2.4 and Figure 2.5 respectively.

Figure 2.1 Location of the Proposed Project Site on GMUC 2031 AD Map




Figure 2.2 Location of the Proposed Site on District Map

Project Site




Figure 2.3 Location Map of the Proposed Site on Survey of India Toposheet No H43X3

Figure 2.4 Location of Site on Google Image

Project Site




The geographical setting of the project is shown in Figure 2.6 and Coordinates of the project site are

given in Table 2.1

Table 2:1 Project Site Coordinates

Marks on image Latitude Longitude

1 280

24’21.50” N 770

06’02.91” E

2 280

24’18.75” N 770

06’03.29” E

3 280

24’17.68” N 770

05’58.82” E

4 280

24’18.75” N 770

06’03.29” E

5 280

24’19.14” N 770

06’07.99” E

6 280

24’21.26” N 770

06’07.65” E

7 280

24’21.24” N 770

06’06.45” E

8 280

24’22.05” N 770

06’06.41” E

9 280

24’22.07” N 770

06’07.35” E

10 280

24’25.11” N 770

06’07.33” E

11 280

24’25.33” N 770

06’03.77” E

12 280

24’25.33” N 770

05’58.26” E

2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL SENSITIVITY WITHIN 15 KM AND 1 KM RADIUS OF THE

PROJECT SITE

The map showing environment sensitivity within a radius of 15 km and 1 km of the project site are

shown in Figure 2.7. Also detailed Environmental Sensitivity Map is attached in Annexure-2.1

2.9 ENVIRONMENT LIABILITY OF THE SITE

The project site does not have any environmental liability.

2.10 SITE CONNECTIVITY

The connectivity of the site through air, roads and railway links is as follows:

Road – The site is well connected with the existing Golf course extension road (Southern Peripheral

Road). Apart from this 60m wide HUDA Sector road has been developed recently, which also increase

the connectivity of the proposed development.




Connectivity through Metro - The nearest existing metro station is HUDA city center, which is

located at a distance of about 7.0 km in North NorthWest direction.

Rail –– The nearest railway station is Gurgaon, which is located at a distance of 13.0 km towards

North west of project site.

Air – The nearest airport from the proposed site is the Indira Gandhi International Airport which is

located at distance of 17.0 km, towards North.

Overall the site is very well connected with NCR and nearby towns both by rail and road transport as

shown in Figure 2.8.

Figure 2.5 Site Connectivity at Project Site

2.11 SITE AND SITE SURROUNDINGS WITHIN 500 M BOUNDARY OF PROJECT SITE

The proposed site is slightly undulating with level variation of ~6 m between the highest and lowest

point. The site surroundings comprise of urban / rural setup and the land use in the surrounding area

comprises of villages with residential set up and barren land. The details of the surrounding features

have been given below and shown in Figure 2.9.

North: The nearby area towards the north side of the project site is vacant land earmarked for

residential development purpose.

South: Various Group Housing Projects are located towards the southern side of the project site.

East: The eastern side of the proposed project site is the presence of the settlements of village

Behrampur at a distance of approximately 0.87 km, towards the east direction.




West: Village Ullawas is located towards the west side of the project site at a distance of 0.48 km.

Figure 2.6 Site Features within 500 m Boundary of Project Site

2.12 PROJECT SITE AND SURROUNDING PHOTOGRAPHS

The photographs for site and site surrounding features are shown in Figure 2.10




Figure 2.7 Photographs - Site and Surrounding Features

1 2

3

4

5

67

8 9

101112

Independent Floors development Project (18.138 Acres)

Project Site

1 2

3 4

3

1 2

4

2.13 PROJECT COMPONENTS

2.13.1 Development Concept

The planning of the proposed development has been largely governed by the manmade and the natural

attributes of the site. The proposed project will comprise 184 Nos. of Plots with Stilt +3 level. One

level basement is also planned to be provided in the proposed Independent Floors project. The internal

roads of proposed project will be developed as a part of the construction work.

The site is well connected with the existing Existing Golf course extension road (Southern peripheral

Road). Apart from this, the 60 m wide HUDA sector road has been developed recently which also

increase the connectivity of the proposed development. Pedestrian pathways and footpaths of

adequate widths will be provided for pedestrian safety and to reduce the vehicular movement within

the site. Total area under roads for the proposed land will be 18,065.74 sqm

2.13.2 Land Use Distribution and Area Statement

The site layout diagram with all the activities is shown in Figure 2.11. This illustrates the major

project components and their locations on the project site.

Environment Impact Assessment Report Proposed Independent Floor Development (18.138 Acres), Sector-

61, Village Ullawas, Gurgaon


2.13.2.1 Land Use Distribution

The proposed Independent Floors project has total licensed area of 73,401.77 sq m (18.138 acres), out

of which 13.0626 Acres of area falls under two licences and the remaining area (5.075 Acres) falls

under Land exchange of Nallah. The proposed Independent Floors project will be developed at

Sector-61, Sohna falling under the revenue boundary of village Ullawas, Tehsil Sohna, District

Gurgaon and State Haryana. The landuse distribution and area Statement of 18.138 acres for 184 Nos.

of Plots with Stilt+3 level are detailed out in Table 2.2 and Figure 2.12

Table 2:2 Landuse Distribution of Project Site

S.No Landuse Area (sq m) Percentage (%)

1 Area under Plots 43200.714 58.86

2 Road and Paved Area 18,065.74 24.61

3 Green Area including water body 9709.99 13.23

4 Undecided Land use 2425.326 3.3

Total 73401.77 100

Figure 2.8 Land-use Distribution of Proposed Project Site

2.13.2.2 Area Statement

The proposed Independent Floors project will comprise of 184 Nos. of Plots with Stilt+3 levels with

car parking facility to provided at Stilt.

The Area Statement and FSI for the proposed Independent Floors are given below in Table 2.3.




Table 2:3 Area Statement for Proposed Independent Floors

S No. Description Area (m2)

1 Total Land Area 73,401.77 (18.138 Acres)

2 Ground Coverage

2.1 Permissible 23,265.33

2.2 Proposed 21,898.26

3 Permissible FSI or FAR 1.75

3.1 Permissible FAR 66,078.80

3.2 Proposed FAR 65,962.78

4 Basement area 26,419.66

5 Non FAR area 14,859.57

6 Stilt Area 18,128.78

7 Total proposed built up area including Basement

(3.2 + 4 + 5+6)

1,25,370.79

2.13.3 Project Site Elevation and Sections

The height of the buildings is 13 m. The section and elevation for the proposed project is given below

in Figure 2.13 and Figure 2.14 respectively. The perspective view of the project site is shown in

Figure 2.15.




Figure 2.9 Section of Proposed Independent Floors




Figure 2.10 Perspective View of Proposed Independent Floors

2.13.4 Population Details

The population detail for the proposed development comprising of plots has been given in Table 2.4.

Table 2:4 Population Details for Proposed Independent Floors Project

S.No Particular Details Total dwelling

Units

Occupancy per

Unit

Total

Occupancy

1. Type of Dwelling Units

a) Independent Floors 552 4.5 2484

Total 552 -- 2484

2.14 UTILITIES PROPOSED DURING CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION PHASES

The infrastructure facilities planned for the proposed project are highlighted in the following sub-

section and explained in detailed under Chapter 6 - Environmental Management Plan.




2.14.1 Water Requirement and Supply

2.14.1.1 Water Requirement

During construction phase, total water requirement is about 150 KLD, out of which 80 KLD is the

average peak demand of construction activities water requirement and domestic water requirement

for labourers is 70 KLD, (Considering 1200 construction labors during the peak construction period

@ 45 lpcd water demand as per Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organisation

(CPHEEO) and 200 will be residing in labour camp @ 86 lpcd as per Manual on Construction &

Large Building Projects).

During the operation phase, the estimated total water demand for project is about 480 KLD. The

detailed water calculation is given in subsequent section 5.6.2.1. The break-up of water demand in

proposed Independent Floors project is given below in Table 2.5:

Table 2:5 Water Demand in Proposed Independent Floors Project

S. No Details Independent Floors Project

1 Fresh 231 KLD

2 Recycle 249 KLD

3 Total 480 KLD

2.14.1.2 Water Source

During the construction phase, treated raw water to be collected and transported from STP of HUDA

and then further treatment will be given to same at project construction site as per the desired

construction water quality. The potable water requirement will be met by Tanker Supply.

During operation phase, the total water demand will be met primarily through public water supply

(HUDA Municipal Water Supply) system and reuse of treated wastewater from STP. The details on

water resource development are given in Section 5.6.2

In case of any abstraction of groundwater, due permission will be obtained from CGWA. The receipt for

Water Assurance from HUDA is attached for reference as Annexure-2.2

2.14.2 Sewage System

During the construction phase, it is expected that 57 KLD of waste water will be generated from

labour camps, which will be disposed off in septic tanks. The waste water from septic tanks will be

disposed through mobile STP tankers.

During Operation Phase, the total wastewater generated from the project site will be 277 KLD. This

generated wastewater will be treated in an on-site sewage treatment plant based on Membrane




Bioreactor along with provision of UV treatment having total design capacity of 320 KLD. The

details of wastewater generation and the proposed STP in above said project is given in Table 2.6:

Table 2:6 Wastewater Generation in Proposed Independent Floors Project

S. No Details Quantity STP Capacity Treatment Technique to be used

in Proposed STP

1 Wastewater

Generation 277 KLD 320 KLD

Membrane Bioreactor alongwith

provision of UV treatment.

The details of design of STP are given in Section 6.7.4

2.14.3 Rainwater Harvesting System

To conserve the water resources, scientifically designed rain water harvesting structures will be

installed at 16 locations. Apart from these, water body has been created to recharge the aquifers.

Details of RHW structure in proposed project are given in Table 2.7.

Table 2:7 RWH and Water Body Details in in Proposed Project

S. No Details Nos. / Area

1 Rainwater Harvesting Structure 16 Nos.

2 Water Body 1005 sq m

The details design of rainwater harvesting structure including run-off calculations are given in Section

6.7.2 and water body details are presented in Section 6.7.3.

2.14.4 Power Requirement and Supply

Power requirement has been estimated for both construction and operation phases.

During construction phase, power will be met through DG sets and during the operation phase will

be sourced from Dakshin Haryana Bijlee Vitran Nigam Limited (DHBVNL), with back-up power

supply during operation phase of the proposed development.

Total Power requirement for the construction phase is approx. 1000 kVA which would be met through

DG sets

The power requirement for the operation phase is estimated in terms of the total maximum demand

load, which is approximately 6,402 kW (6.4 MW). Backup power will be provided by installing 5 DG

sets of 4 x 1500 & 1 x 500 KVA capacity each.The electrical load calculation is enclosed as

Annexure 2.3. The fuel consumption for 5 Nos. of DG sets has been calculated to be approx. 1.3




KL/hour of HSD. The DG sets will be installed with acoustic enclosures and adequate stack height as

per the CPCB norms. The power demand for the proposed Independent Floors project is given in

Table 2.8.

Table 2:8 Power Demand in Proposed Independent Floors Project

S. No Details Total

1 Total Demand Load 6402 kW

2 Total Power Back-up 6500 kVA

3 DG Set Configuration 4 x 1500 kVA & 1 x 500 kVA

2.14.5 Parking

The project premises will have specialized parking facilities for smooth traffic movement within the

project site. Parking facility is provided inside the project premises and is provided on the stilt. It is

proposed to provide a provision for 1397 Nos. at Stilt. A total provision for 1397 Nos. will be

provided.

The parking provisions made in proposed project are given in Table 2.9.

Table 2:9 Parking Details of Proposed Independent Floors Project

S. No Details Total Parking

1 Stilt 1397 Nos.

Total Parking Proposed 1397 nos.

The details of parking calculations and parking plan for proposed Independent Floors have been given

in Section 6.5.4.

2.14.6 Municipal Solid Waste Management

About 1.25 TPD of MSW will be generated during the operation phase form the proposed

Independent Floors and will be handled as per the Municipal Solid Waste Management & Handling

Rules, 2000.

2.14.7 E-Waste Management

Approximate 3.59 TPA of e-waste will be generated in a worst case scenario from the proposed

development which will be stored at an identified location to be setup within site and will be sent to

authorized recyclers or e-waste processing plants for treatment as per E- Waste [Management &

Handling] Rules, 2010.




2.14.8 Sewage Sludge

An approximately 0.02 TPD of dried sludge will be generated from the proposed STP of 320 KLD

capacity based on Membrane Bioreactor along with provision of UV treatment. The sludge from

STP will be used as manure in landscaping.

The details of Solid Waste Management are given in Section 6.8.4.

2.14.9 Energy Conservation Measures

In the Operational Phase, appropriate energy conservation measures & management plan will be

adopted in order to minimize the consumptions of non-renewable fuel. The details of measures

adopted along with details of percentage saving are described in the Environment Management Plan,

Section 6.12 & Section 6.13

2.14.10 Fire Safety Facilities

The proposed project involves development of Independendent floors which will cater to various

activities and may cause fire hazard. A proper fire fighting system will be designed as per the

provisions of National Building Code (NBC) of India, 2005 Part-IV and Fire Protection Manual

issued by Tariff Advisory Committee and the latest Indian and International standards/codes. The fire

protection system will cover the entire internal and external premises of the buildings.

Following systems are planned to be provided for the building:

Portable Fire extinguishers

The fire protection details for Proposed Independent Floors are as provided in Section 6.17

2.14.11 Demolition

There is no existing structure or any material on the site which requires demolition. Hence no debris

treatment is required.

2.14.12 Building Materials and Technologies for Construction

The list of building material is enclosed as Annexure 2.4. The building materials will be purchased

from reputed manufacturers with valid test certificates only and preference with be given to local

markets. All material will be delivered to site and shall be processed for final installation at site only.

2.14.13 Quantity of Natural Resources

Table 2.10 present the quantity of natural resources proposed to be used.




Table 2:10 Quantity of Natural Resources

Description Course Sand in Cum CoarseAggregates in Cum Diesel in KL per hour

Quantity 9000 45000 0.1

Source of

Material Local market Local market Local market

2.15 RESOURCE AND MANPOWER

To the maximum extent possible, the local labor shall be employed during construction phase.

However, semi-skilled manpower and technical personnel shall be hired from outside. During the

peak period of construction, approximately 1200 labours will be hired, out of which 1,000 labourers

will be hired from nearby areas and about 200 labourers will be residing in labour camp that will be

developed on temporary basis & will destroy the same after completion of construction phase.

Approximately, 20 persons will be employed during the operation phase of the proposed project.

2.16 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD & SCHEDULE

The total construction period for the development of proposed Independent Floors is approximately 5

Years. The construction activity will start after getting the Environment Clearance (EC) and No

Objection Certificate (NOC) from respective authorities.

The proposed construction schedule for proposed project is given below in Table 2:11.

Table 2:11 Proposed Construction Schedule (Month Wise)

S.no. Description/ Items Duration in

Month(s) Start Date Finish Date

PROJECT 60 06-08-2014 10-08-2019

a

Design & Development

work (Included GFC,

Tender award of work)

18 06-08-2014 06-02-2016

Master Plan Development 15 06-08-2014 06-11-2015

Floor Development 15 06-08-2014 06-11-2015

Services (B/ wall, gate,

guard room, Road PH,

Electrical, STP, UG/ OHT)

15 10-11-2014 06-02-2016

b Environmental approvals 6 18-10-2014 19-04-2015




c Construction Phase of

Project 36 06-02-216 08-02-2019

d Handing over of Projects 6 08-02-2019 10-08-2019

2.17 PROJECT COST

The total project cost including the land cost and construction cost is given in Table 2.12.

Table 2:12 Project Cost

Independent Floors Land Cost

(In crores)

Construction Cost

(In crores)

Total

(In crores)

(Residentail Floors ) 24.16 213.01 237.17

2.18 COMPATIBILITY WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS

The project has been design considering all EHS legislation, statutory and regulatory requirements as

detailed in Chapter 3 – Legal & Administrative Framework.

2.19 SOCIAL ACTIVITIES IN THE PROJECT

The following social activities are proposed to be undertaken:

1. Empowerment of Communities, inclusive of Socio-Economic growth

a. Skill development/vocational training (For Men & Women)

2. Community Healthcare

a. General Health camps

b. Specialised Health camps

c. Specialised Medical treatment (Indoor treatment)

d. Health Awareness camps (HIV/AIDS, General Health etc.)

3. Other activities

a. Promotion of Art & Culture

b. Promotion of local Sports & Games

c. Awareness Programs (In-house & External).

The expenditure on the above mentioned CSR activities will be carried out in accordance to the

Companies Act, 2013.




2.20 OTHER RELEVANT INFORMATION

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. proposes to incorporate features of green buildings to the

maximum extent possible.




3 LEGAL & ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK

The 1972 United Nations (UN) Conference on Human Development at Stockholm influenced the need

for a well-developed legal mechanism to conserve resources, protect the environment and ensure the

health and well being of the people in India. Over the years, the Government of India has framed several

policies and promulgated number of Acts, Rules and Notifications aimed at management and protection

of the environment. As a result, our country now has a fairly comprehensive set of environmental

legislation aimed at ensuring that the development process meets the overall objective of promoting

sustainability in the long run.

Moreover, the Indian Constitution has also incorporated specific articles to address environmental

concerns through the 42nd Constitutional Amendment of 1976. As stated in the Constitution of India, it

is the duty of the state (Article 48 A) to ‘protect and improve the environment and to safeguard the

forests and wildlife of the country’. It imposes a duty on every citizen (Article 51 A) ‘to protect and

improve the natural environment including forests, lakes, rivers and wildlife’. Reference to the

environment has also been made in the Directive Principles of State Policy as well as the Fundamental

Rights.

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICIES

Several environment policy statements have been formulated in the last few decades as a part of the

Government’s approach to integrate environmental and developmental aspects of planning. The policies

reflect a gradual shift in emphasis from pollution abatement and control to proactive and voluntary

approaches for pollution prevention in keeping with global paradigm shifts and trends in environment

management.

Following are some of the key policies that have been laid down by the Central Government:

National Forest Policy, 1988;

National Conservation Strategy and Policy Statement on Environment and Development, 1992;

Policy Statement on Abatement of Pollution, 1992.

National Environmental policy, 2006

Despite these policy documents, a need for a comprehensive policy statement had been evident for some

time in order to infuse a common approach to the various sectoral and cross-sectoral, approaches to

environmental management. As a result, a National Environment Policy (NEP, 2006) has been drawn up

as a response to our national commitment to a clean environment, mandated in the Constitution in

Articles 48 A and 51 A (g), strengthened by judicial interpretation of Article 21. The policy is still in

draft form and addresses environmental concerns in all-developmental activities.




3.2 LEGAL PROVISIONS FOR ENVIRONMENT RELATED TO BUILDING /

CONSTRUCTION / AREA DEVELOPMENT & TOWNSHIP PROJECTS

The proposed project is governed by various Acts, Rules and Regulations set by Ministry of

Environment and Forests (MoEF) at the Central level and other regulatory agencies at the State and local

level. Various environmental standards, specifications and guidelines of Central Pollution Control Board

(CPCB) and State level agencies will also be applicable.

It is important to note that the Central government framed an ‘umbrella legislation’, called the

Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 to broadly encompass and regulate an array of environmental

issues. The overall purpose of EPA is to establish an overall coherent policy and provide a basis for the

coordinated work of various government agencies with operational responsibility for the environment

and natural resources. This legislation also invests authorities with regulatory powers to address specific

issues affecting the environment. The Act does not allow any person to establish an industry, operation

or process that discharges or emits any environmental pollutants in excess of standards prescribed under

specific rules and notifications.

The Acts, Rules and Notifications applicable to environmental aspects of the construction and

operational phase of proposed project is summarized in Table 3.1 and briefly described in the following

sections.

Table 3:1 Summary of Environmental Legislation concerning Proposed Project

Legislation Areas / Activities Covered

Environment (Protection) Act,

1986 with Rules.

Overall Environment Protection

Compliance to environmental (Air, Water, Noise) Standards issued

under EPR

EIA Notification, 2006 in

supersession of 1994

notification

Building Construction Projects

Filling up of Form I and Form 1A for projects with ≥20000 sq.m

and <1,50,000 sq.m. of built-up area for construction projects.

Township and Area Development Projects

Submission of REIA Reports for township and area development

projects with area ≥ 50 ha and or built up area ≥1,50,000 sq .m

Air (Prevention and Control of

Pollution) Act, 1981 with Rules.

Protection of Air Quality

Consent to Establish (NOC) for establishing and Consent to

Operate (CTO) for activities causing air pollution from DG sets





from SPCB

Compliance to National Ambient Air Quality Standard

Water (Prevention and Control

of Pollution) Act, 1974 with

Rules.

Protection of Water Quality

Discharge of sewage from the site

Obtaining Consent to Establish (NOC) for establishing and Consent

to Operate (CTO) for activities causing water pollution from SPCB

Water Cess Act, 1977 Paying Water Cess to Local Body for sourcing of domestic water

Noise Pollution (Regulation and

Control) Rules, 2000

Compliance with Ambient Noise Standards in accordance to land

use of the area

Hazardous Waste

(Management, Handling and

Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2008

Obtaining Authorization from SPCB for handling and storing of

hazardous waste like waste oil and lubricants. Following guidance

for handling and storing of such hazardous waste

Manufacture, Storage and

Import of Hazardous Chemicals

Rules, 2000 (as amended)

Notifying regulatory authority (in this case, the State Factories

Inspectorate) of storage of hazardous substances like LPG

Follow guidance on such storage, maintain updated MSDS, submit

annual Safety Report to authority

Prepare Onsite Emergency Plan

Motor Vehicles Act with Rules Lay down restrictions for vehicles not having Pollution Under

Control Certificate (PUCC) or proper labeling to enter premises

Petroleum Act with Rules 2000 Comply with guidance and safety measures for storage, and

transportation of petroleum substances within project area premises

Municipal Solid Waste Rules,

2000

Management (Collection, Handling, Intermediate Storage) of

domestic waste from residences

Bio-Medical Waste

(Management and Handling)

Amendment Rules, 2000

Management (Collection, Handling, Intermediate Storage) of

medical waste from Health Services





State Town Planning Acts

Obtain permits and sanction for land

Develop Independent Floors in accordance with Land use and

Master plans

State Groundwater Regulation

Conform to restriction for drawing of groundwater

Arrange for recharge through Rainwater Harvesting Schemes (as

applicable)

CGWA Notification

Public Notice No. 1 of 2011

dated 13th August,

Declared “Gurgaon District” as notified area in term of Ground

water Usage

Required prior permission from CGWA for extraction of ground

water

Siting Guidance Follow Siting Guidance as far as practicable

Avoid sites which are environmentally sensitive

3.3 SITING OF PROJECTS

The siting of developmental projects in India is managed by Siting Guidelines for activities and projects

delineated by the MoEF and the CPCB. The overall purpose of the guideline is to aid proponents in

judiciously selecting project sites, keeping in mind various environmental sensitivities. However, the

guidelines for siting are not legally enforceable except for areas which are ecologically fragile (as

notified by certain specific notifications). Additionally, State Governments sometimes formulate State

wide siting guidelines for development planning.

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE OF DEVELOPMENTAL PROJECTS

The requirement involved in the setting up of select development projects (projects with potential to

cause significant environmental impacts) in India is through the Environmental Clearance (EC) Process

affected on the basis of an Environmental Impact Assessment study/filling up of necessary forms. The

EC process is mandated by the EIA notification dated September 14, 2006 and is administered by the

State level regulatory and government bodies (as the State Pollution Control Board and the Environment

Departments) and the Ministry of Environment and Forests (until formation of committee as mandated

by EIA notification of September 14, 2006) at the Central Government level.

The following projects or activities shall require prior environmental clearance from the concerned

regulatory authority, which shall hereinafter referred to be as the Central Government in the Ministry of

Environment and Forests for matters falling under Category ‘A’ in the Schedule and at State level the




State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) for matters falling under Category ‘B’ in the

said Schedule, before any construction work, or preparation of land by the project management except

for securing the land, is started on the project or activity:

1. All new projects or activities listed in the Schedule to this notification

2. Expansion and modernization of existing projects or activities listed in the Schedule to this

notification with addition of capacity beyond the limits specified for the concerned sector, that

is, projects or activities which cross the threshold limits given in the Schedule, after expansion

or modernization

3. Any change in product - mix in an existing manufacturing unit included in Schedule beyond the

specified range.

Building /Construction projects/Area Development projects and Townships projects have been

categorized under Item 8 of the Schedule.

8 (a) Any building and construction projects with area 20000 sq.mtrs and <1,50,000 sq.mtrs. of

built-up area would require filling up of Form I and Form IA.

8 (b) Any Townships and Area Development projects Covering an area ≥ 50 ha and or built up

area ≥1, 50,000 sq .mtrs would require Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study apart

from Form I and Form IA.

The Consent to Establish (also termed as the No Objection Certificate or NOC) under the Air and Water

Acts would be an independent work.

3.5 URBAN PLANNING & LAND USE

Planned urban development is encouraged by successive Five Year Plans and State Governments that

have promulgated Urban Town Planning Acts to provide for proper land use zoning for residential,

commercial and industrial areas, control on slums and urban sprawl, design and development of civic

amenities (such as sewerage and waste disposal) and development of Master Plans for important urban

areas in their respective States. The provisions of the Acts generally regulate the following principal

issues related to urban development:

Declaration of Planning Areas and constitution of Planning and Development Authorities;

Formulation and statutory approval of Land Use and Development Control Plan;

Manage the development of land according to Land Use and Development Control Plans;

Power to acquire land for urban development under the Land Acquisition Act, 1894;

Levy penalty for unauthorized development in nonconformity with plans.




The proposed project is located in Gurgaon and must conform to provisions of the State level Acts and

local bylaws.

Additionally, the Constitution has recently empowered Urban Local Bodies (Municipalities and

Corporations) through the 73rd

Amendment of the Constitution to play a crucial role in development and

maintenance of environment related infrastructure.

3.6 USAGE OF WATER & WATER POLLUTION

The use of water resources and the discharge of polluted water (sewerage) are primarily regulated by the

Water Cess Act, 1977 and the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974.

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution), Cess Act, 1977 including Rules 1978 and 1991

provides for levy and collection of Cess on water consumed by the local authorities and by persons

carrying on certain industries with a view to generate resources for prevention and control of water

pollution. It also covers specifications on affixing of meters, furnishing of returns, assessment of Cess,

interest payable for delay in payment of Cess and penalties for non-payment of Cess within the specified

time. The project will fall under the Act only if they source water from water supply schemes of urban

municipalities and corporations and these bodies levy such cess as some form of water tax to the

proposed project.

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution), Act, 1974 including Rules, 1975 (as amended up to

1988) provides for the prevention and control of water pollution and maintaining or restoring good water

quality for any establishment. The Act assigns functions and powers to the CPCB and SPCBs for

prevention and control of water pollution and all related matters.

The Environment (Protection) Rules under the EPA also lays down specific standards for quality of

water effluents to be discharged into different type of water bodies (sewers, surface water bodies like

lakes and rivers, marine discharge). The standards are presented in Annexure 3.1. Additionally, the

potable water supplied to occupants of Independent Floors should also conform to the National Drinking

Water Standard IS: 10500 (Refer Annexure 3.2).

Of late, with rapid depletion of groundwater resources in several areas of the country, efforts have been

initiated to regulate the use of groundwater resources. The focus of such acts and rules (many are which

are still in draft form) is to provide for mechanisms that would lead to replenishment of groundwater

reserves through techniques like ground water recharging.

3.7 AIR QUALITY

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 including Rules 1982 and 1983 was enacted to

prevent, control and reduce air and noise pollution. According to Section 21 of the Act, no person shall

establish or operate any activity, which can cause air pollution without obtaining Consent to Establish

(CTE) as per the Air Act.




The Act also lays down national ambient air quality standards for common pollutants like PM2.5, PM10,

Sulphur dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Carbon monoxide (CO) and Lead (Pb) with the intent

of managing air quality for different category of areas (residential, industrial and sensitive). The EPR

also specifies source emission standards determined on the basis of the impact of pollutants on human

health, vegetation and property for activities, which can pollute the air. The project would not contribute

much to air pollution; the relevant standards are presented in Annexure 3.3. The SPCBs, on a case to

basis, can also make the emission standards more stringent on the considerations of the carrying capacity

of a specific air shed and the existing pollution levels of ambient air quality.

It may be noted that normally the CTE for the Air and Water Act is provided in the form of a No

Objection Certificate (NOC) to the project proponent when the project falls under the 32 categories of

activities covered by the EIA notification. The NOC is generally provided after the submission of the

EIA report.

3.8 NOISE LEVEL

With the objective of regulating ambient noise level in the environment, the Central Government has

notified the Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, dated 26th December 1989 and amended in

February 14, 2000 under the EPA. The noise standards for different category of areas is based on the

“A” weighted equivalent noise level (Leq) are as presented in Annexure 3.4. Noise standards in the work

environment (would be relevant for construction phase of the project) are specified by Occupational

Safety and Health Administration (OSHA, USA), which in turn are being enforced by Government of

India through model rules framed under the Factories Act and Rules. The standards are presented in

Appendix - IV. The EPR also lays down equipment specific noise emission standards for Air

conditioners and Construction Equipment, which would be in use for the proposed project. Specific

standards for control of noise from traffic and other sources and measures to be taken for reduction of

noise by using acoustic treatment, exhaust muffler have also been specified through the Environment

(Protection) Second Amendment Rules, 2002 notified through notification GSR 371 (E) on 17th May,

2002.

3.9 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT

A monitoring committee (see section 7), would be responsible for collection and handling of domestic

solid waste to an approved waste disposal site as per the provisions of the Municipal Solid Waste Rules,

2000. The following provisions would apply to the project:

Organize collection of municipal solid wastes through any of the methods, like community bin

collection (central bin), building to building collection, collection on regular pre-informed

timings and scheduling.

Ensure that bio-medical and other hazardous wastes are not mixed with municipal solid wastes

and that such wastes follow the rules (the Bio-Medical Waste (Management and Handling)




Amendment Rules, 2000 and the Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2003)

separately specified for the purpose;

Separately collect and dispose horticultural, construction and demolition waste in accordance

with local legislation, bylaws or directives issued by the authorities concerned.

Organize awareness programmes in cooperation with the municipality for segregation of wastes,

promote recycling/ reuse of segregated materials and encourage community participation in

waste segregation.

Establish storage facilities by taking into account quantities of waste generation in the

complexes and locate them in such a way that it is accessible to the residents.

Ensure that such storage facilities are aesthetically acceptable and user-friendly and designed in

a way that wastes stored are not exposed. The storage facilities or ‘bins’ should also be of ‘easy

to operate’ design for handling, transfer and transportation of waste. Bins for storage of

biodegradable wastes shall be painted green, those for storage of recyclable wastes shall be

printed white and those for storage of other wastes shall be printed black.

Manual handling of waste shall be prohibited. If unavoidable due to constraints, manual

handling shall be carried out under proper precaution with due care for safety of workers

The Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2000 require facilities to classify wastes into

categories, manage them as per the prescribed guidelines and obtain prior authorization from the SPCB

for handling, treatment, storage and disposal of Hazardous Wastes. The project has the potential to

generate hazardous waste during its construction and operational phases and such waste generation

should be properly monitored and managed. The following kinds of hazardous waste may be generated

from the construction phase of the project:

Spent oil and lubricants from construction equipments;

Paint residues during the painting of the buildings;

Asbestos Contaminated Material (ACM) generated from dismantling of temporary housing for

construction workers.

3.10 STORAGE AND USE OF PETROLEUM AND HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS

The project will be storing certain hazardous substances within their premises and would have to

conform to the provisions of Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 2000 and

the Petroleum Act with Rules 2000.

The storage of Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG) in bulk for supply of cooking gas to the residents/occupants

would require the project to conform to the following requirements:




Take necessary precautions to prevent major accidents and limit their consequences to humans

and the environment;

Provide information, training and necessary safety equipments to persons working at the storage

site;

Bring major accidents involving fire or explosion linked LPG as the potential cause of

substantial loss of life and property or adverse impact on the environment to the notice of

concerned authorities (as identified in Schedule 5);

Furnish a annual Safety Audit report to the concerned authority in the pro-forma given in

Schedule 6 of the Rules;

Prepare and maintain Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance to the pro-forma given in

Schedule 9 of the Rules; and

Prepare an On-Site Emergency Plan as indicated in Schedule 11 of the Rules.

The Petroleum Rules also lay down safeguards and measures for storing of different classes of

petroleum, which will be applicable to the Service Station operating from within the premises of the site.

3.11 CENTRAL GROUND WATER AUTHORITY (CGWA) NOTIFICATION

The Central Government constituted the Central Ground Water Authority vide notification of the

Government of India in the Ministry of Environment and Forests vide Number S.O. 38 (E) dated the

14th January, 1997, as amended from time to time, for the purposes of regulation and control of ground

water development and management in the whole of India. The Authority in exercise of its powers and

performance of its functions under section 5 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 (No. 29 of 1986)

is empowered to issue directions in writing to any person, officer or any Authority and such person,

officer or authority shall be bound to comply with such directions.

Accordingly, the authority based on the ground water resource assessment undertaken by Central

Ground Water Board in consultation with the State Government vide Public Notice No. 1 of 2011

published on 13th August, declared "Gurgaon district" as "notified area” for regulation of ground water

abstraction/ development , where ground water withdrawal is more than the average annual

replenishment of ground water resources and the ground water levels are also declining on long term

basis.

Now, therefore, in exercise of the powers conferred under section 5 and clauses (xii) and (xiv) of sub-

section (2) of section 3 of the Environment (Protection), 1986 read with paragraph 2 of the notification

of the Government of India in the Ministry of Environment and Forest number S.O. 38 (E) dated 14th

January, 1997, the Authority with a view to protect and preserve the ground water resources hereby

declare the entire Gurgaon district of Haryana state as “Notified area” and issues the following

directions, which are listed as below:-

http://cgwb.gov.in/CGWA/documents/Public%20Notice%20No.1%20of%202011.pdf

http://cgwb.gov.in/CGWA/documents/Public%20Notice%20No.1%20of%202011.pdf




Restrictions in the area are imposed on construction and installation of any new structure for

extraction of ground water resources without prior specific approval of the Authorized Officer

(Deputy Commissioner) in the Gurgaon district and subject to the guidelines /safeguards

envisaged from time to time in this connection by Authority for ground water extraction and

rain water harvesting / recharge etc.

The authorized officer (Deputy Commissioner, Gurgaon) shall ensure that no new ground water

abstraction structure is constructed / installed in Gurgaon district, Haryana after the publication

of this Public Notice.

3.12 STATUTORY NATIONAL CAPITAL REGION (NCR) REGIONAL PLAN-2021

NCR Planning Board prepared a Regional Plan with the perspective year 2021 for the National

Capital Region which was notified on 17.09.2005. The Regional Plan-2021 for NCR provides a

model for sustainable development of urban and rural settlements to improve quality of life as well as

a rational regional land use pattern to protect and preserve good agricultural land, environmentally

sensitive areas and utilize unproductive land for urban areas through an inter-related policy

framework relating to settlement systems, economic activities, transportation, telecommunication,

regional land use, infrastructural facilities such as power and water, social infrastructure, environment,

disaster management, heritage and tourism.

Regional Plan-2021 for NCR has shown a great concern on various depleting natural resources like

land, water, forest, biodiversity both in sense of flora & fauna of the rapidly urbanizing NCR. Seeing

the present fast pace of growth and urbanization as well as change in approach in economic

development, like proposed Independent Floors, at present land is facing a threat of not only by way

of haphazard unplanned development, unauthorized construction, encroachments by shabby slums &

shanty areas but also unbalanced development with focus of development at the core of the Region.

In order to protect the land from conversion of good agricultural land into non-agricultural uses at

random and balanced development of the region there is a dire need of early preparation of various

plans at different level for both urban settlements as well as rural settlements following policies laid

down in the Regional Plan-2021 for NCR and with a focus to have a rural-urban continuum.

Further, to have balanced development of the NCR, it is also required that various

proposals/strategies/projects to provide the essential services/core infrastructure like shelter, water,

sewerage, sewage treatment, solid waste management, drainage, power, transport, etc. be also

implemented in a time bound manner by the constituent State Governments, Central Ministries and

their concerned Departments/Agencies. Further new approaches and innovative techniques are

required to be adopted by the concerned Agencies to improve & enhance the availability of water &

power. The ground water recharging and water harvesting are required to be integrated in the

building byelaws and amendments are also required to be carried out in various Town Planning Acts

by the Constituent State Governments for conserving the water recharging areas.




3.13 OPERATION OF MOTOR VEHICLES

The Central Motor Vehicle Act (MVA) and Rules, 1989 (MVR) prescribe that vehicles falling in the

category of transport vehicles (buses, trucks, taxis and auto rickshaws) undergo an annual fitness

certification. The motor vehicle inspectors attached to the State Transport Department generally carry

out this function. Additionally, vehicle owners also have to obtain Pollution under Check Certificate

(PUCC) from a recognized testing center and display it on their vehicles. Additionally, to address the

problem of risk associated with transportation of hazardous substances by road and the consequences of

transportation emergencies, should they arise, provisions have been laid down in the MVR.

Accordingly, any road carriage involved with the transportation of hazardous goods which can be

harmful to human life or which can possibly cause damage to the environment in case of accidents and

spillage shall have to comply with the labeling requirements and safety guidance specified in the MVR.

3.14 INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK

Whereas the legislative branch of the government (Parliament) is responsible for the enactment of

environmental law and the judiciary for its enforcement in the case of transgression, it is the function of

the executive branch (ministries, regional and local authorities) to determine policies and administer

environmental law in actual practice. Also, since an environmental dimension has now become a part of

all economic activities, an effective mechanism of coordination and control is the responsibility of the

central environmental agency so that environmental policies can be translated into action.

The Government of India took a major step in 1972 when it constituted the National Committee on

Environmental Planning and Coordination (NCEPC). Later in 1980, the Government of India

established a new Department of Environment on the recommendation of a committee constituted by the

Indian Parliament. The Central and State Pollution Control Boards were set up and entrusted with the

task of air and water pollution control in 1974.

3.14.1 Ministry of Environment & Forests

In view of the growing importance of environmental affairs, the Government of India set up a

Department of Environment in November 1980 under the portfolio of the Prime Minister. The

Department, later renamed as the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) plays a pivotal role in

environmental management for sustained development and for all environmental matters in the country.

The major responsibilities of MoEF include:

Environmental resource conservation and protection, including environmental impact

assessment of developmental projects;

Co-ordination with the other ministries and agencies, voluntary organizations and professional

bodies on environmental action plans;

Policy-planning;




Promotion of research and development, manpower planning and training and creation of

environmental awareness;

Liaison and coordination with international agencies involved in environmental matters.

Developmental project proponents are also required to submit Environmental Impact

Statements/Assessments to establish that installing adequate pollution control and monitoring equipment

plan preventive measures, and that effluent discharged into the environment will not exceed permissible

levels. The MoEF appraises these statements/assessments and approves the project from the

environmental angle. The respective State Pollution Control Board is to give a No Objection Certificate

(NOC) before the EIA exercise is undertaken.

3.14.2 Central & State Pollution Control Boards

The Central Pollution Control Board is directly responsible for pollution control throughout the national

territory. In addition to the control of air, noise and water pollution it is also responsible for to ensure

effective control on disposal of hazardous wastes and storage and handling of hazardous chemicals and

substances.

Additionally, with the enactment of air and water pollution laws, states have set-up their own Pollution

Control Boards (SPCBs) to monitor industrial emissions and effluents and to approve the operation of

new industries after careful scrutiny. The functions of the SPCBs include:

The planning of comprehensive state programs for the prevention and control of air and water

pollution and to ensure the implementation thereof.

Inspection of control equipment, industrial plants, etc.

Establishing norms in consultation with the Central Board and having regard to national air

quality standards, gaseous emission standards from industrial plants, automobiles, etc. Different

emission standards may be laid down for different industrial plants, having regard to the

quantity and composition of emissions into the atmosphere from such plants and the general

pollution levels in the area;

Advising the State Government on siting of new polluting industry.

3.14.3 Municipalities & the Municipal Corporations

The Constitution (74th) Amendment Act of 1994 accorded constitutional status to the urban local bodies

(ULBs) and recognized the municipal governments as the third tier of governance. While prescribing a

uniform local governance structure that can be applicable across the country, it provides a framework for

elected local governments for their effective functioning to ensure provisions of urban services and

infrastructure. With the objective of bringing about a basic shift from the existing a “top down”

management system to a “bottom up” decentralized and participatory planning approach, the

amendment also provided for constitution of Ward Committees in municipalities with a population of




more than 300,000 people, Metropolitan Planning Committees and District Planning Committees for

consolidation and preparation of plans for spatial, social and economic development. The Amendment

Act also provided for devolution of financial powers from the state government for strengthening of

municipal finances.

The 12th Schedule of the 74th Amendment Act lists eighteen functions and responsibilities to be carried

out by the ULBs including public health, sanitation, conservancy and solid waste management related

activities.

3.14.4 Haryana Urban Development Authority (HUDA) Administration

The Haryana Urban Development Authority (HUDA) is a statutory body under Haryana Urban

Development Authority Act, 1977. Haryana Urban Development Authority is a prime agency of the

State Government engaged in the planned development of urban areas in the state. It undertakes

development of land after the same is acquired by the Govt. of Haryana through its Urban Estates

department for specific land uses, like residential, Commercial and Industrial etc. in accordance with

the provisions of the Development Plans of a particular area.

The Development Plans are got prepared and published by the Director Town & Country Planning

Haryana, in exercise of the powers conferred by Sub-Section 7 of section 5 of the Punjab Scheduled

Roads and Controlled Areas (Restriction of Unregulated Development) Act, 1963. After acquisition

of land, a layout plan is prepared on the basis of a plane table survey of the acquired land, and in

accordance with the norms & standards evolved by HUDA for providing a congenial living

environment.

For the purpose of ensuring health and safety of the allottees and for proper aesthetics and a desirable

street picture, Haryana Urban Development Authority( Erection of Buildings) Regulations, 1979

have been framed, which besides other design / Structural requirements, specify the proportion of the

site which may be covered with building, F.A.R., Max. height etc. in the case of different types of

buildings.

The functions of Haryana Urban Development Authority are:-

To promote and secure development of urban areas in a systematic and planned way with the

power to acquire sell and dispose off property, both movable and immovable.

Use this so acquired land for residential, industrial, recreational and commercial purpose.

To make available developed land to Haryana Housing Board and other bodies for providing

houses to economically weaker sections of the society, and

To undertake building works.




3.14.5 Haryana State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (HSEIAA) / Haryana State

Expert Appraisal Committee (HSEAC)

In exercise of the powers conferred by sub-section (1) and clause (v) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of

the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, read with clause (d) of sub-rule (3) of rule 5 of the

Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 and in supersession of the notification number S.O. 60 (E)

dated the 27th January, 1994, except in respect of things done or omitted to be done before such

supersession, the Central Government has directed that on and from the date of its publication the

required construction of new projects or activities or the expansion or modernization of existing

projects or activities listed in the Schedule to this notification entailing capacity addition with change

in process and or technology shall be undertaken in any part of India only after the prior

environmental clearance from the Central Government or as the case may be, by the State Level

Environment Impact Assessment Authority, duly constituted by the Central Government under sub-

section (3) of section 3 of the said Act, in accordance with the procedure specified hereinafter in this

notification.

As per EIA notification the projects or activities falling under category B of the schedule shall require

prior environmental clearance from the State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA),

before any construction work, or preparation of land by the project management except for securing

the land, is started on the project or activity.

Accordingly Ministry of environment Govt. of India vide notification NO.S. O. 899 (E). Dated 21-04-

08 constituted State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) for the state of Haryana.

The Authority consists of Chairman, member and Member Secretary. In order to assist the Authority,

State Expert Appraisal Committee has been constituted by Govt. of India for examination of the

project and recommendations to SEIAA. The SEAC is also consisting of Chairman and six members.

3.15 ENERGY CONSERVATION BUILDING CODE (ECBC)

Commercial building sector in India is expanding rapidly at over 9% per year spurred largely by the

strong growth in the services sector. Electricity consumption in the commercial sector in India at

present accounts for about 8% of the total electricity supplied by the Electricity Utilities, and has been

growing annually at about 11-12%. This is mainly attributed to the increasing energy intensiveness of

newly constructed commercial buildings;

Several studies in the country have shown that energy efficiency is not getting adequate attention

when the new buildings are designed. Incorporation of energy efficiency provisions at the design

stage of the new buildings is critical and so will be made mandatory by Ministry of Power by 2012 for

all new buildings.– Better to be proactive than keeping in view the Energy Conservation Act 2001

(EC Act), Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE) with technical support from USAID under its Energy




Conservation and Commercialization (ECO) Project, has developed Energy Conservation Building

Codes (ECBC) Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC)

ECBC, considering five climatic zones in India, sets the minimum energy performance standards for

large commercial buildings that have a connected load of 500 kW or greater or a contract demand of

600 kVA or more, having conditioned area of 1000 sq. m. or more.Annual energy consumption in the

conditioned commercial buildings in the country is estimated to be about 200 kWh or more per sq. m

of floor area. Electricity consumption in ECBC compliant buildings can be brought down to 120-160

kWh per sq. m., showing energy saving potential of 20- 40 % depending on the hours of building use

during the day, climatic conditions, etc.

Ministry of Power, Government of India launched ECBC 2007 on 27 May 2007 for its

implementation in commercial buildings on voluntary basis all over India, with a view to make this

mandatory in the next couple of years depending upon the experience gained during the voluntary

period. ECBC encourages energy efficiency for all building components and systems such as building

envelope, lighting, heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), service water heating, and

electric power and motors within the building facilities, while enhancing the thermal and visual

comforts and productivity of the occupants

ECBC mandates/prescribes U-factor and R values of insulation assembly for five climatic zones in

India, Solar Heat Gain Coefficients and Visible Light Transmission levels for fenestration, energy

efficiency levels of air conditioning systems, and number of other parameters for ECBC compliance

in commercial buildings. In this context, good understanding of ECBC features and application of

several developed products and technologies could play an important role in improving energy

efficiency in the buildings, leading to energy cost savings for the building owners/users.

3.16 MANUAL ON NORMS & STANDARDS FOR LARGE CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

The manual has been development by Ministry of Environment and Forests, GoI to assist the

developers and project proponents measures and and quantify environmental impacts of proposed

construction, and derive mitigation options to minimise impacts. The manual also shall enable

evaluation of construction projects by the expert appraisal committee. The proponent have use

mitigation options, other than the ones described in the manual, to mitigate environmental impacts of

the project. The manual provides a range of environmental issues that had been considered in

assessing the environmental impacts of projects and how to identify and assess the issues pertaining to

the project. The measures are suggestive and intended to assist project specific environmental

management practices. The manual details out the submittals required to fulfil requirements of EC

Application (Form 1 and 1A). This manual also comprises of a list of mandatory and expected criteria

that needs to be adopted in a project for getting necessary clearance from regulatory authority.




4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT STATUS

4.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the existing environmental settings in the study area. In order to identify any

potential impact on and to the natural and socioeconomic environment, it is essential to have a

thorough understanding of the nature of the existing environment prior to commencement of the

proposed activities. This acts as a need to characterize the existing baseline environmental and socio-

economic conditions through primary monitoring, undertaking focused surveys and the collection of

secondary information from various published sources. The major purposes of describing the

environmental settings of the study area are:

To assess the existing environmental quality, as well as the environmental impacts of the future

developments being studied;

To identify environmentally significant factors or geographical areas that could preclude any

future development.

Additional purposes of the baseline studies are to provide sufficient information so that decision

makers alien with the general location can develop an understanding of

The project need

Environmental characteristics of the study area

The following section describes the environmental setting of the site, period, components and

methodology for the baseline studies in detail.

4.2 METHODOLOGY OF CONDUCTING BASELINE STUDY

The guiding factors of the present baseline study are the requirements laid down by the Central

Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and guidelines as per the Environmental Impact Assessment

Notification.

The baseline environmental monitoring has been carried out in winter season of 2014-2015 for a

period of one season (3 month) (3rd

November’2014 – 10th March’2015) and the data have been used

for EIA study. The above mentioned time period has been duly approved by HSEAC during the 116th

ToR appraisal meeting held on 07.02.2015.

For the purpose of the EIA study, the general impact zone for the proposed implementation shall

confine within a radius of 10 km from the center of the project site and specific impact within the

project area.

The studies were conducted by considering the following:

The various environmental attributes were divided into primary and secondary studies. Primary

attributes such as micro-meteorology, air environment, water, soil, noise, traffic, flora and fauna




and socio-economic aspects were assessed and on-site monitoring and review of the past studies

conducted; and

Secondary attributes such as land use studies, geology, physiological characteristics have been

assessed by literature review of studies conducted in the past and by various government

publications.

The baseline studies started with reconnaissance survey and site visits in the study area for fixing the

monitoring locations for collecting the primary data. Various Government, Semi-Government

departments were approached for getting information for the secondary data generation.

4.3 CRITERIA FOR BASELINE ENVIRONMENT STUDY

For the purposed of EIA study, the study area has been classified into general study area and core study

area. The general study area extends upto 10 km radius from the site and has been studied for any likely

general impacts. The core area for the proposed implementation shall confined within a radius of 500 m

from the boundary of the project site, since the nature of the project is such that most of the potential

impacts are likely to occur within this area.

Baseline monitoring study has been conducted for one season. The location of the baseline monitoring

has been selected with respect to proposed land-use and environmental susceptibility of the critical

areas. The sampling locations have been selected on the basis of the following factors:

Predominant wind directions recorded secondary scoured –

http://www.windfinder.com/windstats/windstatistic_delhi_indira_gandhi_airport.htm#

Existing topography;

Drainage pattern and location of existing surface water bodies like ponds, tals, nalas;

Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;

4.4 COMPONENTS AND PARAMETERS FOR BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY

The various components studied as a part of the baseline study are discussed in the following sections

components:

Physical Environment

Air Environment

Noise Environment

Water Environment

Land Environment

Ecological Environment

Socio-Economic Environment

http://www.windfinder.com/windstats/windstatistic_delhi_indira_gandhi_airport.htm




The different parameters of the above components (as mentioned in the Terms of Reference) are

furnished in Table 4.1.

Table 4:1 Environmental Components & Parameters for Baseline Study

S. No Components Parameters

1 Physical Environment

Land Use Pattern

Landuse within 10 km radius from the project Site

Landuse within project Site

Geography & Topography

General terrain

Relief / Contour, Slope & Terrain of Project Site

Geology

General Geology of the Area

Sub-surface Geology

Geotechnical Investigations at Site

Tectonics Seismo-tectonic & nature of the study area

Cyclones and Storm

Surges

Cyclones and / or storm surges within 10 km Radius from the

project Site

Mineral Resources Mineral resources of the area and the site

Drainage Drainage pattern within 500 m radius of project site

Cropping Pattern Cropping Pattern in the Gurgaon

2 Air Environment

Meteorological Data

Secondary data for climatic aspects collected from nearest IMD

station - temperature, precipitation, wind speed, wind rose,

atmospheric stability and mixing height.

Primary data for climatic aspects collected by onsite meteorological

monitoring conducted for one season for relative pressure,

temperature, precipitation, humidity, wind speed and wind direction





Ambient Air Quality

Ambient air quality monitoring at identified locations

Parameters: PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, Pb and CO

Frequency: 8 hourly sample for PM10, PM2.5 , SO2, NOx, and 1

hourly sample for CO - 2 times a week for 1 month

Location: Five Locations

3 Noise Environment

Ambient Noise Quality

Ambient noise quality monitoring at identified locations (Leq day,

Leq night)

Frequency: Continuous monitoring (24 hourly)

Parameters: Equivalent Noise level in dBA (Leq day & Leq Night)

Location: Five Locations

4 Traffic

Traffic Volume Count Existing Traffic Volume Count at one junction during weekday

Traffic Projection

Population and Trips Generation for Horizon Year 2021

Traffic project using Cube Voyager Software

Traffic scenario within project during operation phase

Hierarchy of road within project site

5 Water Environment

Ground Water Resources

and Availability

Ground water resources in the study area, depth of water table

Hydro-geology within project site

Vertical Electric Soundings (VES) test to know the groundwater

regime in the project site





Surface Water Resources

and Availability

During construction

During operational

Alternate Sustainable Water Management Strategies

Water Quality

Groundwater quality near the project site monitored and compare

with IS 10500 standards

Construction water quality test and compare with IS 456:2000

standards

6 Land Environment

Soil

Study the soil profile of the study area by collecting one grab soil

samples from project site

Soil type & Characteristics

Soil porosity and Permeability

Sub soil permeability

Inherent Fertility

7 Biological Environment

Habitat Assessment Assessment of habitation within the project site

Terrestrial Ecology

Study of flora within 10 km radius and project area

Study of fauna within 10 km radius and project area

8 Socio-economic

Environment

Genral Socio-economic profile

Demographic profile

Economic activity and livelihood pattern





Existing Physical & Social Infrastructure Facilities in the Region

4.5 PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT

4.5.1 Land Use Pattern

The objectives of land use studies are

To determine the existing land use pattern in the study area and to assess its compatibility with

the proposed development;

To analyze the impacts on land use in the study area.

The study of land use in the area enables one to know about the present land use practices as well as

to know the type of land that can be used for various development activities envisaged in post project

scenario. It also enables to envisage the scenario emerging due to the increase in demand for land with

increase in population and the impacts arising due to the interface with the various project activities.

4.5.1.1 Landuse pattern within Project Site

A study of the land use pattern of the project site reveals that the proposed project site is very sparsely

vegetated land with very small bushes. There are no habitations, forests and crops within the project

site.

4.5.2 Geography & Topography

4.5.2.1 General Terrain

The present Gurgaon district comprise of blocks Tauru, Nuh, Pataudi, Nagina, Punhana, F.P.Jhirka,

Sohna, Gurgaon & Farrukhnagar. It is the southern-most district of Haryana. On its north, it is bounded

by the district of Rohtak and the Union Territory of Delhi.Faridabad district lies to its east. On its south,

the district shares boundaries with the states of Uttar Pradesh and Rajasthan. To its west, lie the district

of Rewari and the State of Rajasthan. The overall topography of the project site is marked by alluvial

plains and at some places by undulating dunes. The average plain elevation of the district is about 215-

220 meters above mean sea level.

4.5.2.2 Relief / Contour, Slope & Terrain of Project Site

From the contour map (Refer Figure 4.1), it has been observed that the site has moderate topography

with slight variation of highest and lowest point. The existing ground levels (EGL) at the time of the

topographical survey varies from RL 237.5 (lowest) to 244 m (highest). The site slopes slightly from

east towards west.

Environment Impact Assessment Report Proposed Independent Floor Development (18.138 Acres), Sector-61, Village Ullawas, Gurgaon


Figure 4.1 Contour Plan of the Project Site


M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd., P a g e | 50.

4.5.3 Geology

4.5.3.1 Geology of the Area

The Delhi Supergroup is exposed in the Aravalli Mountains of Rajasthan. These mountains extend from Delhi to south west direction through Haryana and

Rajasthan up to Gujarat. The succession of Delhi Supergroup is composed mainly of quartzites, conglomerates, grits, slates and Phyllites.

The succession of Delhi Supergroup has been divided into two parts. The Lower part, which is predominantly arenaceous, is called the “Alwar Group” and the

Upper part which is mainly argillaceous is called the “Ajabgarh Group”. In Alwar area, there is a succession of calcareous group rok bed in between Alwar and

Ajabgarh groups.

The succession of the Delhi Supergroup is given below given in Table 4.2.

Table 4:2 Geological Sequence of the Area

Group Lithology

Ajabgarh Group Phyllites and slates with calc-gneisses and calc-schists

Alwar Group Quartzites, grits and conglomerates

----------------------------Unconformity-----------------------

Raialo Group of banded gneissic complex

The proposed project site falls in Alwar Group. The rocks of the Alwar Group are distributed though unevenly, throughout the Northern parts of the Aravalli

range.

The Alwar succession, estimated to be more than 3 km in thickness, is almost entirely made up of compact quartzites, conglomerates, grits and slates. The

succession contains several sill like bodies of epidiorites showing both the intrusive and extrusive character.

4.5.3.2 Geotechnical Investigations at Site

Geo technical study has been carried out to investigate the stratigraphy at the site and to develop engineering recommendations for foundation design and

construction.

To accomplish these purposes, the study was conducted in the following phases:

Drilling a total of four (4) boreholes to 15 m depth or refusal, whichever is earlier; in order to evaluate the stratigraphy at the site, and to collect

samples for laboratory testing;

Testing selecting soil and groundwater samples in the laboratory to determine their pertinent index and engineering propertiesof the soils; and

Analyzing all field and laboratory data in order to develop recommendations for design and construction of foundations.

A layout plan showing the locations of our field investigation points is illustrated in Figure 4.2



Figure 4.2 Locations of Field Investigations points at Project Site

Results of Geo-Technical Investigation

As per the results of geo-technical investigation carried out at site, following findings were obtained

1. Site Stratigraphy: The surficial soils at the site primarily consist of alternating layers of sandy silt and silty fine sand to the maximum explored depth. The

site generally consist of Medium dense brown silty fine sand with traces of gravel to about 6.0m depth, below this Dense to very dense brown sandy silt, low

plastic to about 11.0m depth, below this Very dense brown silty fine sand with traces of gravel is encountered to about 15.45m. There is a variation in the

depth and thickness of the various strata across the site.

2. Ground Water: Ground water was encountered at about 14.7m depth at the time of field investigation. Fluctuations may occur in measured water levels due

to seasonal variations in rainfall and surface evaporation rates.

3. Liquefaction Susceptibility Assessment: Liquefaction is not likely to take place at the site in the event of an earthquake.

The detailed site stratigraphy and engineering recommnadations for foundation at proposed project have been presented in geotechnical investigation report

which has already been submitted along Form 1.

4.5.4 Seismo-Tectonic & Nature of Study

The proposed site falls in Zone IV, as per seismic zoning map of India and hence is susceptible to earthquakes. The seismological map of the project site is

shown in Figure 4.3. The history of earthquake in the NCR region for last 30 years is shown in Table 4.3.

Seismicity of the proposed site will be taken into consideration during designing of the structural components of the development in the construction phase. The

depth of the foundation, footing of the structural components, the bending moment calculations shall adhere to the criteria of seismic load. Necessary seismic

factors, suggested by Indian Meteorology Department (IMD IS1893-Part I, 2002) shall be incorporated suitably, while designing the structures to safeguard

against earthquake risks.



Figure 4.3 Seismological map locating project site

Table 4:3 History of Earth Quake in NCR Region from April 1980 to March 2013

Dates

Location

Magnitude

Latitude (°N) Longitude (°E)

21 May 2014 - - 5.6

12 Nov 2013 - - 3.1

16 April 2013 28.87 95.12 5.3

30 April 2013 J & K – HP Border 4.1

1 May 2013 J & K – HP Border 5.8

5-Mar-12 28.808 76.772 4.9

7-Sep-12 28.38 77.12 4.2

16-Nov-94 28.5 76.95 2.9

15-Oct-94 28.59 79.92 2.8

28-Jul-94 28.51 77.25 2.8

3-Dec-93 28.6 77.4 3.5

6-Aug-93 28.64 77.14 2.5

27-Mar-93 28.63 77.2 3.6

16-Feb-93 28.63 76.35 2.6

6-Jun-92 28.65 76.69 2.8

27-Aug-90 76.35 28.58 4.0

15-May-90 76.43 29.12 4.1

27-April-80 77.38 28.37 4.7



4.5.5 Cyclones and Storm Surges

As per the records collected from IMD, no cyclones and / or storm surges have been recorded during the last 25 years in the region.

4.5.6 Mineral Resources

The mineral resources, available in the district comprise of silica sand, building stone, kallar/reh and and brick clays. The quarries of silica sand are located on

Harchandpur-Badkhal ridge, Bandhwari & Sohna ridge near Kharak. The building stones are quarried at Ghamrauj, Ranyalla Basidpur, Rithath, Sohna & Rojka

whereas the slate is mined around Tigaon and Ghat Shamsabad.

4.5.7 Drainage Pattern

The proposed project site area does not have any drains or streams within 500 m radius of project site; hence the proposed development would not involve any

alteration of the natural drainage system. However, the natural drainage of the area will not be affected as drains/channels will be provided within the proposed

site area. The project will involve construction of paved areas and hence the quantity of runoff will increase due to reduced infiltration. This runoff will be

collected through a well-designed storm water network and will be recharge ground water through rain water harvesting pits. Refer Figure 4.4 showing that no

natural drainage pattern is present in the proposed project site.



4.6 CROPPING PATTERN

The predominate farming system in Gurgaon district is Agriculture integrated with Animal Husbandry. The major cropping systems under the existing farming

system are bajrawheat, bajra-mustard guar-wheat and guar-mustard. Wheat and Mustard are the main crops in rabi, which occupy 49,833 ha and 21,967 ha,

respectively with an average productivity of 36.80 and 12.40 q/ha. In kharif, bajra is the major crop occupying 32,833 ha with the productivity of 14.25 q/ha.

Table 4:4 Area, production and productivity of Major Crops in Gurgaon

Crop Area (ha) Prod (tons) Productivity (Kg/ha)

Wheat 49833 183592.5 36.8

Musturd 21967 27246.2 12.4

Bajra 32833 46801.6 14.25

Paddy 2100 6484.5 30.88

Source: Deputy Director Agriculture, Gurgaon

4.7 AIR ENVIRONMENT

Assessment of prevailing ambient air quality status in the vicinity of proposed project site is an important part of environmental impact assessment study. The

tropical climatic conditions, especially monsoon winds prevailing in India mainly control the transport and dispersion of air pollutants during different seasons.

According to the Indian climatology, for all practical purposes in air pollution studies, there are three seasons in a year, viz. winter, summer and post-monsoon.

Significant changes are observed in predominant winds and weather conditions during these seasons (seasonal variation) apart from the local topographical

influences, which ultimately control the air pollution impacts.

The baseline studies for air environment covers reconnaissance, identification of specific air pollutants expected to have impacts from the proposed project and

assessing their prevailing levels in ambient air at representative locations within the core study area (500 m) around the project site.

During the construction phase of the project, the following pollutant is anticipated to emitted:

PM10, PM2.5 from all construction activities.

During the operational phase of the project, the following pollutants are anticipated to be emitted:

NOx, PM10, PM2.5 and CO from vehicle exhaust within the project site and on the sector road adjacent to the site

NOx, PM10, PM2.5,, CO and SO2 from diesel generator sets.

Table 4.5 provides potential primary sources and effects of air pollutants during the construction and operational phases of the proposed project.

Table 4:5 Primary Sources & Effects of Air Pollutants due to Proposed Project

Pollutant Source Adverse Effects

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) Combustion of Sulphur-containing fossil fuels

for

Construction equipment

Vehicles

Diesel generators

Reduced visibility

Irritation of eyes

Aggravation of respiratory diseases (asthma, emphysema)

Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) Combustion of fossil fuels for


Vehicles

Diesel generators

Aggravation of respiratory illness

Reduced visibility

Formation of acid rain

PM10, PM2.5, Construction activities

Combustion of fossil fuels for construction

equipment, vehicles and diesel generators

Soiling

Reduced visibility

Aggravation of the effects of gaseous pollutants

Increased cough and chest discomfort

Reduced lung function

Aggravation of respiratory and cardio-respiratory diseases

Carbon Monoxide (CO) Combustion of fossil fuels for


Reduced visibility

Deterioration of metals, textiles, leather, finishes, coatings, etc.



Pollutant Source Adverse Effects

Vehicles

Diesel generators

Irritation of eyes

Aggravation of respiratory diseases (asthma, emphysema)

Source: South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) 1993. CEQA Air Quality Handbook

4.7.1 Meteorological Data from Secondary Sources

Meteorological conditions prevailing at a geographical area play an important role in determining its existing air quality and environmental conditions. Climate,

seasons and other meteorological parameters influence and alter site-specific activities and operations. The meteorological data collected from secondary sources

for the area are presented in the subsequent sections.

4.7.1.1 Temperature

Climatological data is used for devising baseline ambient air quality monitoring plans. Table 4.6 & Table 4.7 presents the minimum and maximum temperature

profile of the region (data collected at MET Station Palam, New Delhi) for the period 1997 to 2011 from Indian Meteorological Department (IMD), Lodhi Road,

New Delhi. As per the data given in Table 4.6 and Table 4.7, the study area experienced averaged extreme lowest temperature 5.9o

C in the month of December,

2005 and extreme highest 42.6o Cin the month of June, 2009 respectively.

Table 4:6 Averaged Minimum Temperature Profile (1997 to 2011) –Met station Palam

DATE JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

1997 6.6 9.2 15.2 20.4 24.4 25.9 27.4 25.8 25.2 19 14.2 9.2

1998 7.2 11.2 14.4 22.9 27.9 28.1 27.1 26.4 26.1 21.6 14.9 8.9

1999 8.5 9.6 14.3 20.9 26.8 27.9 27.8 26.9 25.7 19.6 13.1 7.4

2000 7.6 9 14.2 22.5 27.4 27.6 26.2 26.5 24.5 20.2 14 7.1

2001 6.1 9.4 14.8 21.3 26.3 26.4 27.3 26.5 24.8 20.4 12.8 8.5

2002 7 9.6 15.4 23 27.2 28.6 30.7 27.2 23.5 20 13.2 8.9

2003 6.6 11 15.1 22.2 25.7 29.6 26.3 26.5 25 18 11.8 10.1

2004 7.9 9,9 16.3 23.3 26.1 27.1 28.6 26.2 24.9 19.5 13.2 9.3

2005 7.1 10.9 17.3 20.6 25.9 28.4 27.2 26.9 25.1 18.6 12.3 5.9

2006 6.6 13.3 15.5 22.7 26.8 27 28.2 26.8 24.5 20.4 14.2 18.7

2007 6.4 12.3 15.1 22.9 26.3 28.3 27.4 26.9 25.5 17.7 13.6 8.2

2008 6.3 8.3 17.3 21.6 25 26.2 26.9 26.3 24.4 21.2 13.8 10.6

2009 8.8 11 16.5 22.5 27 29 28.2 27.5 25.2 19.7 14.4 9.7

2010 8.5 11.7 18.8 25.7 28.7 28.8 27.5 26.4 24.3 21.3 15.8 8.6

2011 7 11.3 16.3 21.1 27.2 27.3 27.2 26.6 25 20 15.6 8.8

Source: India Meteorological Department (IMD), Regional Meteorological Centre, Lodhi Road, New Delhi - 110003

Table 4:7 Averaged Maximum Temperature Profile (1997 to 2011) –Met station Palam


1997 20.3 23.7 28.7 33.7 38.7 37.5 36.1 33.7 35.2 29.1 25.4 17.1

1998 19.6 23.3 27.2 37.1 42.6 39.8 34.7 33.5 33.9 31.4 27.6 22.1

1999 18.6 23.7 31.4 39.6 41.1 39.5 36.3 35.8 34.0 33.3 29.5 23.3

2000 20.2 21.6 29.9 39.2 40.8 37.6 33.6 34.5 34.8 35.2 29.4 24.1

2001 19.1 25.2 30.8 36.3 39.6 35.6 34.9 35.5 37.3 34.7 29.7 23.4

2002 20.4 24.0 31.3 39.6 41.8 39.7 40.5 35.2 32.3 34.0 28.9 24.6

2003 17.0 23.2 30.0 38.3 40.8 41.1 34.1 33.6 32.7 33.1 28.1 20.5

2004 18.4 25.2 33.7 38.8 39.5 38.3 38.5 33.5 35.7 30.9 28.6 22.7

2005 19.5 22.8 30.8 37.1 40.6 40.9 34.2 35.8 33.7 32.8 28.9 22.0

2006 21.8 29.6 29.7 38.1 40.3 38.5 35.2 35.4 34.7 34.0 28.9 22.9

2007 21.5 24.5 28.1 38.8 39.7 38.6 36.2 35.0 34.8 33.8 29.0 22.1

2008 20.0 22.5 33.3 36.9 37.7 34.7 34.8 33.4 33.6 34.1 28.7 23.8

2009 21.1 25.6 31.7 37.4 41.0 42.6 38.0 36.0 34.3 33.7 27.8 23.8

2010 19.2 25.7 34.6 41.5 42.4 41.7 35.7 33.6 31.0 33.1 27.5 22.1

2011 19.2 24.5 30.6 36.3 41.3 38.9 35.4 34.4 33.8 33.5 29.6 23.5


4.7.1.2 Precipitation



Table 4.8 shows averaged monthly rainfall during last fifteen years in Delhi.The maximum mean monthly rainfall for year 2003 is 495.6 mm and occurs during July

while the mean minimum monthly rainfall of 0.0 mm takes place in the month of October, November and December of 2008.

Table 4:8 Rainfall Data for Last Fifteen Years in Delhi (Palam)


1997 6.3 1.4 13.4 28.6 43.1 80.3 70.2 295.3 23.9 52.8 15.7 51.4

1998 1 23 16.7 4.4 6.1 107.1 166.6 186.6 131.8 49.4 9.5 0

1999 65.7 2.5 6.3 0 9.3 36.4 143.5 24.5 73.1 8 0 0

2000 17.4 44.7 5.3 2.6 32.7 96.8 232.1 127.7 27.5 0 1.4 1.5

2001 23 11.2 6.5 27.9 88.3 150.2 99 77.1 15.4 29.9 0.5 0.5

2002 16.9 11.1 0 0 150.7 13.1 1.7 121.3 124.2 0 0.9 16.1

2003 39.2 24 2.1 0 9.9 75.2 495.6 171.2 52.3 0 0.3 18.7

2004 28.4 0 0 28.3 73 16.8 65.8 218.6 2.9 76.7 0 0

2005 5 39.7 19.7 7.9 5.6 100.2 295.4 107.5 293.5 0 0 0

2006 1.8 0 25.1 3.4 44.6 53.9 107 103.2 186.9 3.4 0.2 8.2

2007 0.7 63.5 53 1 50.3 148.8 126.3 177.2 9.1 0 0 0.3

2008 0.7 0.3 0 27.3 148.6 153.1 149.5 169.6 76.5 0 0 0

2009 4.1 5.8 7.5 3.1 15.5 18.6 113.6 142.1 184.6 2.8 13.2 3.1

2010 0.7 11.2 0 7.5 12.8 9.2 203 362.3 344 1.3 27.2 3.7

2011 0.2 38.8 2.8 10 22.6 120.4 67.1 144.5 320.6 0 0 0

Source: India Meteorological Department (IMD), Regional Meteorological Centre, Lodhi Road, New Delhi – 110003

Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

2009 0.0 1.0 0.0 8.0 1.5 18.0 68.1 96.3 244.1 0.0 24.5 0.0

2010 1.0 11.3 0.0 0.0 0.2 0.8 310.8 302.6 198.5 0.0 15.0 1.0

2011 0.0 4.9 0.3 0.1 10.6 57.6 115.9 159.1 102.6 0.0 0.0 0.0

2012 1.3 0.0 0.0 3.3 1.7 1.5 147.6 249.2 81.4 0.0 0.0 0.0

2013 11.0 53.0 2.5 4.0 0.0 25.7 96.1 173.0 35.7 0.0 0.0 0.0

Source: http://www.imd.gov.in/section/hydro/distrainfall/webrain/haryana/gurgaon.txt

4.7.1.3 Cloud Cover

The historical data of cloud cover have been obtained from the Indian Meteorological Department (IMD). Table 4.9 and Table 4.10 provide the details of cloud

cover data of morning hours and evening hours of Safdarjung, New Delhi.

Table 4:9 Cloud Cover Data for Last Fifteen Years of Delhi (Safdarjung), Morning Hours (8.30 IST)


1997 2 1 4 2 2 3 5 5 3 3 3 6

1998 3 3 3 2 1 4 5 6 3 2 1 4

1999 6 3 1 0 2 2 5 4 4 1 0 2

2000 4 2 1 1 1 3 6 4 3 0 1 1

2001 4 1 2 2 3 4 6 4 1 1 0 2

2002 3 2 2 1 3 6 4 4 0 1 1 1

2003 5 2 2 2 1 3 6 4 4 0 1 1

2004 6 2 0 2 1 3 4 5 1 2 1 3

2005 4 3 2 1 2 3 5 3 4 0 0 1

2006 2 2 3 2 2 4 5 4 2 1 0 3

2007 2 3 2 1 2 4 5 5 3 0 0 2

2008 3 2 2 2 3 6 6 5 3 0 0 2

2009 3 2 2 1 2 2 4 4 2 1 - -

2010 5 2 1 1 1 3 5 6 5 0 2 1

2011 5 2 2 1 1 4 6 5 4 0 1 1


Table 4:10 Cloud Cover Data for Last Fifteen Years of Delhi (Safdarjung), Evening Hours (17.30 IST)


1997 2 2 4 3 3 4 6 5 4 4 4 4

http://www.imd.gov.in/section/hydro/distrainfall/webrain/haryana/gurgaon.txt



1998 3 3 4 3 2 4 5 6 3 2 1 0

1999 4 3 2 0 2 3 5 5 4 1 1 1

2000 2 2 1 1 2 4 6 6 3 0 1 1

2001 1 2 2 - 3 5 6 5 2 1 0 1

2002 2 3 2 3 3 3 4 6 3 0 1 2

2003 3 2 - 1 2 4 6 6 5 0 1 2

2004 2 1 0 2 2 4 6 6 2 2 1 2

2005 3 4 3 2 4 3 6 3 4 0 0 1

2006 3 2 2 2 2 3 6 3 4 0 0 1

2007 3 3 3 1 3 3 6 5 3 0 1 2

2008 4 1 2 2 3 5 6 6 4 1 0 2

2009 6 2 2 2 3 3 5 5 2 1 - -

2010 3 3 1 1 2 3 6 6 5 1 2 2

2011 0 3 1 1 2 3 6 6 5 1 2 2


4.7.1.4 Wind Speed

Wind direction is reported as the direction from which the wind blows and is based on surface observations. Over the course of a year, wind usually blows in all

directions with varying frequencies. Certain directions, which occur more frequently than others, are known as the prevailing wind directions. Pollutant

concentrations typically decrease with increasing wind speed as a result of dispersion. However, when wind speeds are high, while there is good dispersion of

gases and particles, there is more potential for re-suspending surface dusts. Wind speed near zero, indicating low turbulence and may lead to very high pollutant

concentrations near the ground. Wind speed increases with height as surface friction reduces. Ground level pollutant concentration is inversely proportional to

the wind speed. Hence, during the higher wind speed month, the ground level pollutant concentration would be less and vice.

The wind data has been obtained from nearest IMD station for the period 1993-2002. The Analysis of wind records during 1993 – 2002 shows that the winds are

generally light to moderate in this area. It can be seen that the annual mean wind speed varies from 3.9 to 9.4 Km/h. The strongest winds are observed during the

months of May – June i.e. Summer Season and the weakest during October – November. The monthly mean values of the various meteorological parameters for

the period 1993-2002 and yearwise monthly mean value from year 2000 to 2005 are presented in Table 4.11.

Table 4:11 Monthly Mean Wind Speed in KMPH (Year 1993 – 2005)

Year Jan. Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

1993-

2002 6.7 7.2 8.02 7.9 9.4 8.9 7.6 8.0 6.6 3.9 4.2 5.19

2000 7.2 6.7 6.3 7.9 12.3 8.0 7.1 8.0 7.4 3.4 4.3 5.2

2001 7.6 7.7 7.5 8.0 9.5 7.0 8.0 9.8 5.0 0.8 1.9 3.6

2002 3.4 7.0 7.2 7.3 8.5 8.0 14.2 6.8 5.8 3.9 4.3 4.3

2003 5.7 7.3 7.9 8.4 8.5 8.6 6.2 6.2 5.1 4.1 5.4 5.7

2004 6.6 8.9 9.6 8.3 11.8 8.3 10.0 7.1 7.2 3.2 3.6 6.0

2005 6.9 8.0 6.7 8.7 7.2 9.1 7.1 10.8 5.3 4.1 5.6 5.3

Statistics mean monthly wind data for the Year 2009 – 2012 is shown below in Table 4.12.

Table 4:12 Monthly Mean Speed in KMPH (Year 2009 – 2014)

Month of year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec SUM

Dominant Wind dir WNW WNW WNW WNW WNW WNW ESE ESE WNW WNW WNW W WNW

Wind probability

5 9 11 12 11 17 8 6 8 3 2 3 7

> = 4 Beaufort (%)

Average

Wind speed

(Knots)

6 7 8 8 8 9 7 7 7 6 6 6 7

Source – http://www.windfinder.com/windstats/windstatistic_delhi_indira_gandhi_airport.htm#

4.7.1.5 Wind-rose




The wind rose diagrams for the Year 1985-2002 at 08.30 Hrs. (Morning) and 17.30 Hrs. (Evening) is given in Figure 4.5 and Figure 4.6 respectively. Figure 4.5

shows that at 8.30 hrs., the predominant wind direction is west and Figure 4.6 shows North west to be the predominant wind direction at 7.30 hrs.

Figure 4.4 Wind Rose Diagrams for 8.30 Hrs. (Morning ) for the Year 1985-2002

Source: Indian Meteorological Data, GoI



Figure 4.5 Wind Rose Diagrams for 17.30 Hrs. (Evening) for the Year 1985-2002

Source: Indian Meteorological Data, GoI

4.7.1.6 Wind Rose Diagrams for the Year 2009-2014

The wind rose for the Year 2009 – 2014 for day time is given in Figure 4.7, which shows wind direction during the whole year, the predominant wind direction

during the day time is West North West.

Source: http://www.windfinder.com/windstats/windstatistic_delhi_indira_gandhi_airport.htm#

Figure 4.6 Wind Rose Diagram for Year 2009 – 2014






Source: http://www.windfinder.com/windstats/windstatistic_delhi_indira_gandhi_airport.htm#

4.7.2 Atmospheric Stability

The amount of turbulence in the ambient air has a major effect upon the rise and dispersion of air pollutant plumes. The amount of turbulence can be

categorized into defined increments or "stability classes". The most commonly used categories are the Pasquill stability classes A, B, C, D, E, and F. Class A

denotes the most unstable or most turbulent conditions and Class F denotes the most stable or least turbulent conditions. The frequency of stability classes during

the monitoring period is provided in Table 4.13.

Table 4:13 Stability Class

Stability Class Frequency (%)

A – Extremely Unstable 18.6

B – Unstable 16.3

C – Slightly Unstable 5.8

D – Neutral 6.5

E – Slightly Stable 12.1

F – Stable to Extremely Stable 40.7

The data indicate that during the monitoring period, the site exhibited trends of primarily stable to extremely stable conditions. Stable conditions exhibit poor

vertical mixing, and low levels of contaminant dispersion. Use of this stability data for modeling purposes will produce higher concentrations of pollutants at a

given receptor (i.e. more conservative results).

4.7.3 Mixing Height

Mixing Height (MH) is the vertical extent through which the contaminant plume can be mixed. Forecasting of mixing height is done with the aid of the vertical

temperature profile. The MH is a function of stability. In unstable air, the MH is higher and in stable air the MH is lower. With a lower MH, there is a smaller

volume of air in which the pollutant can be dispersed, resulting in higher concentrations in the ambient environment. There is a seasonal variation of MH.

During summer daylight hours, MH can be few thousand feet whereas for winter it can be a few hundred feet. It varies also in the course of a day. It is lowest at

night and increases during the day. Secondary information has been used to determine the mixing height over Gurgaon district and it varies from 50-2500 meters

(CPCB, 2002)




4.7.4 Site Specific Meteorological Data

Meteorological information is important for devising baseline ambient air quality monitoring plans and for the prediction of impacts from air quality modeling.

At project site, a meteorological station was installed. Hourly meteorological data was collected for one season. Monitoring was done as per IS: 8829: Micro-

meteorological Techniques in Air Pollution. As per the requirement of Form 1A under the Section 2 (Water Environment) & Section 5 (Air Environment), the

project site specific data was collected with respect to wind speed, direction, temperature, humidity and rainfall for one season.

Table 4.14 provides maximum, minimum and average temperature, rainfall, wind speed, relative pressure and humidity over the seasonal monitoring conducted

at the site for one month during the environmental baseline monitoring period (winter season). The meteorological data monitoring for one month of 2015 (1st

January’2015 – 31st January’2015) is enclosed as Annexure 4.1.

Table 4:14 Meteorological Monitoring Data (Winter Season – 01.01. 2015 to 31.01.2015)

Season Temperature Wind speed Rainfall Relative Pressure Humidity

Maximum 22.2ºC 22.6 kmph 0.0 mm 29.25 in Hg 99 %

Minimum 5.2 ºC 0 kmph 0.0 mm 19.14 in Hg 31 %

Average 12.77 ºC 3.83 kmph 0.0 mm 29.01 in Hg 63.76 %

4.7.4.1 Wind Rose at Site

The wind rose denotes a class of diagrams designed to display the distribution of wind direction experienced at a given location over a period of time - long for a

Climatological record of prevailing winds or short to show wind character for a particular event or purpose. Wind rose summarizes a considerable amount of

wind frequency information into a single graphic during the monitoring period at the proposed site and is shown in Figure 4.8 below:

Figure 4.7 Wind Rose at Project Site

The wind rose diagram reveals that wind was blowing predominantly towards the Northwest (NW) and West (W) direction having speed in the range of 0.5- 3.6

m s-1 during the monitoring period. The onsite average wind speed was observed as 3.83 m s-1 with frequency of calm winds 12.50 % during the monitoring

period. The wind rose diagram shows that during the monitoring period observed predominant wind direction (northwest and west) was almost concurrent with

climatologically prevailing wind direction (northwest and west).

4.7.5 Air Quality

The existing quality of the air environment serves as an index for assessing the pollution load and the assimilative capacity of any region and forms an important

tool for planning project activity in the area. The primary data for air quality was monitored as per the following period and utilized for EIA study:

(i) Baseline monitoring for ambient air quality has been carried out between 3rd

November’2014 – 10th March’2015 for three month continuously (Winter

Season, 2014-2015) as per (1) EIA guidance manual – Building, Construction and Township and Area Development Project (Source MoEF Website –

http://environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/Form-1A/HomeLinks/building-construction_may-10.pdf) and CPCB notification No. B-

29016/20/90/PCI-1. dt. 18.11.2009 on National Ambient Air Quality Standards and the same is enclosed as Annexure 4.2.

4.7.5.1 Methodology for Baseline Meteorology monitoring

The background-monitoring program was carried out as per standard methodologies and accepted protocols as detailed by the MoEF. Air quality was monitored

with 5 numbers high volume samplers, for 24 hours continuously, twice in a week for one season. Each sampler maintained a volumetric flow rate between 1.0-



1.2 m3/min. In this manner 24 hourly averaged values for all pollutants were collected at each of the locations. Analysis of pollutants was done as per standard IS

codes.

LOCATIONS OF AAQ MONITORING STATIONS

An assessment of baseline air quality was undertaken to establish the status of exposure of the receptors. This assessment was accomplished by examining

sources of air emissions within the study area and by conducting a site–specific background–sampling program.

The basic considerations for designing air quality surveillance programme within 500 m as per EIA guidance manual (Page no 14) include:

Nature of Project (Building Construction)

Meteorological Conditions

Topography

Selected Pollution Pockets in the Area and Likely impact area

Keeping the historical meteorological conditions, topography, physical features, sensitive locations and current and anticipated pollution loads, in mind and

based on the reconnaissance survey of the project area, a monitoring framework for air quality in the study area (5 km radius) has been drawn up. In this manner,

a total of 5 numbers of monitoring locations have been selected to assess the existing air quality in the area. All the monitoring locations for air, noise, water and

soil are shown in Figure 4.9. Table 4.15 gives the details of air quality monitoring locations. These locations are truly representative of the area.

Background data was collected for PM 2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx and CO as per CPCB guidelines for one season.

Table 4:15 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Monitor Description Approximate Distance to centre of site

(km)

Direction

AQ1 Project site - -

AQ2 Near Village Ullawas 0.48 km W

AQ3 Near CGHS Society Sector-58 0.33 km NE

AQ4 Near Village Behrampur 0.87 km E

AQ5 Near Village Ghata 1.95 km NNE

Figure 4.8 Air, Noise, Water and Soil Monitoring Locations

Village Behrampur

AQ4

Sector-58

AQ3

Village Ullawas

AQ2

Village Ghata

AQ5

Project Site (18.138 Acres)

AQ1

RESULTS OF AAQ MONITORING

The revised National Ambient Air Quality Standards (GSR 826(E), 16.11.2009) for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and CO are presented in Annexure 3.3.

Monitoring results (observed levels and ranges) of these parameters for winter season are presented in Table 4.16 to Table 4.20, and Figure 4.10 to Figure

4.14, where exceedances of NAAQS are highlighted. The table also defines the locations of sampling, their distance from the site and land-use categories. The

air quality monitoring results for winter season (3rd

November’2014 – 10th March’2015) are presented in Annexure 4.3.

a) Monitoring Results SO2: The monitoring results of SO2 are given in Table No. 4.16 and Figure 4.10.

Table 4:16 Monitoring Program Results SO2 (g/m3)

Station Location Name Maximum Minimum Mean NAAQS



AQ1 Project site 10.6 6.5 8.55

80

AQ2 Near Village Ullawas 11.6 6.1 8.85

AQ3 Near CGHS Society Sector-58 12.9 6.1 9.5

AQ4 Near Village Behrampur 10.4 6.3 8.35

AQ5 Near Village Ghata 11.1 7.1 9.1

Figure 4.9 Concentration of SO2 (g/m3)

The monitor was placed at all the locations for assessing the concentration of SO2, which is well within the NAAQ standard specified for SO2 with a maximum

value of only 12.9 g / m3 at Near CGHS Society Sector 58. The overall air quality of the area is good.

b) Monitoring Results NOx: The monitoring results of NOx are given in Table No. 4.17 and Figure 4.11.

Table 4:17 Monitoring Program Results – Nox (g/m3)

Station Area Maximum Minimum Mean NAAQS

AQ1 Project site 23.8 13.2 18.5

80





Figure 4.10 Concentration of NOx (g/m3)

The monitor was placed at all the locations for assessing the concentration of NOX, which is well within the NAAQ standard specified for NOX with a maximum

value of only 23.8 g / m3 at Project Site. This is also from the heavy vehicular emissions from traffic plying on the nearby road to the site. However, the overall

air quality of the area is good.

c) Monitoring Results CO: The monitoring results of CO are given in Table No. 4.18 and Figure 4.12.

Table 4:18 Monitoring Program Results – CO (g/m3)



Station Area Maximu

m

Minimu

m Mean NAAQS

AQ1 Project site 943 727 835

4000

AQ2 Near Village Ullawas 1029 706 867.5

AQ3 Near CGHS Society Sector-58 1087 742 914.5

AQ4 Near Village Behrampur 961 719 840

AQ5 Near Village Ghata 981 767 874

Figure 4.11 Concentration of CO (g/m3)

The ambient air quality monitoring results show that, the CO concentrations at all the locations ranges from 1087 to 943 µgm/m3

approximately, which reveals

that the air quality in terms of CO concentration also show good conditions of ambient air in all nearby locations.

d) Monitoring Results PM10: The monitoring results of PM10 are given in Table No. 4.19 and Figure 4.13.

Table 4:19 Monitoring Program Results – PM10 (g/m3)

Station Area Maximum Minimu

m Mean NAAQS

AQ1 Project site 99.76 75.89 87.825

100





Figure 4.12 Concentration of PM10 (g/m3)



The monitor was placed at all the locations for assessing the concentration of PM10. Monitored PM10 level is slightly high at locations near Ullawas & Near

CGHS Society Sector 58 with maximum value of 106.39 g / m3. This may be due to construction activity and continuous vehicular movement in surrounding

areas. However, this is only for short duration and will not impact on environment in long term.

e) Monitoring Results PM2.5 : The monitoring results of NOx are given in Table No. 4.20 and Figure 4.14.

Table 4:20 Monitoring Program Results -PM 2.5 (g/m3)

Station Area Maximum Minimum Mean NAAQS

AQ1 Project site 59.62 45.49 52.555

60





Figure 4.13 Concentration of PM 2.5 (g/m3)

The monitor was placed at all the locations for assessing the concentration of PM2.5. Monitored PM2.5 level is slightly high at locations near Ullawas & Near

CGHS Society Sector 58 with maximum value of 65.47 g / m3.

Interpretations

With respect to pollutants, the results of the monitoring program indicated the following:

Observed PM10 and PM2.5 level is slightly higher to the NAAQ standard at the monitored locations Near Ullawas & near CGHS Society Near Sector 58

(probably due to ongoing construction activities and continuous vehicular movement in surrounding environment).

Observed NOx, SO2 and CO levels are well within the specified standards by NAAQ, i.e. 80 g / m3 for NOx and SO2 and 4000 g / m

3 for CO .

The overall observation of the project site and its surrounding area shows that the ambient air quality of the area is fairly good except the concentration level of

PM10 and PM2.5.

4.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Unpleasant sounds are classified as noise pollution. Sound possesses three definite properties: intensity, frequency and duration. Intensity is the loudness of a sound,

or the pressure it exerts through the ear. It is measured in decibels (dB). In assessing noise, an empirical measure called "dB (A)" indicates damage to hearing. The

higher the dB (A) value, the greater is the risk of damage to hearing. Loud noise may adversely affect people in many ways. For example noise may interface with

sleep, speech, communication and can cause annoyance and other physiological problems. Occupational noise exposure, is also the most common cause of Noise-

Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL), threatens the hearing of individuals exposed to noise pollution for longer periods of time, at a less intense level. For example,

repeated exposure to noise pollution at a construction site can cause NIHL to construction workers, an effect that cannot be reversed.

During the construction of the site, the following source of noise pollution is anticipated:

Construction equipment.



During the operational phase of the site, the following sources of noise pollution are anticipated:

Diesel generator operation.

Increase in transport noise from the adjacent surrounding roads of the site and from within the site.

Table 4.21 provides primary sources and effects of Noise Pollution at site during the construction and operation phases.

Table 4:21 Primary Effects of Noise Pollution from Construction & Operation Activities of the Site

Pollutant Source Primary Effects

Noise Construction activities

Transport

Human activities

Annoyance

Interference with communication

NIHL

Interference with sleep

Aural pain, nausea & reduced muscular control

Performance effects

Effects on social behavior

Source: http://www.epa.nsw.gov.au/soe/97/ch1/15_3.htm

4.8.1 Noise Quality

Unwanted noise and unpleasant sounds are generally classified as noise pollution. Normally a person begins to identify sounds when a level of 10 to 15 dB is

reached. The other end of the scale is known as the threshold of pain (140 dB), or the point at which the average person experiences pain. Noise is generally

measured in frequency-weighted scales and noise quality measurements are generally represent in the ‘A’ level and reported as dB (A).

Methodology of Background Noise Quality Monitoring

A site–specific background noise quality monitoring program was conducted for the existing project site.

The basic considerations for designing noise quality surveillance programme include:

Vehicle Movement Within the Impact Zone

Activities in surrounding villages / settlements/nearby areas

Ecologically Sensitive Locations

Based on the above mentioned criteria, noise monitoring was conducted at 5 locations within the impact zone. Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were

automatically recorded to give the noise level for every hour, continuously for 24 hours in a day. Accordingly one full day (i.e. 24 hourly values) of data was

collected at each of the locations.

The standards of equivalent noise levels viz. Leq-day and Leq-night have been prescribed by the CPCB as given in Table 4.22.

Table 4:22 Ambient Noise Standards as per CPCB

Area Code Category of Area/ Zone

Limits in dB(A) Leq*

Day Time Night Time

(A) Industrial area 75 70

(B) Commercial area 65 55

(C) Residential area 55 45

(D) Silence Zone 50 40

1. Day time shall mean from 6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m.

2. Night-time shall mean from 10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m.

3. Silence zone is defined as an area comprising not less than 100 m around hospitals, educational institutions and courts. The silence zones are zones, which

are declared as such by the competent authority.

Noise levels were calculated using the following equation:

Where Li = levels observed at n equally spaced times during interval T.

Sources of Noise Emissions Surrounding the Site

The major source of noise in the site surrounding area is the vehicular movement along the 60m wide road and construction activities in the vicinity of the site.

The impacts from these sources are expected to be captured in the levels of noise measured in the site-specific background noise monitoring study.

n

i

L

Teq

i

nL1

10, 10/1log10

http://www.epa.nsw.gov.au/soe/97/ch1/15_3.htm



Baseline Background Noise Quality Monitoring in the Study Area

Results of baseline background noise quality monitoring for winter season are presented in Table 4.23 and the locations of monitoring stations are already

shown in Figure 4.9. The results of noise monitoring carried out during winter season of 2014-2015 (3rd

November’2014 to 10th March’ 2015) are presented in

Annexure 4.4.

Interpretation of Background Noise Quality Monitoring Results

The ambient noise quality results indicate that day time as well as night time noise levels are well within the prescribed limits.

Table 4:23 Baseline Background Noise Quality Monitoring Results

Location

Code Location Name

Distance from Site

Boundary/ Direction

(Km)

Day Time Night Time

Land-use

Category Leq

(dB (A)

Limit (dB

(A)

Leq

(dB (A) Limit (dB (A)

NQ1 Project site - 54.8 55 44.4 45

Rural +

Residential

NQ2 Near Village Ullawas 0.48 km 52.1 55 38.1 45

NQ2 Near CGHS Society Sector-58 0.33 km 48.7 55 39.9 45

NQ4 Near Village Behrampur 0.87 km 52.7 55 38.2 45

NQ5 Near Village Ghata 1.95 km 49.8 55 37.4 45

4.9 TRAFFIC

The site is well connected with Existing Golf course extension road (Southern peripheral Road). Apart from this, the 60 m wide HUDA sector road has been

developed recently which also increase the connectivity of the proposed development.

The traffic volume count was conducted at two junctions (i) Golf Course Extension Road (SPR) and (ii) Sector Road adjacent to project site (60m wide road) to

analyze the traffic flow for weekdays and weekends. Figure 4.15 shows the traffic volume count locations and Table 4.24 shows the volume count at the

junction as mentioned above. The traffic volume count conducted during the winter season of 2014-2015 (03.11.2014 & 10.03.2015) are presented in Annexure

4.5.

Figure 4.14 Location of Traffic Volume Count

TM1

Table 4:24 Traffic Volume Count

S. No Vehicle Type Traffic Volume Count

Golf Course Extension Road (SPR) (TM1)

Traffic Volume Count

HUDA Sector Road (60m) adjacent to Project Site (TM2)

Weekday Weekend Weekday Weekend

1 Truck 1622 1837 622 737

2 Bus 241 159 54 44

3 Trailers 86 85 71 58

4 Tractor 66 64 40 47

5 Cars 1671 1102 733 598

6 Jeep/Auto 1168 915 138 115

7 T. Wheel 1994 1093 619 506



8 Cycles 285 164 205 167

Total Vehicular Count 7133 5419 2482 2272

4.10 TRAFFIC PROJECTION

4.10.1 Population and Trips Generation for Horizon Year 2021

As a part of the initiative of developing efficient transport connectivity (traffic arising due to development of commercial complex and in the vicinity), a study

has been carried out for Traffic Forecast and Transport Planning based on the population projections as per GMUC 2025. Traffic forecasting has been done to

assess the horizon year (2021) traffic intensity on the project influence area (PIA) network /intersections and determining capacity requirements for transport

infrastructure. The road network in the vicinity of project site is as shown in Figure 4.16.

Figure 4.15 road network in the vicinity of project site

To Dwarka

From Pataudi

MULTI UTILITY CORRIDOR

LEGEND

UNDER CONSTRUCTION

COMPLETED

FUTURE EXPANSION

Project Site

The estimated daily population and trips for horizon year 2021 is summarized in Table 4.26

Table 4.25 Population and Trip generation in horizon year 2021

Sectoral Residing Population Floating Population Total Person Trips Peak Hour Vehicular Trips (PCU)

Development

Sector-58 35,929 20,023 73,629 3,829

Sector-59 20,490 2,433 29,899 1,456

SEZ 14,378 97,516 1,89,736 11,741

Sector-60 8,100 4,854 14,124 804

Sector-61 20,567 12,784 39,432 1,830

Total Sectoral Development 99,464 1,37,610 3,46,820 19,660

Total Population & Trips 2,37,074

4.10.2 Assumptions for Trip Generation

The following assumptions have been adopted to estimate the approximate number of trip generation:

Per Capita Trip Rate (PCTR) – PCTR as 0.7 for residing population and 1.75 for floating population

Modal Split – Model split as 16% private car, 25% two wheeler, 19% taxi/cab, 20% bus and 20% metro

Average Occupancy – Average occupancy as 2.5 for private car, 1.25 for two wheeler, 5 for taxi/cab and 35 for bus

Peak Hour factor – Peak hour factor is considered as 10% of total daily traffic

The estimation of peak hour vehicular traffic (PCU) has been carried out on study area road network based on generalized cost function using Cube Voyager

Software. The software determines the – (i) traffic intensity on surrounding area road network (ii) turning movements on surrounding intersections (iii) level

of service and capacity requirements for surrounding roads and intersections

The project site road area network for which the above forecasting has been carried out is as shown in Figure 4.17



Figure 4.16 Road network considered for traffic forecasting

4.10.3 Results of Traffic Analysis Study

The results obtained from the technical analysis is as shown in Table 4.27

Table 4.26 Traffic projection and road capacity requirement

Road

Section

SPR (155-

158)

SPR (150-

155)

SPR (146-

150)

SPR (143-

146)

SPR (137-

143)

SPR (134-

137)

Sec58-

Ghatta

(152-155)

Sec58-

Ghatta

(149-152)

Sec59-

SEZ

(177-176)

Sec59-

SEZ

(178-177)

Sec58-

Sec59

(145-136)

Sec58-

Sec59

(142-143)

Sec 59-

Sec 61

(135-133)

Sec59-

Sec61

(135-136)

Other Local

Roads

Peak Hr

Forecast in

PCU (2025)

15600 15100 15200 18500 16300 16600 8800 8700 8900 4600 2400 3900 3600 3600 Below

2000

Lane

Required 6 x 6 6 x 6 6 x 6 6x 6 6 x 6 6 x 6 4 x 4 4 x 4 4 x 4 2 x 2 2 x 2 2 x 2 2 x 2 2 x 2

2 x 2

Undivided

HUDA

Cross Section

6 x 6 Lane

(Variable ROW from 132 m to 162 m)

4 x 4 Lane

(60 m ROW)

2 x 2

Undivided (24 m ROW)

Remark* Sufficient Sufficient Sufficient

Note: * Compare with the capacity standards given in IRC: 106 (refer Table 4.28)

Table 4.27 Capacity standards (IRC 106)

Type of Carriageway Total Capacity (PUC/Hour) Capacity per lane (PCU/Hour)

8 Lane Divided 10290 1300




4.10.4 Conclusion:

The above study has been carried out for Horizon Year 2021 considering road linkages of sector 58, sector 59, sector 60, sector 61, and proposed group housing.

It is concluded that

1) The total residing population and floating population in the above sectoral development is 99,464 and 1,37,610 respectively.

2) The total person trips generated in total sectoral development is estimated to be 3,46,820, that in turn will generate peak hour vehicular trips of 19,660

PCU.

3) The cube voyager software runs for estimation of level of service and capacity requirements for surrounding roads and intersections depicts that the

cross sections of HUDA sector roads in the vicinity of the project have sufficient capacity when compared to Capacity Standards given in IRC 106

(Refer table 4.27).

4.10.5 Hierarchy of Road within Proposed Project Site as per IRC: 86-1983

Table 4.29 gives the recommended land width for roads in urban areas as per the IRC:86-1983 (Geometric Design Standards for Urban Roads in Plains) and the

hierarchy of roads proposed within project. The Figure 4.18 shows the hierarchy of roads matching with the hierarchy as per IRC.

Project Site




Table 4.28 Categorization of Road based on UDFI Norms and as Proposed in the Project Site

S.No Category Road Width as per

IRC:86-1983 (m)

Proposed Width of the Road within the

Project Site

1 Arterial 50-60 60 m (HUDA sector road)

2 Sub - Arterial 30-40 -

3 Collector Street 20-30 24 m wide Road

4 Local 10-20 10 m (Internal Circulation Road in

proposed project)

4.11 WATER ENVIRONMENT

The assess the impacts on surface and groundwater due to the proposed activity, it is essential to study

existing water resources in project area available with respect to their existing quality as well as their

supportive capacity to represent the baseline status of water environment.

The existing water resources, both surface and groundwater are identified with their respective significance

within the study area around project site. The representative sampling locations for surface water and

ground water are selected to assess the existing (pre-project) status of water quality in the impact zone. The

standard methods prescribed sampling as well as the analytical procedures for individual parameters are

followed in this study.

This section documents the baseline scenario of the water environment in the study area and discusses both

water resources and quality. The data has been collected from various secondary sources and primary

survey carried out in the impact zone.

4.11.1 Ground Water Resources & Availability

Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA) has identified Gurgaon and adjoining industries as “Notified

Area”. Gurgaon block is over exploited from hydro geological point of view. The depth of water table in

the district varies from 1 m to 30 m.

Both alluvium and Quartzite from the acquifer in the district whereas the yield of wells and tube wells

located in the alluvial acquifer ranges from 5.0 - 45.0 m3/hr. The yield of wells in the quartzite rock

formation can produce a yield of 10 – 15 m3/hr.

The net annual groundwater availability in the district is 718 MCM/year. The gross annual draft is 421

MCM/year and the stage of groundwater development in the district is 64 %. Blocks showing over

exploitation of ground water are Gurgaon, Farukhnagar and Pataudi Taoru.

Name of State Haryana

Name of District Gurgaon




Geographical Area (sq.km.) 2,766

Major Geological formation Alluvium/Hard rock

Major drainage system Yamuna

Population ( As on 2001 ) 16,57,669

No of Blocks 9

Existing Major / Medium irrigation projects Gurgaon Canal

Utilizable ground water resources (MCM) 718

Net ground water draft (MCM) 421

Stage of ground water development (%) 64

Average annual Rainfall (mm) 626

Range of Temperature (oC) 5.1 – 40.0

Block showing over exploitation of ground water Gurgaon, Farukhnagar, Pataudi Taoru

The groundwater user map of Gurgaon district is as shown in Figure 4.19.




Figure 4.17 Groundwater User Map of Gurgaon District

Source Central Groundwater Board (2003)

The study of water resources is important from the point of view to assess the sufficiency of water

resources for the needs of the project in its various stages and the impact of the project on water

environment. In the proposed project, to assess the groundwater potential, hydro-geological study has been

carried out.

4.11.2 Hydro-geological

The area is mainly underlain by alluvium of quaternary age which forms the principal ground water

reservoir. At deeper levels, ground water also occurs in fractures, joints of hard rock formations. The

alluvium comprises of unconsolidated sediments, which are heterogeneous in composition. These are

constituted by beds of sands and clays with calcareous concretions (Kankar). The overall thickness of

alluvial sediments occurs down to about 85m.

The subsurface geological formations can be devided onto older alluvium and newer alluvium. The

newer alluvium sediments are deposited at shallow depths, whereas older alluvium is the result of past




cycles of sedimentation and occurs at deeper depth. The area under the project is covered by newer and

older alluvium, which is characterized by presence of fine grained formations. These deposits consist of

inetrbedded, lenticular, interfringing sediments of sand various grades, silty clay intermixed with kankar

in various proportions. The ground water occupies the interstices of the unasserted alluvial sediments

comprising fine to medium grained sands, kankar, gravel and clays. The granular zones generally form

good repository of ground water. The potential aquifer zones in the area lies under unconfined to semi-

confined conditions. Rainfall is chief source of ground water recharge.

The Hydrogeological setting of the site is relatively favourable. The depth of water levels in the area is

reported between 20 to 25m below ground level.

There is no major drainage feature in the site area.

4.11.3 Vertical Electric Soundings (VES)

The geophysical investigation by way of vertical electrical sounding (VES) was conducted at one point

to determine the probable underground strata and potential ground water bearing zones. Schlumberger

configuration of potential and current electrodes was deployed for obtaining true resistivity values of the

sub surface geological starata so as to study the availability of water bearing zones occurring in horizons

at various depth ranges. The apparent resistivity values at different current and potential electrode

separation were recorded in the field. For obtaining sub surface lithological information, the maximum

current electrode separation in the range of 300 to 700 m was carried. Deep penetration, micro processor

based, signal stacking, A.C. resistivity meter was used for taking vertical electrical sounding at the point.

The apparent restivity values recorded in the field were plotted and interpreted with the help of

softwares.

The computerized resistivity curve obtained for the surveyed point is given in Fig-4.21 and point of

geophysically investigated is marked in fig.-4.20(site plan)




Figure 4.18 Site Plan showing location of surveyed points

Results of VES

Curve Matching Method

The interpreted result shows existence of three geo-electric layers representing different hydrogeological

set up and these are tabulated below:

Table 4:29 True Resistivity in ohm meters for Surveyed point VES-1

Layer Depth Range (m) BGL Ture Resistivity

(Ohm-m)

Inferred Strata

1st 0.00 – 2.20 142 Dry surface soil with sandy silt

2nd

2.20 – 20.90 57 Partially saturated coarse grained sand

3rd

20.90 – 95.40 19 Saturated fine grained silty sand

4th 95.40 – 153.4 10 Saturated fine grained sandy silt

The interpreted results of resistivity survey indicates that the water level at the site occur at about 37m

below ground level as at this depth there is drop in true resistivity value from 68 ohm-m to 15.99 ohm-m.




Below water level, the true resistivity value is of the order of 19 ohm-m indicating presence of Saturated

fine grained sandy silt..

Figure 4.19 Resistivity Curve for surveyed point VES-1 Obtanied for Proposed Project Site

4.11.4 Surface Water Availability during Construction Phase

During the construction phase, treated raw water to be collected and transported from STP of HUDA and

then further treatment will be given as per the desired construction water quality at project site.

4.11.5 Surface Water Availability during Operation Phase

Sourcing water from HUDA water supply for the licences covered under Gurgaon Manesar Urban

Complex Plan.

Presently Gurgaon city gets water through 70 km long Gurgaon Water Supply Channel, which

originates from village Kakroi, in district Sonepat and culminates at village Basai in Gurgaon where




water is filtered and treated in two water treatment plants of 20 MGD each. The construction work on the

third water treatment plant of 20 MGD at Basai is under progress. This treated water is regulated to

various areas (upto sectors 57).

To meet the increasing potable water demand in Gurgaon, Government of Haryana (GoH) has

formulated an additional plan to construct a 65.6 km long National Capital Region (NCR) Water

Channel which would off take from Delhi Branch and pass through the districts of Sonipat, Rohtak and

Jhajjar by gravity flow and have eight head regulators. This NCR channel would have a total capacity of

800 cusecs. Initially this would supply 500 cusecs and gradually as the population increases will add 300

cusecs more. This NCR Channel, on which the work has already started, is expected to be ready by the

time the proposed group housing project comes up. This Project falls within the Gwal Pahari Master Plan

area. To cater to the planned areas under Gwal Pahari Master Plan, the GoH has decided to set up a new

Water Treatment Plant (WTP) to be constructed by the Haryana Urban Development Authority

(HUDA). The plant will have a storage capacity of 66 MGD and it will be constructed at Chandu-

Budhera, in two phases. In the first phase, 22 MGD treatment plant will be built and the remaining

capacity will be completed in the second phase.This Project falls within Sector 61 of Sohna under

Gurgaon Manesar Urban Complex Plan– 2031 AD. As per the requirement we have already applied to

HUDA for asurance of water. The receipt of the same has been attached as Annexure 2.4.

4.11.6 Alternate Sustainable Water Management Strategies during Operational Phase

The Project Proponent is committed to carry out extensive water management practices (recycle and reuse)

as a part of its environmental sustainability strategy. Our master plan is proposed to be based upon “water

balance” or the balance between the volume of water removed from our groundwater supplies and volume

water returned to our groundwater supplies from rainfall, ponds, and innovative stormwater management

techniques.

The Proposed Water Conservation and Development Measures include: i) Development of water sources

like rainwater harvesting systems and collection of Run-off, ii) Minimizing water consumption by a

combination of water saving devices and other domestic and commercial water conservation measures, and

iii) Treated waste water use. The details are given in Section 6.7.2

4.11.7 Water Quality

Methodology of Baseline Water Quality Monitoring

The basic considerations for designing water quality surveillance programme include:

Topography

Surface run off

Natural and manmade drainage/irrigation canal systems




As per the requirement of Form 1A under the Section 2 (Water Environment), Water sampling and

analysis has been conducted to establish baseline water quality in the area. Sampling has been done

following the standard guidelines for physical, chemical and bacteriological parameters. Analysis has

been carried out by following the methods prescribed in “Standard methods for the examination of water

and wastewater (American Public Health Association)”.

Results of Baseline Water Quality Monitoring

GROUNDWATER QUALITY

Ground water was collected from one location during winter season of 2014-2015 (3rd

November’2014 –

10th March’2015) in the study area of Village Ullawas for analysis. Table 4.30 gives the location details.

Table 4:30 Baseline Water Quality Monitoring Location

SN Station Code Station Name Distance from Site

Boundary (Km) Category

1 GW1* Ullawas Village 0.48 W Rural + Residential

*GW – Ground Water Monitoring Locations

Table 4.31 depicts the physico-chemical characteristics of the ground water samples, as compared with

the standard (IS 10500: Indian Standards/Specifications for Drinking Water) reference values. The

results of ground water quality monitoring carried out during the winter season of 2014-2015 (3rd


Table 4:31 Ground Water Quality near the Project Site

S.No Parameters Results

Complete test as per IS:10500·

2012

Desirable Limit Permissible

Limit

i Colour (Hazen Unit) 1 5 Max 25 Max

ii Odour Unobjectionable Unobjectionable Unobjectionable

iii Taste Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

iv Turbidity, NTU 1 5 Max 10 Max

v pH Value 7.31 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation

vi Total Hardness (as

CaC03), mg/l 141 300 Max 600 Max

vii Iron (as Fe), mg/l 0.119 0.3 Max 1 Max






2012


Limit

viii Chloride (as Cl), mg/l 67 250 Max 1000 Max

ix Fluoride (as F), mg/l 0.28 1 Max 1.5 Max

x Dissolved solids,

mg/l 434 500 Max 2000 Max

xi Calcium (as Ca),

mg/l 44 75 Max 200 Max

xii Magnesium (as Mg),

mg/l 19 30 Max 100 Max

xiii Copper (as Cu), mg/l BDL 0.05 Max 1.5 Max

xiv Manganese (as Mn),

mg/l BDL 0.1 Max 0.3 Max

xv Sulphate (as S04),

mg/l 30.8 200 Max 400 Max

xvi Nitrate (as N03),

mg/l 0.65 45 Max No relaxation

xvii Phenolic compounds

(as C6H5OH), mg/l BDL 0.001 Max 0.002 Max

xviii Mercury (as Hg),

mg/l BDL 0.001 Max Not relaxation

xix Cadmium (as Cd),


xx Selenium (as Se),


xxi Arsenic (as As}"


xxii Cyanide (as CN),


xxiii Lead (as Pb), mg/l BDL 0.05 Max Not relaxation

xxiv Zinc (as Zn), mg/l BDL 5 Max 15 Max

xxv Anionic detergents

(as MBAS), mg/l BDL 0.2 Max 1.0 Max






2012


Limit

xxvi Chromium (as Cr

6+ ),

mg/l BDL 0.5 Max No relaxation

xxvii

Polynuclear aromatic

hydrocarbons' (as

PHA),g/l

BDL - -

xxviii Mineral oil, mg/l BDL 0.01 Max 0.03 Max

xxix Pesticides, mg/l BDL Absent 0.00.1

xxx Alkalinity. mg/l 159 200 Max 600 Max

xxxi Aluminium (as Al).

mg/l BDL 0.03 Max 0.2 Max

xxxii Boron,mg/l BDL 1 Max 5 Max

xxxiii Sodium as Na 18.2 150 No relaxation

xxxiv coliform/100ml,

MPN Absent Absent

xxxv Escherichia

coli/100ml Absent Absent

BDL- Below Detectable Limit

INTERPRETATION OF BASELINE GROUND WATER QUALITY MONITORING

The physico chemical analysis of water suggests that water quality is within the desirable as well as the

permissible limits of drinking water standards IS: 10500-202.

4.11.8 Construction Water Quality

The raw water collected from STP of HUDA and further treated for construction purposes shall be

analyzed before use for construction and compared with water quality standards prescribed for

construction purpose as per IS 456:2000

4.12 LAND ENVIRONMENT

4.12.1 Soil

Impacts on land environment from construction activities can be mainly attributed to disposal of

solid/hazardous waste and discharge of wastewater either onto land (direct impacts) or into water bodies,

which are also used as irrigation water resources (indirect impacts). Moreover impacts on




land/vegetation are also expected due to fallout of air pollutants. Accordingly for environmental impact

assessment it is pertinent to study the characteristics of soil, the resulting changes in soil due to disposal

of harmful substances on land and the resultant behavior of the surrounding soil environment.

4.12.2 Soil Quality

The soil of the region is older alluvium and was deposited in the earlier times with no recurring deposits

in present time.

The pre project status with respect to soil characteristics (physical, chemical and bacteriological), land

use pattern in the impact zone around the project site forms the baseline status of the land environment.

The basic consideration for designing soil quality surveillance program include

Physical and chemical properties of the area;

Erosion potential;

Storm water run-off quality;

Agricultural productivity of land;

Soil quality analysis has been done in one location at project site.

4.12.2.1 Particle Size Distribution

A quantitative assessment of the type and characteristics based on particle size distribution in the soil

was made by wet sieve analysis and sedimentation analysis using hydrometer, as per procedures laid

down in IS: 2720 Part IV. The type of soil based on particle sizes is given in Table 4. 32.

Table 4:32 Soil Type based on Particle Size

S. No Type of Soil Units Range

1 Gravel % 2.9 - 3.9

2 Sand % 39.6 – 41.3

3 Silt % 49.2 – 50.3

4 Clay % 5.6 – 7.2

The above table indicates that the majority of the soil is of silt type (50.3%) followed by Sand (41.3 %).

4.12.2.2 Soil Characteristics

Table 4.33 presents the physical and chemical characteristics results of soil sample collected during

winter season of 2014-2015 at project site. The results of soil quality monitoring carried out during the

winter season of 2014-2015 i.e. (3rd


Table 4:33 Soil Characteristics at Different Depths




Sr.

No.

Parameter Units Results

Soil Sample 1

(0-15 cm)

Soil Sample 2

(15-30 cm)

Soil Sample 3

(30-60 cm)

Soil Sample

4

(60-100 cm)

1 Texture - Siltloam Siltloam Siltloam Siltloam

Gravel % 3.9 3.6 3.1 2.9

Sand % 41.3 41.1 40.8 39.6

Silt % 49.2 49.5 50.1 50.3

Clay % 5.6 5.8 6.0 7.2

2 pH - 8.11 7.98 8.0 7.92

3 Nitrogen Mg/100gm 1.46 1.15 1.14 1.12

4 Phosphorus Mg/100gm 9.5 8.2 7.5 7.6

5 Potassium Mg/kg 0.61 0.48 0.39 0.35

6 Moisture % 9.2 10.2 10.5 10.2

7 Bulk Density gm/cm3 1.41 1.45 1.47 1.48

8 Sulphates Mg/100gm 44.8 32.6 30.5 29.6

9 Organic

Matter

% 0.69 0.41 0.41 0.38

10 Chlorides Mg/100gm 154 142 129 121

11 Water

Holding

Capacity

% w/w 22.2 20.9 20.5 20.1

12 Conductivity

(20% slurry)

µ

mhos/Cm

1368 1295 1315 1341

13 Porosity % v/v 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.6

14 Iron as Fe Mg/kg 100.5 79.3 58.2 53.6

15 Zinc as Zn Mg/kg 1.85 1.68 1.43 1.45

16 Copper as Cu Mg/kg 0.52 0.21 0.45 0.28

17 Lead as Pb Mg/kg BDL (0.02) BDL (0.02) BDL (0.02) BDL (0.02)

18 Sodium as Na Mg/kg 105 99.3 98.8 91.5




19 Boron as B Mg/kg BDL (0.02) BDL (0.02) BDL (0.02) BDL (0.02)

20 Sodium

absorption

Ratio (SAR)

% 8.0 7.9 7.8 7.6

21 Permeability

Rate

cm/hr 19.8 20.2 20.7 21.0

Interpretation of Soil Characteristics of the Project Site

The soil is siltloam at all the four depths i.e. 0-15cm, 15-30cm, 30-60cm, 60-100cm.

The organic content is also low at all the four depths.

The soil is fit for construction work.

4.12.3 Soil Fertility

The soil fertility was analyzed as per the criteria adopted by Department of Farmer Welfare &

Agriculture Development, Govt. of Madhya Pradesh for soil fertility. (Source:

http://www.mpkrishi.org/EngDocs/AgriLeft/Soilt/soiltHome.aspx).

The results given in Table 4.32, shows that the soil is not very fertile, due to the low percentage of

Organic contents (0.38 – 0.69 %) and major nutrients such Nitrogen (N) - (1.12- 1.46 mg/100gm),

Phosphorous (P) – (7.5 - 9.5 mg/100gm) and Potassium (K) – (0.35 - 0.61 mg/kg).

4.12.4 Soil Permeability

In order to determine the intake capacity of recharge wells to be constructed in the area, the permeability

(infiltration) test has been carried out in the adjoining area by MoEF/ NABL accredited laboratory.

In the test borewell down to the depth of 100m was carried out. The results show that the permeability

rate varies in the range of 19.8 to 21.1 cm/hr.

4.12.5 Soil Porosity

Soil porosity refers to that part of a soil volume that is not occupied by soil particles or organic matter.

Pore spaces are filled with air, other gases, or water. Large pores (macropores) allow the ready

movement of air and the drainage of water. They are also large enough to accommodate plant roots and

the wide range of tiny animals that inhabit the soil. Large pore spaces permit fast infiltration and

percolation of water through a soil or soil horizon. Small pores (micropores) exhibit attractive forces

strong enough to hold water in the pore. They are the water retention system of the soil which provides

water storage for plant roots. During precipitation, macropores conduct water into the soil where it fills

the micropores. At field capacity all pores small enough to retain water against the pull of gravity are

filled. Clay soils have numerous micropores and hold large quantities of water, but since they have few

macropores they produce very slow infiltration rates. The pores in the clays may be so small and hold

http://www.mpkrishi.org/EngDocs/AgriLeft/Soilt/soiltHome.aspx




water so tenaciously that the water is not available to plants. Sandy soils with numerous macropores but

few micropores have higher infiltration and percolation rates but a lower water-holding capacity than

other soil textures. A lower water-holding capacity can mean less available water for plant roots. For

revegetation purposes, plants perform best in intermediate soil textures (loams) where soils contain

mixtures of micro- and macropores.

The soil porosity at site varies from 24.1%- 24.6% by v/v which indicating it to be less porous as per

protocol FAO / IS : 2720.

4.13 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

The data on biological environment has been collected from the literature/secondary survey and visual

inspection of the project site to i) establish the baseline ecological conditions of the general study area

(area within 10 Km radius of the project site), ii) to have a preliminary assessment at the project site iii)

to assess the potential ecological impacts of the proposed project upon ecology, iv) to develop adequate

and feasible mitigation measures (via inputs to project design and layout, working practices, or

compensate where appropriate) and v) to keep residual ecological impacts with acceptable limits, This

section of report presents the ecological baseline of the area.

4.13.1 Habitat Assessment

The site area is almost a barren land with sparse vegetation. No protected areas (including either reserve

or protected forests) are located within the study area. Besides, the proposed project area is neither

located within an existing or any proposed ecological sensitive zone known for providing habitat and

movement corridor for any kind of animals or under PLPA, 1900 or under any other applicable forest

laws on land. The project proponent has obtained NOC from the forest department regarding the

regarding applicability of forest of forest laws on land. The copy of NOC obtained is enclosed as

Annexure 4.8. The Depty Commissioner (DC) has also given the NOC under Aravali notification

stating that none of the khasra nos. falls under the Aravali. The copy of NOC obtained from DC is


Hence, the impact on the wildlife values due to development of project is not expected.

4.13.2 Terrestrial Ecology

4.13.2.1 Floral Profile

This part of Haryana falls under Semi-Arid Punjab plains in terms of Bio-geographic provinces. The

land use pattern of the area is unproductive. There is no ecological sensitive zone.

An ecological study of the ecosystem is essential to understand the impact due to project development

activities on the existing flora and fauna of the area. The objective is to study and understand the present

status of the ecosystem in the study area. The present study was undertaken to predict changes as a result




of project activities and to suggest feasible measures for maintaining/enhancing the conditions. This

section describes the ecology of the area based on information compiled from secondary data available

for the area and visual inspection and tree survey of the project site.

FLORA WITHIN 10 KM RADIUS

The proposed site in Haryana falls under Semi-Arid Punjab plains in terms of Bio-geographic provinces.

The land use pattern of the proposed site and the surrounding areas is non-productive and semi urban.

There is no ecological sensitive zone providing habitat and movement for any kind of animals in the

immediate vicinity of the proposed site. No permanent aquatic ecosystem with significant ecological

resources is also found within the study area. Based on the information compiled from secondary sources

and visual inspection, the list of common trees and shrubs observed within 10 km radius of the project

site is presented in Table 4.34.

Table 4:34 List of Floral Species found within 10 km radius

Tree Shrubs Herbs

Acacia nilotica (Babul) Adhatoda vascica Acalypha indica

Acacia tortilis (israeli kikar) Ageratum conyzoides Achyranthes aspera

Albizzia procera (Siris) Calotropis procera (Ak) Aerva lanata

Azadirachta indica (Neem) Cassia occidentalis Amaranthus caudatus

Bauhinia variegata (kachnar) Datura metel (krishna datura) Amaranthus spinosus

Butea monopserma (Palash) Thevetia nerifolia Ambrosia artimisfolia

Cassia siamea (Kassod) Langerostomia speciosa

(Queen’s Flower)

Argemon exicana

Dalbergia sissoo (Shisham) Climber Argemone glauca

Eucalyptus spp. (Safeda) Cuscuta reflexa (Akash Bel) Bidens pilosa

Ficus religiosa (Pipal) Tribulus terrestris

(Gokhru)

Cannabis sativa

Leucaena leucocephala (So-Babul) Vallaris heyni(Dudhi) Chenopodium alba




Tree Shrubs Herbs

Melia azadirachta (Bakain) Chenopodium murale

Prosopis juliflora (Vilayati kikar) Cleome gynandra

Terminalia arjuna (Arjun) Croton achnocarpus

Grasses

Ristida purpurea

Cynodon dactylon

Cyperus bulbosus

FLORA WITHIN PROJECT SITE

The project site is an undulating barren land and supports only few shrubby grasses and seasonal herbs.

4.13.2.2 Faunal Profile

FAUNAL PROFILE WITHIN 10 KM RADIUS

The absence of a good forest cover and litter formation has lead to lack of ideal habitats for fauna. In

most parts of the general study area, which has the characteristics of an urban ecosystem, wild fauna is

obviously very impoverished. There are, however, species associated with human habitats. Main wild

life mammals within various part of the study area are Jackal, Fox, Hyaena, etc., and reptiles & snakes.

The domestic animals consist of cows, buffaloes, camel, goats and dogs. Apart from common birds like

fowl, peacock, house sparrow, house crow, pigeons, parrots, dove, cuckoo, vulture, kite etc., other birds

like bulbul, patridge, sand-grouse, baya, tailor bird, kingsfisher etc. are also met within various parts of

the study area. List of the avifauna found in the general study area is given in Table 4.35

Table 4:35 List of Avifauna within 10 Km Radius

S.No. Zoological Name Common Name

01. Pycnonotus cafer Red vented bulbul

02. Columbus livibus Rock Pigeon

03. Acridotheres tristicus Common myna




S.No. Zoological Name Common Name

04. Ploceus Philippines Weaver bird

05. Passer domisticus House Sparrow

06. Megalaima merulinus Indian cuckoo

07. Alcedo atthis Common Kingfisher

08. Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret

09. Corvus splendens House crow

10. Pycnonotus cafer Red vented bulbul

No wildlife sanctuary / park is located within 10km radius of the project area. No rare or endangered

species have been recorded in the project area.

FAUNA WITHIN THE PROJECT SITE

During the physical survey, no mammalian species were observed in the proposed site. This is due to the

existing land use pattern.

4.14 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

The baseline situation is based on demographic structure, economic activity, education, literacy profile

and infrastructural scenario of the study area. On the basis of the data compiled in this section, the EIA

study attempts to predict and evaluate future impacts of the project on the people of the affected village,

their social, economic, physical and psychological health and well-being, economic facilities, heritage

culture, lifestyle and other value systems.

The information provided in the following sections has been primarily derived from two sources, viz. the

primary source (Census of India, extensive surveys conducted in the villages covering various socio-

economic attributes) and secondary sources (published and unpublished data, newspapers etc).

The primary survey was conducted in a few surrounding villages in order to assess the prevailing social

and economic conditions and in identifying the various problems and major issues in the concerned

villages due to the proposed development. Discussions and consultations were carried out in the villages,

regarding some basic information related to amenities, caste structure, livelihood, transportation etc. The

understanding of the locals about the project, its negative and positive benefits were also elicited.




4.14.1 General Socio-Economic Profile

The study area covers the following villages– Ullawas Village, Behrampur Village, Kadarpur Village

and Ghata of district Gurgaon in the state of Haryana. The total population of the villages is 8717 people,

with 1206 households in total.

The project is not likely to have significant demographic changes on the villages located.

4.14.2 Demographic Profile

The baseline data for the population of the surrounding area is significant to the study as it enables to

predict the population that may be impacted by the proposed project. It also enables in determining the

situation due to an increase in population during the tenure of the project, until its completion, and, the

various impacts arising as a result of the different project activities. Table 4.36 provides the break-up of

population, household size and sex ratio of the identified villages.

Table 4:36 Demographic Details

Village Total Population Total Households Total Male Total Female

Ullawas 1,506 213 815 691

Behrampur 1,472 208 785 687

Kadarpur 4,235 597 2,224 2,011

Ghata 1,504 188 810 738

Total 8,717 1206 4,634 4,127

Source: Census of India, 2001

As seen in Table 4.36, Kadarpur village has the highest population (4,235) followed by Ullawas (1,506)

and Ghata (1,504).

4.14.3 Education & Literacy

Primary and intermediate level school facilities are available within 5 km radius. Private technical

education institutes are present in the vicinity of the site.

4.14.4 Economic Activity and Livelihood Pattern

An understanding of the economic activities and livelihood pattern is important to predict the impact of

the project activities on the economy of the region. Livelihood pattern coupled with educational profile

would assist in identifying areas where the local workforce can be integrated into the project activities.

4.14.5 Existing Physical & Social Infrastructure Facilities in the Region

Schools:




The city is home to a number of world class educational Institutes; there are several primary

and secondary schools located in the area. The educational facilities are provided in stages i.e.

junior basic school, senior basic school, higher secondary school, degree colleges, Pre-

primary and primary educations are mainly the responsibility of the local bodies. Middle,

secondary and senior secondary education is primarily looked after by Directorate of

Education, Government of Haryana. At the University level, Govt. of Haryana is also

running Degree Colleges being funded by UGC and Haryana Govt. Apart from this a number

of private organizations are also engaged in imparting education at all levels of schooling.

Tele-Communication

Telecommunication facility in the study area is adequate; electronic telephone exchange is

working in the study area, and mobile facility is also available.

Roads and Transportation System

The site is well connected with Existing Golf course extension road (Southern peripheral

Road). Apart from this 60m wide HUDA Sector road has been developed recently, which also

increase the connectivity of the proposed development.

Post-Office

Postal cum telegraph facility is also available. Post office facility is available at area.

Banks

The Study Area is having branches and ATMs of all major nationalized as well as privatized

banks.

Hospital

Civil Hospital caters to health needs of this region and also has to share the burden of

migratory as well as floating population from neighboring states.

Community Health Centre plays a significant role and is committed to provide health care

facilities to the people of this region and it does so through a network of existing primary,

secondary and tertiary hospitals, dispensaries/ health centers, school health clinics, child care

centers; by implementation of various state and national programme under medical and public

health sector for prevention and eradication of various diseases. ESI Dispensary & Good

Private Clinic facility is available in Gurgaon and South-West Delhi region. There are number

of hospitals within 15 km radius of the project site. Paras Hospital , Kabliji Hospital, Artmis

hospital Civil Hospital , Private hospital, Max hospital, Medicity etc. Apart from these a chain

of government runs and private dispensaries as well as small nursing homes in the locality

serve as first aid to the local people.




5 POLLUTION SOURCES, IMPACT PREDICTION & IMPACT

ASSESSMENT

5.1 POLLUTION SOURCES

Pollutants generated during the construction and operation phase of the proposed development either be

liquid, solid and gaseous in nature. The generation of pollution may be periodic, continuous or accidental.

Potential sources of pollutants and their characteristics during the construction and operation phase are

given below in Table 5.1.

Table 5:1 Potential Pollutant Sources & Characteristics

S.

No Activity / Area Pollutant Pollutant Characteristics Frequency

CONSTRUCTION PHASE

1. Ground excavation

and leveling

Air emissions: PM10,

PM2.5 CO, NOx, SO2

Dust from construction

activities and excavation.

Particulates, NOx and CO

from vehicle exhaust

Temporary during

construction phase

only- bulk of the

emissions are expected

from ground working

and leveling activities.

Earth / solid waste Solid waste from

construction activity and

excavation.

Periodic.

Noise Noise generated from

construction equipment and

machinery

Temporary during

initial construction

phase.

2. Labour Camps Sewage Sewage generated from

temporary labour camps on

site

Temporary – during

the initial construction

phase

Solid Waste Solid Waste generated from

temporary labour camps on

site

Temporary – during

the initial construction

phase

OPERATION PHASE

1. Vehicular

movement

Air emissions and

noise

Vehicle exhaust emissions Continuous / Periodic

2. Diesel power

generators

Air emissions

SO2, NOx, PM, CO from fuel

burning

Continuous

Noise

Noise due to running of

equipment

Continuous

Hazardous waste Used Oil Generation Periodic, during oil

changes




S.

No Activity / Area Pollutant Pollutant Characteristics Frequency

3. Commercial/Indust

rial/Residential

Wastewater Wastewater containing

waste food matter

Continuous

Domestic Solid waste Garbage / Food waste Continuous

4. Project area

including common

toilets

Sewage

Domestic wastewater – BOD,

S.S, Pathogens

Continuous

Domestic Solid

Wastes

Bio-degradable and non-

biodegradable wastes

Continuous – small

quantities

5. Raw water

treatment

Wastewater Backwash water discharge Continuous

Solid waste Sludge from coagulation

process

Continuous

6. Sewage treatment

Plant

Solid waste Settled and stabilized sludge Continuous

Treated water Treated sewage used for

horticulture

Continuous

7. Diesel Storage Solid waste

Settled sludge during tank

cleaning

Occasional

Oil

Oil spillage – Accidental

large spills due to pipe

rupture

Oil Spillage - Small

quantities due to small pipe

leaks

Accidental / Only due

to poor housekeeping

8. Maintenance/

housekeeping

Wastewater Floor washing Continuous

Solid waste Used equipment parts and

garden wastes

Continuous

9. Vehicle Parking

Area

Oil Spills Minor oil leaks in parking lot Continuous – small

quantities

10. Storm water drains Wastewater Contamination discharge

from site – Mainly suspended

solids

During rainy season

5.2 IMPACT PREDICTION AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT

The primary function of an environmental impact assessment study is to predict and quantify potential

impacts, assess and evaluate the magnitude and their importance in order to develop an environmental

management plan to mitigate the impacts. Environmental impacts could be positive or negative, direct or

indirect, local or regional and also reversible or irreversible.




Baseline environmental conditions at the proposed site for various parameters were provided in Chapter 4

whereas Table 5.1 given above provides the various pollution loads and stressors that could impact the

environment. This chapter discusses the incremental environmental impacts on the environmental parameters

during the construction and operation phases of the project. The potential impacts have been identified in

Table 5.2. The mitigative measures for the adverse impacts, if any are discussed in Chapter 6 Environmental

Management Plan.

Table 5:2 Identification of potential Impacts during Construction & Operation Phase

S. No Components Aspect Potential Impact

CONSTRUCTION PHASE

1. Ambient Air

Quality

Dust emissions from site preparation,

excavation, material handling and other

construction activities at Site.

Minor negative impact inside the premises.

No negative impact outside project site.

Short term

2. Noise

Noise generated from construction

activities, operation of construction

equipment and traffic.

Minor negative impact near noise generation

sources inside premises.

No significant impact on ambient noise levels

at sensitive receptors.

Short term

3. Water quality Surface runoff from project site

Oil/fuel and waste spills.

Improper debris disposal

Discharge of sewage from labour

camp.

No significant negative impact.

Short term

4. Landuse and

Aesthetics

Land development Minor positive impact

5. Topography &

Geology

Site development No Significant Impacts

6. Soil Construction activity leading to topsoil

removal and erosion.

Minor negative impact

7. Ecology

Flora & Fauna

Habitat disturbance during construction

activity


Short term

8. Socio-economy Increased job opportunity for locals.

Economy related to residential real

estate development, material supply

etc. expected to boom.

Overall positive impact

9. Traffic Pattern Haul Truck movement and possibility

of traffic congestion outside site on

Sohna-Gurgaon Road





S. No Components Aspect Potential Impact

OPERATION PHASE

1 Ambient Air

Quality

Particulate and gaseous emissions from

DG sets and vehicle movement Minor Negative impact

2 Noise

Noise from vehicle movement and

operation of diesel generator sets

during power failure.

Minor negative impact inside premises.

No significant impact at sensitive receptors.

3 Water Quality Oil/fuel and waste spills.

Discharge of sewage.

Discharge of contaminated storm water

No significant adverse impact

4 Water usage Use of over ~231 KL per day fresh

water at peak demand


5 Soil Storage and disposal of solid and

hazardous wastes

Discharge of sewage

Fuel and material spills

Pesticides use

No negative impact

6 Ecology

Flora & Fauna

Landuse change

Discharge of wastewater to surface

water bodies

No negative impact

7 Socio-economy Increased job opportunity in the

proposed project for the locals.

Overall positive impact

8 Traffic Pattern The proposed project is likely to add

significantly to the predicted traffic

during peak hours.

Moderate Negative Impact

5.3 IMPACT ON PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT

5.3.1 Impact on Land use & Aesthetic

The land acquired for the proposed development is mainly a non productive land with undulating

topography. The existing land use of the acquired site does not have any agricultural practices; although,

some of the small bushes and seasonal vegetation exist within the site. However, the said land has already

granted license for Independent Floors development by Directorate of Town & Country Planning (DTCP).

Therefore, it can be adhered that the proposed development will not cause any loss to agricultural

productivity, as the land is not having any such activity at present.

The proposed facade of the project was designed with climate responsive elements, sensitive use of stone,

water and greenery to create an efficient and aesthetic work environment. Planned environment friendly

development would create a positive impact on the aesthetics and visual appeal of the region.




The proposed development on the project site include development of large inter connected landscaped

areas and open spaces at various levels which would enhance the overall aesthetics of the area.

The change in aesthetics and visual appeal of the region will also be positive, wherein unplanned development

will give way to a planned, environment friendly and sustainable urban habitat.

5.3.2 Impact on Topography

The project site has moderate topography with slight variation of highest and lowest point. The existing

ground level (EGL) at the time of the topographical survey varies from RL 237.5 (lowest) to 244.0

(highest). The proposed activity during the construction phase would involve excavation work and leveling of

proposed site. Since the proposed site involves the construction of one level basement, it is estimated that

about 1,50,000 cum earth will be excavated. The cut fill will be balance by volume of earth which would be

excavated and for filling low lying area and construction of embankment for roads.

The construction activities will proceed in a manner so as to maintain the natural slope of the area by

creating basement.

No additional stresses will be imposed by the project on these parameters and hence no significant impacts

are expected.

5.3.3 Impact on Geology

Quarry material requirements for the proposed development have been estimated, as such the key natural

materials such as earth, sand, stone will be sourced from licensed and government approved quarries.

Table 5:3 Quantity of Quarry Material

Description Course Sand in

Cum Fine Sand in Cum

Aggregates in

Cum

Quantity 45000 9000 60000

Source of Material Local market Local market Local market

It will be ensured that these quarries have required environmental approvals and abundant capacities to

meet the requirement of the project. A significant quantity of natural material requirement will be

substituted by using flyash. Hence, no negative impact is envisaged on the local geology of the area.

5.3.4 Impact on Drains

As discussed earlier in Section 4.5.7 the site does not have any streams or drains. The site has a moderate

terrain, with little variation of highest and lowest part of the land.

The construction activities will not have an impact on the existing drainage pattern of the proposed site as

the natural slope will be maintained and the excess runoff will be channelised through garland drains

provided around the construction areas.




5.3.5 Impact due to Tectonics / Earthquakes

The project area falls under seismic zone IV as per the Seismic Zoning Map of India (IS 1893, Part-I, 2002)

and therefore area is moderately susceptible to earthquakes. The proposed development will not involve any

change in the tectonics of the area as the topography of the area will be maintained by creating adequate

basement and through the leveling of land, as and when required. However, the design of the proposed

building will take into consideration all these risks, associated with the incidents like earthquake.

5.3.6 Impact on Mineral Resources

No impact on minerals is anticipated because of the construction of proposed Independent Floors

development, as currently there are no signs of presence of minerals in direct influence area of the proposed

development.

5.3.7 Climate & Meteorology

The climate and meteorological pattern of the region impact due to the proposed development as there will

be low spatially restricted short term impact due to cutting of vegetation. The development of peripheral

green belt development and landscape plantation is a part of the proposed development which will help in

improving the micro-climate of the region.

5.4 IMPACT ON AIR ENVIRONMENT

5.4.1 Air Emissions Sources

Air emissions have no boundaries and can migrate from one place to another place depending upon the

wind direction and speed. The sources of air emission can be grouped into three categories of point, area

and line sources:

1. A pollutant source that can be treated in a dispersion model as though pollutants were emitted from

a single point that is fixed in space. Example: the mouth of a smoke stack.

2. An array of pollutant sources so widely dispersed and uniform in strength that they can be treated in

a dispersion model as an aggregate pollutant release from a defined area at a uniform rate. Such

sources may include vehicles and other small engines, small businesses and household activities, or

biogenic sources, such as a forest, that release hydrocarbons.

3. An array of pollutant sources along a defined path that can be treated in dispersion models as an

aggregate uniform release of pollutants along a line. Example: the sum of emissions from individual

cars traveling down a highway can be treated as a line source.




5.4.2 Fugitive Emissions from site preparation

During the construction phase of the project, the principle source of air pollution will be dust from exposed

site areas, stockpiling, and movement of vehicles along unpaved roads, excavation and handling of

construction materials.

5.4.3 Impact on Air Environment due to Construction Activities

Air Quality

During the construction phase, the major sources of air emissions include:

Particulate Matter (PM) associated with the construction activity

Emissions due to the operation of DG sets, to be used for supplying power

The impact due to the operation of DG sets during the construction phase

In order to quantify the impact of SPM associated with the construction activity, it is planned that the

construction activity will be carried out in phases. The emission sources will be distributed throughout the

project site and will fall under the category of area source.

Basic Consideration

In the absence of information regarding the quantity and type of construction equipment to be deployed at

any particular time, overall emission factor for SPM from construction activities has been used. Overall

SPM emission has been estimated using the emission factor of 1.2 tons SPM/month of activity/acre as per

AP-42 Section 13.2.3.3 (USEPA, 1995). This emission factor is used for developing emission estimates

from construction activities throughout a geographical area and is most applicable for construction

operations with medium activity level, moderate silt contents and semiarid climate (USEPA, 1995). The

derivation of the factor assumes that construction activity occurs 30 days per month, making the above

estimate somewhat conservatively high for total suspended particulate (U.S. EPA, 1995).

For the air environmental impact assessment study, MoEF recommended air quality model, Industrial

Source Complex Short Term (ISCST3-version 3) has been applied to predict ground level incremental

concentrations (GLCs).

Air Dispersion Model - (ISCST3)

Air dispersion modeling can be used to predict atmospheric concentrations of pollutants at specific locations

(receptors) over specific averaging times (i.e. annual, daily and hourly). An atmospheric dispersion model

accounts for emissions from a source; estimates how high into the atmosphere they will go, how widely they

will spread and how far they will travel based on temporal meteorological data; and outputs the pattern of

concentrations that will occur for various exposure periods, thereby providing the exposure risks for different

receptors.




Industrial Source Complex Short Term (ISCST3) air dispersion model was used to predict ground level

concentrations of the contaminants emitted from area and point sources at the site during both the

construction and operational phases.

In order to predict the air pollutants, the model requires the following input parameters:

Hourly meteorological data;

The source description including emission rates of the various contaminants, type of source (i.e. area

and point) and source emissions characteristics, as described above;

The receptor locations and grid layout will be based on the site coordinates, receptor locations and

nature of sources.

The incremental concentrations have been predicted for Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) over an

averaging time of 24 hours. This case provides a prediction of the maximum concentrations at each receptor

for a 24–hourly period during which meteorological conditions were least conducive for dispersion of

pollutants and does not include the effect of precipitation.

Impact due to DG sets during Construction Phase

The total maximum demand load during construction phase is about to be 1000 kVA, which will be sourced

from DG sets to be used at project site. The capacity of DG sets is about 1000 kVA (500 kVA + 320 kVA

+ 180 kVA). During construction phase, diesel generator sets operated for back-up power supply are

identified as the source of gaseous and particulate emission. SO2, NOx, PM10, PM2.5 and CO emissions are

expected due to fuel combustion in generator sets.

Impact Prediction of DG set emission at Proposed Independent Floors Project

The specifications used for modeling of D.G. sets installed for power back-up in proposed project are given

in Table 5.4

Table 5:4 Diesel Generator Set Specifications

S. No. Particulars DG set Capacity

180 KVA

DG set Capacity

320 KVA

DG set Capacity

500 KVA

1 No of DG sets 1 1 1

3 No of stacks 1 1 1

4 Height of stack (m) 6 m above GL 6 m above GL 6 m above GL

5 Diameter of stack (m) 0.2 0.3 0.35

6 Exit velocity of gas (m/s) 20 25 25




7 Exit gas Temperature (0C) 569 502 538

8 Sulphur Content in Fuel (%) 0.5 by weight % 0.5 by weight % 0.5 by weight %

9 Fuel Consumption (L/hr) 29.9 51.1 77

10 Density of Fuel (kg/m3) 856 856 856

11 Emission rate (g/s) for

each DG set

SO2 0.25 0.25 0.5

NOx 0.10 0.3 0.73

PM10 0.003 0.05 0.1

PM2.5 0.003 0.05 0.1

CO 0.03 0.035 0.07

The maximum predicted increment in concentrations of SO2, NOx, PM10, PM2.5 and CO due to D.G. sets are

estimated about 0.161 µg/m3, 6.684 µg/m

3, 5.609 µg/m

3, 2.527 µg/m

3 and 1.659 µg/m

3 respectively. The

details of predicted value with back ground air quality levels along with NAAQS are provided in Table 5.5

through Table 5.9 The spatial distribution of predicted pollutants concentration are also shown in Figure

5.1 through Figure 5.5. As the D.G. sets will be operated for back-up power supply only, hence the impact

of generation of gaseous pollutants in the ambient environment will be negligible.

Table 5:5 Ground Level SO2 (µG/M3) Concentration at Different Locations (24 hourly Averaged)

Concentration (g/m3) Maximum 24 Hour GLC NAAQS

SO2 Contribution from Site 18.49

80 µg/m3

SO2 Baseline (Maximum) 12.9

Total SO2 31.39

SO2 Contribution from Site to Maximum SO2 58.90%




Figure 5.1: Spatial Distribution of 24 Hours Average SO2 GLC (µG/M3)

Table 5:6 Ground Level NOx (µG/M3) Concentration At Different Locations (24 hours Averaged)


NOx Contribution from Site 7.39

80 µg/m3

NOx Baseline (Maximum) 23.8

Total NOx 31.19

NOx Contribution from Site to Maximum NOx 23.69 %




Figure 5.2: Spatial Variation of 24 hours averaged NOx GLC (µG/M3)

Table 5:7 Ground Level PM10 Concentration (µG/M3) At Different Locations (24 hours Averaged)


Predicted Incremental PM10 Contribution 0.22

100 µg/m3

PM10 Baseline (Maximum) 106.39

Resultant PM10 106.61

PM10 Contribution from the Proposed

Project towards maximum background

PM10

0.21%




Figure 5.3: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM10 GLC (µG/M3)

Table 5:8 Ground Level PM2.5 Concentration (µG/M3) At Different Locations (24 hours Averaged)


Predicted Incremental PM2.5 Contribution 0.22

60 µg/m3

PM2.5 Baseline (Maximum) 65.47

Resultant PM2.5 65.69

PM2.5 Contribution from the Proposed

Project towards maximum background

PM2.5

0.33%




Figure 5.4: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM2.5 GLC (µG/M3)

Table 5:9 Ground Level CO (µG/M3) Concentration at Different Locations (1 hours Averaged)


CO Contribution from Site 2.21

4000 µg/m3

CO Baseline (Maximum) 1087

Total CO 1089.21

CO Contribution from Site to

Maximum CO 0.203 %




Figure 5.5: Spatial Distribution of 1 hours averaged CO GLC (µG/M3)

5.4.4 Impact on Air Environment during Operation

The major air emissions expected during the operation phase will be due to the tailpipe emissions from

onsite traffic. To assess the quantitative impact, air quality modeling has been carried out using MoEF

approved model ISCST (Industrial Source Complex Short Term) version 3 for DG sets emission. The

vehicular emission model (CALINE) has been used to predict concentrations of specific vehicular

pollutants (CO and NOx).

Tailpipe emissions from On-site Traffic – Area Source

CO is considered as the primary pollutant anticipated as tailpipe emissions from light and heavy vehicles

traveling on the road. Apart from this, NOx also add pollutant load into the environment. Air quality impact

assessment due to additional traffic load on the main road connecting to the proposed site has been carried

out under worst-case scenario and assuming the maximum number of vehicles traveling per hour on these

roads. The CO and NOx concentrations prediction due to the proposed project is assessed with the help of

CALINE4 Model- A versatile dispersion model for predicting air pollutants levels near the road and is




given by California Department of Transportation. The emission rate along with estimated vehicular rate is

given in Table 5.10.

Table 5:10 Vehicle Emission Statement

Sl.

No.

Category of

Vehicles

Expected No.

of Vehicles

Emission Rate (g/km)

PM* SO2

# NOX

* CO

2 Car 1397 0.004 0.0028 0.20 1.30

*- Emission Factor development for Indian Vehicles, ARAI Pune, #- The SO2 emission has been calculated based on Diesel

Consumption

Model Assumption

The emission load has been evaluated by mathematical modeling using ISCST 3, US-EPA software for DG

set and Caline 4 for Vehicular Movement. The average meteorological data of December month was

considered as met input for model study. The flue gas from DG set with 30 meter stack height shall travel

up to 1.5 km approximately. Also the dispersion of vehicular emission is limited to 100 m, after that particle

will get stabilized on the earth surface due to their specific settling velocity. Hence, the extent of the

modeling is limited for 2 km from the location of DG set. The incremental GLCs due to vehicular

movement have been calculated at a distance of 50m from the road to present the worst case scenario. The

output results are tabulated in Table 5.11 below.

Impact due to vehicular Movement

The proposed development will have the 1397 nos. car parking facility for the residing population. The

impact of vehicular movement on ambeint air quality has been predicted by using Caline 4. The maximum

resultant value of ground level concentrations (GLCs) of pollutants due to vehicular movement are provided

below in Table 5.11.

Table 5:11 Max. Resultant GLCs due to Vehicular Movement

Sr. No. Pollutant Unit Max. Baseline

GLCs

Max. Incremental

GLCs due to

Vehicular

Movement*

Max. Resultant

GLCs

1. PM10 µg/m3 106.39 0.54 106.93

2. PM2.5 µg/m3 65.47 0.23 65.7

3. SO2 µg/m3 12.9 0.07 12.97




Sr. No. Pollutant Unit Max. Baseline

GLCs

Max. Incremental

GLCs due to

Vehicular

Movement*

Max. Resultant

GLCs

4. NOX µg/m3 23.8 3.137 26.937

5. CO mg/m3 1087 0.056 1087.056

*- Incremental GLCs at exposure distance of 50m from the road

Impact due to DG sets

The total demand load is 6.4 MW, which will be sourced from Dakshin Haryana Bijlee Vitran Nigam

Limited (HVPNL). During operation phase, diesel generator sets operated for back-up power supply are

identified as the only major sources of gaseous and particulate emission. SO2, NOx, PM10, PM2.5 and CO

emissions are expected due to fuel combustion in generator sets. To serve as a back-up power supply for

proposed project, power is to be supplied through 5 D.G. sets.

Impact Prediction of DG set emission at Proposed Independent Floors Project

The specifications used for modeling of D.G. sets installed for power back-up in proposed project are given

below in Table 5.12.

Table 5:12 Diesel Generator Set Specifications

S. No. Particulars

Values Values

1500 kVA 500 kVA

1 No of DG sets 4 1

2 No of stacks 4 1

3 Height of stack (m) 30 30

4 Diameter of stack (m) 0.35 0.35

5 Exit velocity of gas (m/s) 65 70

6 Exit gas Temperature (0C) 392.4 523.6

7 Sulphur Content in Fuel (%) 0.25 by weight % 0.25 by weight %

8 Fuel Consumption (L/hr) 309 77

9 Density of Fuel (kg/m3) 856 856

10 Emission rate (g/s) SO2 0.0243 0.0082




NOx 1.023 0.34

PM10 0.5112 0.05

PM2.5 0.066 0.023

CO 0.39 0.13

The maximum predicted increment in concentrations of SO2, NOx, PM10, PM2.5 and CO due to D.G. sets are

estimated about 0.161 µg/m3, 6.684 µg/m

3, 5.609 µg/m

3, 2.527 µg/m

3 and 1.659 µg/m

3 respectively. The

details of predicted value with back ground air quality levels along with NAAQS are provided in Table

5.13 through Table 5.17 .The spatial distribution of predicted pollutants concentration are also shown in

Figure 5.6 through Figure 5.10. As the D.G. sets will be operated for back-up power supply only, hence

the impact of generation of gaseous pollutants in the ambient environment will be negligible.

Table 5:13 Ground Level SO2 (µG/M3) Concentration (24 hourly Averaged) due to DG sets

Description Maximum 24 Hour GLC

Concentration (g/m3)

NAAQS

SO2 Contribution from Site 0.161

80 µg/m3

SO2 Baseline (Maximum) 12.9

Total SO2 13.061

SO2 Contribution from Site to Maximum SO2 11.84%




Figure 5.6: Spatial Distribution of 24 Hours Average SO2 GLC (µG/M3)

-2000 -1500 -1000 -500 0 500 1000 1500 2000

-2000

-1500

-1000

-500

0

500

1000

1500

2000

0.007

0.014

0.021

0.028

0.035

Table 5:14 Ground Level NOx (µG/M3) Concentration (24 hours Averaged) due to DG sets



NAAQS

NOx Contribution from Site 6.684

80 µg/m3

NOx Baseline (Maximum) 23.8

Total NOx 34.484

NOx Contribution from Site to Maximum NOx 19.38%




Figure 5.7: Spatial Variation of 24 hours averaged NOx GLC (µG/M3)

-2000 -1500 -1000 -500 0 500 1000 1500 2000

-2000

-1500

-1000

-500

0

500

1000

1500

2000

1.2

2.4

3.6

4.8

6

Table 5:15 Ground Level PM10 Concentration (µG/M3) (24 hours Averaged) due to D.G. Sets



NAAQS

Predicted Incremental PM10 Contribution 5.609

100 µg/m3

PM10 Baseline (Maximum) 106.39

Resultant PM10 111.999

PM10 Contribution from the Proposed Project towards

maximum background PM10 5.00%




Figure 5.8: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM10 GLC (µG/M3)

-2000 -1500 -1000 -500 0 500 1000 1500 2000

-2000

-1500

-1000

-500

0

500

1000

1500

2000

0.9

1.8

2.7

3.6

4.5

5.4

Table 5:16 Ground Level PM2.5 Concentration (µG/M3) (24 hours Averaged) due To D.G. Sets



NAAQS

Predicted Incremental PM2.5 Contribution 2.527

60 µg/m3

PM2.5 Baseline (Maximum) 65.47

Resultant PM2.5 67.997

PM2.5 Contribution from the Proposed Project towards

maximum background PM2.5 3.72%




Figure 5.9: Spatial Distribution of 24 hours averaged PM2.5 GLC (µG/M3)

-2000 -1500 -1000 -500 0 500 1000 1500 2000

-2000

-1500

-1000

-500

0

500

1000

1500

2000

0.4

0.8

1.2

1.6

2

2.4

Table 5:17 Ground Level CO (µG/M3) Concentration (1 hours Averaged) due to D.G. sets



NAAQS

CO Contribution from Site 2.21

4000 µg/m3

CO Baseline (Maximum) 1087

Total CO 1089.21

CO Contribution from Site to Maximum CO 0.203 %




Figure 5.10: Spatial Distribution of 1 hourly averaged CO GLC (µG/M3)

-2000 -1500 -1000 -500 0 500 1000 1500 2000

-2000

-1500

-1000

-500

0

500

1000

1500

2000

0.3

0.6

0.9

1.2

1.5

5.5 IMPACT ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT

5.5.1 Impact on Noise Environment during Construction Phase

Noise Quality

The noise emission sources during construction phase will include construction machineries/equipments to

be employed at site.

The expected noise levels from the operation of equipment and machineries are provided in Table 5.18.

Table 5:18: Noise levels Generated from Construction Equipment

Name of Source Noise Level at 16 m (50 ft) from source in dB (A)




Name of Source Noise Level at 16 m (50 ft) from source in dB (A)

Back Hoe/Loader 85

Concrete Mixer Truck 81

Mobile Cranes 81

Dump Truck 89

Generator 75

Pile Driver 101

Jack hammer 90

Prediction Model

For an approximate estimation of propagation of noise in the ambient air from the area or point source, a

standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation has been used which is as follows:

Noise (Receptor) = Noise (Source) - 20 Log [distance (Receptor) / distance (Source)]

The incremental noise level during the construction phase will be predicted using the CPCB approved noise

model DHAWANI, applicable for stationary point sources. For the modeling purposes, worst case scenario

has been considered assuming a flat terrain and absence of sound absorbers.

Results and Discussion

Modeling results indicate that the cumulative noise level is expected to be within the permissible AAQSRN

standards of 55 dB(A) at a distance of about 2000 m. The predicted noise levels are without mitigation

measures and it is assumed that with the adoption of the mitigation measures noise levels will be

further restricted within very short distances from the source.

With respect to occupational exposure, the permissible threshold is 90 dB (A) for 8 hours per day. Thus,

based on the modeling results, it can be concluded that all sensitive receptors (i.e. labour colonies) will be

located beyond 200 meters from the noise generating sources during construction activities. Figure 5.11

shows the spatial variation of incremental noise level during construction phase without any control.




Figure 5.11: Spatial Variation of Incremental Noise Level during Construction Phase without Control

5.5.2 Impact on Noise Environment during Operation Phase

Impact due to DG sets

The DG sets are proposed to be installed at project site during the construction phase as per the requirment.

However, the DG sets will be provided with acoustic enclosures so as to keep the noise level within the

prescribed standards.

The major noise emissions expected during the operation phase will be due to the operation of DG sets.

Prediction Model

For an approximate estimation of propagation of noise in the ambient environment due to DG set, a

standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation has been used which is as follows:

Noise (Receptor) = Noise (Source) - 20 Log [distance (Receptor) / distance (Source)]

The incremental noise level due to the operation of the DG set installed has been predicted using the CPCB

approved noise model DHAWANI, applicable for stationary point sources. For the modeling purposes,

worst case scenario has been considered assuming a flat terrain and absence of sound absorbers.




The predicted incremental noise levels without control measures have been presented as noise contours in

an area of 1000m x 1000m as shown in Figure 5.12. Modeling results indicate that the cumulative noise

level is expected to be within the permissible AAQSRN standards of 55 dB(A) at a distance of about 200 m

from the source location.

Figure 5.12: Spatial Variation of DG-set Noise Levels around the Project Site during Operation Phase

without Control

DG sets will be used only in emergency for back up supply. It will be ensured that the DG sets are enclosed

in acoustic enclosures and comply with the prescribed CPCB norms.

5.6 IMPACT ON WATER ENVIRONMENT

5.6.1 Impact on Water Environment during Construction Phase

Water resources

SURFACE WATER RESOURCES

The water requirement during construction phase will mainly comprise of water for construction purposes

and water demand for labourers. The water during construction phase will be sourced through tanker water

supply for drinkable purpose. There will be no extraction of water from surface water resources for using in

the proposed development; hence no impact on surface water resources is envisaged.




GROUNDWATER RESOURCES

The proposed development would not extract any ground water resources, as the water requirement during

the construction phase will be met through tanker water supply from STP of HUDA for construction

purpose.

Water Requirement

The water requirement during construction phase can be broadly divided into two categories.

Construction activities (180 KLD) which is the peak period demand during construction phase

Domestic water requirement for labourers (70 KLD) (considering 1200 construction labors during the

peak construction period @ 45 lpcd water demand as per CPHEEO and 200 will be residing in labour

camp @ 86 lpcd as per Manual on Construction & large building projects)

Wastewater Generation

Wastewater stream during construction period shall be from transit labour colonies and wastewater from

construction activities. Wastewater generation during construction phase would be around 57 KLD.

Construction activities for the proposed development can have minor impact on hydrology and ground water

quality of the area, should the construction waste leaches into ground. Potential impacts on the hydrology and

ground water quality have been discussed as under.

Soil runoff from the site leading to off-site contamination (particularly during rainy season).

Improper disposal of construction debris leading to off-site contamination of water resources.

Unaccounted disposal of domestic wastewater from temporary labour camps.

Spillage of oil & grease from the vehicles and wastewater stream generated from on-site activities

such as vehicles washing, workshop etc.

Construction & Development of site

Development of the proposed site could lead to stockpiling and excavation activity on site, thereby causing

erosion of base soil. The run off from the site may contain high quantity of suspended solids (SS). The impact

of runoff may not be very significant except during rainy season. Further construction of garland drains will

reduce the runoff from the stockpiles.

Bored piling may be carried out for building structures. Bore piling, if used, requires the use of chemical

lubricants, which generates a wastewater stream requiring treatment before discharge.

Site Workshop




The repair and maintenance of equipments/vehicles on site would generate waste containing oil and grease.

The wastewater stream would also be generated from vehicle washing. The impact can be mitigated to a great

extent by installing oil and grease traps during construction phase.

Construction of roads & parking areas

The impact from the road construction depends on both the construction practices and the type of material

used. Construction waste of electrical installation, DG sets, painting and flooring is likely to create significant

impact. This type of waste would be stock piled and disposed properly.

Labour Colony

During construction phase, wastewater shall be generated from labour colony. High levels of BOD, SS,

Nitrogen and E. coli would characterize wastewater generated. Significant water quality impact will occur, if

the sewage is disposed without any prior treatment. It is proposed to deploy local population from nearby

villages to the maximum extent possible.

5.6.2 Impact on Water Environment during Operation Phase

5.6.2.1 Water Requirement

During the operation phase, the ultimate water requirement considering all planned developments is

expected to be 480 KLD. This includes water requirement for domestic purpose, water for landscape

development and for DG set cooling purposes of the entire development, once fully become operational.

The estimates have been worked out on the basis of norms as part of the “Manual on norms and Standards

for Environment Clearance of Large Construction Projects, MoEF”, and CPHEEO manual on “Water

Supply and Treatment”.

The water requirements are planned to be met through public supply and if in case, ground water extraction

is required, due permission will be taken from the CGWA. The project proposes to recycle treated

wastewater for flushing, landscaping thereby reducing the fresh water requirement and is expected to be in

the order of 249 KLD. The ultimate water demand estimated for various activities within the proposed

development, is as shown in Table 5.19.



Table 5:19: Ultimate Water Requirements for Proposed Project

S. No. Description No. of

Units

Total Population Water

Requirement per

Person

Total Water

Requirement

Total Water

Requirement for

Domestic Use

Total Water

Requirement for

Flushing Use

Waste water

Generation

(80%)

Description Nos. (LPCD) (LPD) (LPD) (LPD) (LPD)

A Water Requirement for Residential

1. Independent Floors 552 Residential 2484

135 345900 223560 111780 276720

Visitors 228

45 6840 3420

Security/ Staff 20

15 100 200

Sub Total 230500 115400

B Water Requirement for Other Uses

1. Landscape 9710 sqm @ 5lit/sqm 48550 - - -

2. Road Maintenance/

Arboriculture

18066 sqm @ 3lit/sqm 54198 - - -

3. Other Construction

Acivities

- - 31000

Total Domestic Water Requirement (A+B) 479648

230500 115400 276720

say in KLD 480 231 115 277

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.1




Total Domestic Water Required (KLD) 480

Net Potable Water Required (KLD) 231

Net Treated Effluent Water Required (KLD) 249

STP

A Wastewater Generation (KL) 277

B Say Proposed Capacity of STP (KL) 320

C Treated Water Available (KLD) after Biological Unit 249

Reuse for Horticulture 49

Reuse for Flushing 115

Reuse for Road Maintenance /Arboriculture 54

Reuse for other construction activities 31

D Total Treated Water Required (KLD) 249

(*Source: MoEF Manual on norms and standards for Environmental Clearance of large construction projects,

CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply & treatment) Wastewater Generation and Characteristics




The total sewage generated from the proposed project is expected to be in the order of 277 KLD which will

be treated in STP of capacity 320 KLD to be installed at project site.

The total reclaimed wastewater will be 249 KLD out of which 320 KLD will be used to meet the flushing

requirement, 54 KLD for Road Maintenance/Arboriculture, 49 KLD for horticulture/landscaping

requirement and 31 KLD for Other construction activities.The water balance for the proposed development

is as shown in Figure 5.13.

For optimal management (treatment and reuse), wastewater generation has been categorized under two

sources:

1. Gray water (wastewater generated from various activities, except for the wastewater produced from

the toilet flushing)

2. Black water (wastewater generated from the toilet)



Figure 5.13: Water Balance for Proposed Project

DOMESTIC WATER REQUIREMENT (346 KLD)

(Fresh Water 231 KLD) + (Recycled Treated Water 115KLD)

Fresh Water Requirement (A) 231 KLD Treated Waste Water Reused (B) 249 KLD

Domestic Other than Flushing

231 KLD Flushing

115 KLD

Road

Maintenance/

Arboriculture

54 KLD

Horticulture

49 KLD

STP Proposed ( Design Capacity= 320KLD)

Horticulture

49 KLD

Flushing

115 KLD

(Sewage Generation 80% of Domestic Water &

Flushing water supply) = 277 KLD

90 % recovery, 249 KLD

TOTAL WATER REQUIREMENT (A + B)= 480 KLD

UV Treatment 249 KLD

Road Maintenance/

Arboriculture 54 KLD

Other

construction

activities

31 KLD

Other construction

activities

31 KLD




Treated wastewater is expected to have characteristics as shown in Table 5.20.

Table 5:20: Expected Treated Wastewater Characteristics

Parameters

Treated Effluent Quality

mg/l

pH 6.5-7.5

Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5) < 10 mg/l

Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) < 30 mg/l

Suspended Solids < 5 mg/l

Oil & Grease Absent

(Source: Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO)

The waste water will be treated to meet the permissible limits as per CPCB guidelines as given in

Table 5.21 However, the proposed development will ensure zero discharge of treated effluent.

Table 5:21: Standards for Effluent Disposal

S.N Parameter Into inland

surface waters

Into public

sewers, mg/l

On land for

irrigation, mg/l

1 pH 5.5-9.0 5.5-9.0 5.5-9.0

2 BOD for 5 days at 20 oC, mg/L 30 350 100

3 Chemical Oxygen Demand, mg/L 250 - -

4 Suspended Solids, mg/L 100 600 200

5 Total Dissolved Solids, mg/L 2100 2100 2100

6 Temperature, mg/L 40 45 -

7 Oil and grease, mg/L 10 20 10

8 Phenolic compounds, mg/L 1 5 -

9 Cyanides, mg/L 0.2 2 0.2

10 Sulphides, mg/L 2 - -

11 Fluorides, mg/L 2 15 -

12 Total residual chlorine, mg/L 1 - -

13 Pesticides, mg/L - - -




14 Arsenic, mg/L 0.2 0.2 0.02

15 Cadmium , mg/L 2 1 -

16 Chromium (Hexavalent) , mg/L 0.2 2 -

17 Copper, mg/L 3 3 -

18 Lead, mg/L 0.1 1 -

19 Mercury , mg/L 0.01 0.01 -

20 Nickel , mg/L 3 3 -

21 Selenium , mg/L 0.05 0.05 -

22 Zinc, mg/L 5 15 -

23 Chlorides, mg/L 1000 1000 600

24 Boron, mg/L 2 2 2

25 Sulphates, mg/L 1000 1000 1000

26 Sodium ( 9%), mg/L - 60 60

27 Ammonical Nitrogen, mg/L 50 50 -

28 Radioactive materials 10-7

10-7

10-8

29 Alpha emitters (milicurie/ml) 10-6

10-6

10-7

The impact on water environment will not be significant as the proposed development would not

extract groundwater resources. However, if in case of any withdrawal from ground water, due

permission will be taken from CGWA.

The proposed development is not likely to have any impact on the water quality of the area as it is

committed not to discharge any effluents outside the developed area and ensured zero discharge of

effluent. Thus, full reutilization of treated effluent will be done on site through landscaping, flushing,

Road maintenance and for other construction activities.

5.7 IMPACT ON LAND ENVIRONMENT

5.7.1 Impact on Land Environment during Construction Phase

The proposed development will not have an impact on soil productivity as the requirement of soil

during construction phase will be met within the said area.

The proposed site is slightly undulating with a variation of about 6.5 m between the highest and

lowest contour level, thereby reducing the leveling requirement. Once the leveling of the land is done,




the construction of buildings for various purposes like residential and commercial, It buildings and

social infrastructural facilities will be carried out, which will entail excavation of material.

Total excavated earth = 1,50,000 cum.

The cut and fill will be balanced by volume of earth which would be excavated. No extra earth will be

required and hence no impact on soil productivity.

The proposed development will not have an impact on soil quality as the construction and demolition

waste, chemical waste and municipal solid waste generated during the construction phase will be

handled properly.

The soil of the proposed site may be affected due to improper waste disposal on the site. Wastes

which are likely to be generated during the construction phase include the following:

5.7.1.1 Soil Erosion

Erosion of soil may occur on account of vegetation and large-scale excavation activity for

construction. Site selected for the project has sparse vegetation; hence impact owing to removal of

vegetation would be minimal, however construction and associated activities would expedite erosion

if not managed properly. The following are the major factors determining the soil erosion potential.

Topography /Gradient of Slope: Erosion and gradient have a direct relationship. The steeper the

gradient, higher is the rate of erosion and vice versa. The project site has moderate topography with

slight variation of highest and lowest point. The existing ground levels (EGL) at the time of the

topographical survey varies from RL 237.5 (lowest) to 244.0 m (highest). The site slopes slightly

from east towards west.Hence, the soil erosion potential due to existing topography and due to the

excavation of basement, are almost nil.

Soil Properties: The vulnerability of a piece of land to soil erosion depends on the physical and

chemical characteristics of the soil. The sandy silty texture of the soil at the project site indicate soil

erosion potential of high intensity.

Rainfall Pattern: More precipitation means more surface flow, and more surface flow means more

area vulnerable to erosion by running water. The maximum mean monthly rainfall for the year 2003 is

495.6 mm in the month of July. The soil erosion potential at the site due to the rainfall of the region is

of the medium intensity.

Construction and Demolition Waste

The proposed development will involve generation of construction and demolition (C&D) waste. The

waste generated from various other construction activities contain a mixture of inert and non-inert

material, which include waste timber formwork, spent concrete and cement screening, material and

equipment wrappings.




Chemical Wastes

Vehicle servicing will likely be the primary source of chemical wastes during the construction period.

The majority of chemical waste will comprise of waste oils and solvents.

Municipal Waste

The municipal waste generated during the construction phase will comprise of waste generated from

the temporary labour camps.

Workers engaged during construction phase will generate municipal solid wastes such as food wastes,

packaging and wastepaper. The waste from labor camps would be mainly household domestic waste

and it is estimated to be 0.170 TPD.

The waste generation during construction phase will not have any impact as the waste generated from

labour camps will be predominantly organic in nature and will be stored within the construction area

for biodegradation and covered with soil layer (daily cover) on regular basis.

5.7.2 Impact on Land Environment during Operation Phase

During the operation phase, carefully designed landscaped areas and plantation will be maintained.

No significant impact is expected on the soils on and around the site, due to the following

management measures:

i. All solid and hazardous wastes from the project will be properly collected, stored and disposed.

An integrated solid waste management plan will be developed as per the details given in

Chapter 6.

ii. Wastewater will be treated and disinfected and reused for various purposes on site and will not

be discharged outside the premises.

iii. Storm water will be used to recharge the aquifer after filtration of silt and sand.

iv. Secondary containment will be provided in fuel, oil and other material storage areas.

v. The entire site area will be well paved and thus there will be no leaching of any substances in

case of spills.

Hence, no negative impact on soil quality in the study area is expected due to the project activities.

Impacts due to Solid Waste Disposal

During operation phase, solid waste will be generated from various activities, which have been

quantified on the basis of Manual for Municipal solid waste management and handling (MSW Rules,

2000) and as per the norms prescribed by Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering

Organization (CPHEEO) for biomedical waste, sewage sludge and industrial waste and is shown in

Table 5.22.




The generated solid waste will be disposed off and due to the improper disposal of waste the soil of

the proposed site and the surrounding areas is likely to be affected.

Table 5:22: Expected Solid Waste Generation

S. No Description Population

(Nos.)

Area (sq

M)

Rate @ SW

Generation

Total Solid

Waste

Generation (kg)

1 Residential

1.1 Plots (552 Nos du.) 2484

0.4 kg/capita/day 993.6

1.2 Operation & Maintenance Staff 20

0.1 kg/capita/day 2

1.3 Visitors (20% of total

Residential) 228

0.1 kg/capita/day 22.8

2 Landscape Waste

2.1 Landscape Area under

Residential 9710 0.003 kg/m²/day 29.13

3 Sweeping from Road and

Other Hard Paved Area 18066 0.01 kg/m²/day 180.66

4 Sludge Generation from STP

20

Total SW Generation

say

1248.19

or 1.25 TPD

The total waste generated from the proposed project is expected to be about 1.25 TPD comprising of

municipal solid waste, and sewage sludge. Proper segregation, collection, storage, treatment and

disposal facilities for various categories of waste will be provided in accordance with the regulatory

requirements.

MSW including horticulture waste will be generated during the operation phase and will be handled

as per the Municipal Solid Waste Management & Handling Rules, 2000. Segregation at source will be

introduced with bio-degradable and non recyclable/non-biodegradable waste to be stored and

collected separately. The biodegradable waste will be stored and transported to nearest designated

waste storage bins; where as the non recyclable and non biodegradable waste will be disposed off to

authorized recyclers.

The sewage sludge will be generated from the sewage treatment plant and will be disposed off. The

sludge from the water treatment plant could be used in horticulture.




During this phase, environmental impact from solid waste disposal can typically include

contamination of soil, ground water, surface water and air quality. Solid waste, if disposed improperly

can cause following impact on the environment.

Ground water contamination by leachate generated by non-scientific dumping.

Surface water contamination by the run off from the dumping site

Bad odor, Pests, rodents and wind blown litter in and around the dumping site.

Generation of inflammable gases (e.g. Methane)

Fires within the waste dump.

Bird menace above dumping site which affects flight of air craft

Erosion and stability problem relating to slope of the dumping site

Epidemic through stray animals

Increased concentration of acidity in the surrounding soil

Release of green house gases.

Impacts may also result from improper siting, inadequate design and poor operation. However for the

proposed project, impacts from waste disposal would not be significant, since waste would be

converted to compost at the project site using suitable composting technique. Rejects from compost

along with non-recyclable and non-compostable fraction of waste would be disposed as per the

Municipal Solid Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2000.

Impacts due to E-Waste

Approximate 3.59 Tonns per Annum of e-waste will be generated in a worst case scenario from the

proposed development that will be stored at a warehouse to be setup within site and will be sent to

authorized recyclers or e-waste processing plants for treatment as per E-Waste [Management &

Handling] Rules, 2010. Table 5.23 shows the E-waste generated due to the proposed development.

Table 5:23 E-waste Generated – Independent Floors Project

Landuse

No. of

Dwelling

Units

Computer/

Laptop TV Refrigerator

Cell

Phone Telephone CFL

Floors 552 110.4 37 37 276 110.4 276

Weight of Item (Kg.) 10 20 45 0.108 0.25 0.1

Quantity of E-Waste

Generated / Year (Kg.) 1104 740 1665 29.808 27.6 27.6




Total Quantity of E-Waste

Generated (Tone/ Year ) 3.594008 or 3.59

5.8 IMPACT ON BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Potential primary and secondary impacts from the proposed project on the biological environment

have been identified and noted below:

The significance of ecological impacts is evaluated based on the criteria set forth:

Habitat quality

Species affected

Size/abundance of habits/organisms affected

Duration of impacts

Magnitude of environmental changes

However this being rapid EIA impacts is ranked here as “minor”, “moderate” or “severe”, although in

a few cases a ranking may be minimal. The ranking of a given impact will vary based on the criteria

used. For example, an impact might be ranked as “minor” if it affected only common species and

habitat, or if it affected small number of individuals or small area, whereas it might be ranked as

“severe” if it affected rare species or habitat of large number of individuals or large area.

5.8.1 Impact during Construction Phase

The potential impacts of project on terrestrial ecological may be due to:

Site development.

Noise & disturbance.

Noise, air pollution & other disturbances: Air, noise and visual disturbance may be generated during

the site development that can affect the behavior of fauna of the adjacent habitats. Due to agriculture

nature of surrounding areas, the limited conservation importance of the species recorded, and the

temporary nature of impacts, potential impacts to fauna from this source are ranked minor. These

activities and the resulting impacts on the existing ecology would be mitigated adopting

comprehensive EMP.

Most fauna recorded in the study area are disturbance tolerant. Construction will mainly take place in

project areas, where biodiversity is highly improvised. Fauna inhibiting plantation near construction

site may be temporarily affected by noise and disturbance generated during site formation and

construction. However, as alternative habitats are available in and near this area and disturbance is

going to be confined to construction period. The impacts from noise, air, and other disturbance during

the construction stage on terrestrial fauna are ranked as minor.




Aquatic

As mentioned earlier, there being no permanent water body of ecological significance within the

immediate impact zone of the study area, therefore there would be no aquatic impact.

5.8.2 Impact during Operation Phase

This section of the report considers the potential impacts (like; air and noise pollution, wastewater and

other disturbances) of project operation phase on terrestrial ecology.

Potential impacts of project operation include long-term air and noise pollution and disturbance

generated by area lighting and traffic. The surrounding study area has limited fauna and flora and is

largely agricultural in nature. Most of the terrestrial fauna in the study area is dweller of typical rural

setting. The impact of project activities on these has been ranked as minimal. In addition, the project

includes development of green areas within the project site.This will provide habitat for the terrestrial

and avifauna of the surrounding area.

5.9 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

5.9.1 Positive Impacts

Better Physical Infrastructure

At present the Project area is in lack of adequate physical infrastructure. Good quality roads,

communication and transport, and water facilities in the project area are missing. The project will

involve road upgrading and better power and water supply in the area. This would enhance the

existing infrastructure and also encourage further development in the surroundings. It is likely that

with better communication and accessibility infrastructure, there will be increase in the number of

local people indulging in trade, commerce and allied services.

BETTER SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The design of proposed project has recognised the important role that social infrastructure plays in

the creation of strong, healthy and sustainable communities. Sustainable communities require good

schools, good health services, good parks, transport choices, flourishing businesses as well as a range

of housing types. The design includes Independendent Floors development.

Employment Potential:

During the Construction period, there will be large requirement of workers thus providing

opportunities for employment. The proposed project will provide employment to local residents.

Besides this, local building material industries will supply cement, sand stone and other materials. The

construction of project will increase the movement of workers and people in the area, providing a

greater exchange of technology and business opportunities. Generation of additional economic

activity is expected to create employment opportunities for the local population during operation




phase. The service industry will have a corresponding increased market base. Money spent within the

local economies will have a multiplier effect as the money is spent throughout the community. This

will improve the business base in the region and will lead to additional services being provided.

Other Benefits

Benefits to women: The proposed facility would generate jobs for the women laborers during

construction as well as operation phase. The women would also have the opportunities for

administrative or other supervisory jobs, closer to their place of stay.

Increase in land value: With the proposed project coming in the area the prices of the land will

increase considerably. Hence the proposed project will have beneficial impact.

Better health and educational facility: The proposed facility is well planned and would be designed

to incorporate the state of art health facility and therefore would provide emergency services.

Similarly Private educational resources in the study area would provide for the better education.

Wider economic growth: This project will increase the economic activities around the area, creating

avenues for direct/indirect employment in the post project period. There would be a wider economic

impact in terms of generating opportunities for other business like workshops, marketing, repair and

maintenance tasks etc.

Aesthetics Environment: The architectural character of the new building, the vistas and landscaped

areas created would improve the aesthetics of the area.

Additional Revenues: The development of land for any purpose creates both an immediate demand

for services and a flow of revenues to the community from a variety of sources. For example property

tax, licenses and permits fee etc.

5.9.2 Negative Impacts

Traffic and Transport: During the construction phase, truck movement due to construction activities

will take place. In order to minimize any inconvenience that may arise, the movement of trucks would

be allowed during night and non-peak hours. During the operation phase, the traffic in the area is

likely to increase. This may lead to traffic congestion and inconvenience for pedestrians and residents

accessing the localities. The traffic study and Transportation Management Plan being developed for

the project will mitigate these impacts to a large extent

Transit Labour population: Labourers for the project would be from surrounding areas. About 1200

labourers would be working on the site and most of them would be on contract or from the neighbouring

settlements. No significant pressure on local infrastructure is envisaged if a small percentage of

labourers settle in and around the site during construction phase.




5.9.3 Negligible Impacts

Resettlement & rehabilitation issues: Since there is no existing settlement on the proposed project

area, hence there is no issue of resettlement or rehabilitation.

Demography: During construction and operation phase, some of the work force is likely to be

nonlocal. It is highly unlikely that this will affect or alter the existing demographic profile and

population density.

Impact on historical, archeological & architectural sites: There are no historical or archeological

monuments of significance within 10 kilometers radius of the project and hence no negative impact in

this regard is anticipated.

5.10 IMPACT ON HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL SITES

The proposed site and its surrounding areas do not have archaeological structures, hence no such

demolition of any structures are envisaged due to the proposed development.

5.11 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS

A summary of likely impacts due to proposed project is noted in Table 5.24.

Table 5:24 Summary Matrix of Predicted Impacts due to Proposed Project

S.

No Components Activities Predicted impacts Extent of Impacts

CONSTRUCTION PHASE

1. Ambient Air

Quality

-Dust emissions from

site preparation,

excavation, material

handling and other

construction activities

at Site.

Minor Negative

impact inside the

premises. No

negative impact

outside the site.

Impacts are temporary during

construction phase. Impacts

will be confined to short

distances, as coarse particles

will settle within the short

distance from activities.

2. Noise

-Noise generated from

construction activities

and operation of

construction

equipment

Minor negative

impact near noise

generation sources

inside premises.

No significant

impact on ambient

noise levels at

sensitive receptors.

Temporary impacts during

construction phase. No blasting

or other high intensity noise

activities envisaged. Baseline

noise is already higher than the

standards. Contribution of

noise during the operational

phase will be confined in time

and space

3. Water quality

-Surface runoff from

project site

-Oil/fuel and waste

Minimal due to

effective EMP

proposal

Impact will be temporary.

Local labour will be employed

to reduce size of labour camps.




S.


spills.

-Improper debris

disposal

-Discharge of sewage

from labour camp.

No perennial surface water

resource adjacent to site.

Labour colonies shall be

provided potable water for

drinking.

4 Landuse and

Aesthetics

-Land development

Permanent positive

impact

The project has ample open

areas and green spaces, with

sustainable infrastructure plan

that will enhance the visual

appeal of the area.

5 Topography

and Geology

-Existing site is barren

land with undulating

slopes and not highly

productive.

No Significant

Impacts

No impacts on topography and

no deposits of minerals on site

leading to loss of revenue.

Building will be designed as

per IS standards for earthquake

protection.

6. Soil

-Construction activity

leading to topsoil

removal and erosion.

Minor negative

impact Temporary

7

Ecology

Flora and

Fauna

-Habitat disturbance

during construction

activity

Minor negative

impact

The site and adjacent areas do

not have any significant flora

and fauna diversity and

density. No endangered species

recorded on site.

8 Socio-

economy

-Increased job

opportunity for locals.

Economy related to

residential &

commercial real estate

development, material

supply etc. expected to

boom.

Overall positive

impact

9 Traffic

Pattern

-Haul Truck movement

and possibility of

traffic congestion

outside site on the

highway.

Minor negative

Impact

OPERATION PHASE

1. Ambient Air

Quality

-Particulate and

gaseous emissions

from DG sets &

operation of boiler and

Minor negative

impact inside the

premises from

onsite cars.

DG sets will be used only as

back up and would be required

a maximum for 8 hours a day.

A higher stack is




S.


vehicle movement Negative impact

outside site from

DG sets.

recommended for both to DG

and boiler in the EMP.

2. Noise

-Noise from vehicle

movement and

operation of diesel

generator sets during

power failure.

Minor negative

impact inside

premises.

No significant

impact at sensitive

receptors.

Contribution of noise from the

project during operational

phase will be limited to minor

increase.

3. Water

Quality

-Oil/fuel and waste

spills.

-Discharge of sewage.

-Discharge of

contaminated storm

water

No significant

adverse impact

4. Water

Availability

-Use of 231 KLD fresh

water requirement at

peak

Minor negative

impact Public supply

5 Soils

-Storage and disposal

of solid and hazardous

wastes

-Discharge of sewage

-Fuel and material

spills

-Pesticides use

No negative

impact -

6.

Ecology

Flora and

Fauna

-Landuse change

-Discharge of

wastewater to surface

water bodies

No negative

impact

It is open space with sparse

vegetation. In whole study area

no significant flora and fauna

is recorded.

7. Socio-

economy

-Increased job

opportunity for locals

in the site for general

services inside the

project.

-Project will involve

road upgrading, better

power supply, water

Overall positive

impact --




S.


source and other

infrastructure facilities

etc.

8. Traffic

Pattern

-The project is likely to

add to the traffic on

HUDA Sector Road

Moderate Negative

Impact

Traffic management measures

and additional road

infrastructure will be planned

by the developers with the

consent of the concerned

authorities to meet the

increased traffic loads.




6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

6.1 INTRODUCTION

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is the key to ensure that the environmental quality of the

zone under impact does not deteriorate beyond the expected level due to the construction and

operation of the project. The EMP comprises a set of measures to be taken in different phases of the

project such as construction and operation to reduce adverse environmental impacts to an acceptable

level. Mitigation plans generally evolve around remediation and offsetting.

6.2 CAPACITY BUILDING FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION

The EMP will be implemented by M/s Commander Pvt. Ltd., through appointment of a team of expert

environmental professionals. All environmental monitoring work will be undertaken by the

contractors through an approved and NABL/ MoEF accredited laboratory.

6.3 IMPLEMENT ARRANGEMENTS FOR EMP

The implementation of the EMP will be initiated by M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. The project

proponent (M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd) will have a multi disciplinary team and will also have

an environmental management cell having a senior level environmental expert supported by a

numbers of middle level environmental experts. This team will ensure compliances of mitigation

measures and all statutory requirements. The team will also implement all EMP provisions and

respective environmental experts will supervise EMP implementation. The senior environmental

expert will mainly report EMP compliances to management and statutory undertakers. The EMP

implementation chart has been given as Figure 6.1.

6.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN MATRIX

The Environmental Management Plan is meant for mitigation/management /avoidance of the

negative impacts and the enhancement of the various environmental components of the project. The

measure adopted and /or to be adopted during the different stages of the project have been detailed in

Table 6.1, for pre construction, construction and operation phases respectively.




Figure 6.1: EMP Implementation Chart

HEAD ENVIRONMENT & SAFETY

MANAGER

HEALTH AND

SAFETY

MANAGER ENVIRONMENT & SAFETY

AGM

ENVIRONMENT.

ARCHITECT

GREEN

BUILDING

DM

ENVIRONMENT

LANDSCAPE

ARCHITECT

CORPORATE LEVEL

HEALTH AND

SAFETY

OFFICER

ENGINEER

ENVIRONMENT

PROJECT SITE

Environment Impact Assessment Report Proposed Independent Floor Development (18.138 Acres), Sector-61, Village Ullawas,

Gurgaon


Table 6:1 : Environmental Management Plan Matrix

S. No. Environmental

Aspect/Issue Management Measures Responsibility

Planning And Pre-Construction Phase

1. Land Acquisition

The land has already been purchased from the private property holder at prevailing

market prices and hence it does not involve any land related issues. M/s

Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure that any additional environmental

impacts resulting in the land will be properly addressed and integrated into the

EMP and other relevant documents.

Project Proponent

2. Preservation of Trees The proposed project is likely to involve cutting of small bushes and ground

vegetation.

Project Proponent through

Contractor

3. Batching Plants

The Contractor will be hired after duly approval of M/s Commander Realtors Pvt.

Ltd. It will also be ensured that the batching plant will comply with the

requirements of the relevant current emission control legislations and

Consent/NOC for the batching plants will be submitted to M/s Commander

Realtors Pvt. Ltd. Arrangements to control dust pollution through provision of

windscreens, sprinklers, and dust encapsulation will also be provided at all such

sites.


Contractor

4.

Other Construction

Vehicles, Equipment

and Machinery

All vehicles, equipment and machinery procured for construction will comply with

the Bureau of India Standard (BIS) norms. The discharge standards formulated

under the Environment Protection Act, 1986 will be strictly adhered to.

Noise limits for construction equipments such as compactors, rollers, front loaders

concrete mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws will not exceed 75 dB (A),

measured at one meter from the edge of the equipment in free field, as specified in


Contractor


Gurgaon




the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

6. Arrangement for

Construction Water

Tanker water will be used for fulfilling the water requirement during construction

period. The contractor will not be allowed to use any community water resource,

any irrigation canal or any surface water body for construction activities.


Contractor

7. Labor Requirements Unskilled labor from local communities will be given preference so as to provide

maximum benefit to the local community.


Contractor

8.

Construction Camp

Locations –

Selection, Design and

Lay-out

Labour camps will be constructed in locations so as to avoid conflicts and stress

over the infrastructure facilities with the local community.

Location for stockyards for construction materials will be made close to the site, so

as to avoid day transportation of raw material.

The waste disposal and sewage system for the labour camps will be designed in a

manner such that there are no adverse impacts on the surrounding areas.


Contractor

9.

Orientation of

Implementing Agency

and Contractors

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will organize orientation sessions and regular

on-site training sessions during all stages of the project including training for local

workers as well as for the contractor staff.

Environment Management Cell of

Project Proponent

Construction Phase

Site Clearing

1. Site Clearing

The proposed site will be cleared off all the weeds, shrubs and ground vegetation

prior to commencement of any construction activity


Contractor


Gurgaon




2. Other Construction

Wastes Disposal

Disposal locations will be identified as a part of Comprehensive Solid Waste

Management Plan to be prepared by the Contractor in consultation and with

approval of M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd.

Contractor will ensure that any spoils of material unsuitable for embankment fill

will not be disposed off near any water course, agricultural land, and natural

habitat like grass lands or pastures. Such spoils from excavation can be used to

reclaim borrow pits and low-lying areas located in barren lands along the project

area.

All waste materials will be completely disposed and the site will be fully cleaned

and certified by Environmental Expert of M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd before

handing over.


Contractor

Procurement of Construction Material

4.

Transporting

Construction Materials

and Haul Road

Management

Contractor will maintain all roads (existing or built for the project), which are used

for transporting construction materials, equipment and machineries as precised. All

vehicles delivering fine materials to the site will be covered to avoid spillage of

materials.

Contractor will arrange for regular water sprinkling as necessary for dust

suppression of all such roads and surfaces.

The unloading of materials at construction sites in/close to settlements will be

restricted to daytime only.


Contractor

5. Construction Water The contractor will use tanker water supply and will take all precaution to

minimize the wastage of water in the construction process/ operation.


Contractor


Gurgaon




Construction Work

6. Disruption to Other

Users of Water

It will be ensured by the contractor that only tanker water will be used for

construction purposes and no water is withdrawn from any community water

bodies.


Contractor

7. Drainage and Flood

Control

Contractor will ensure that no construction materials like earth, stone, ash will be

disposed off which can block any flow of water.

Contractor will take all necessary measures to prevent the blockage of water flow.

In addition to the design requirements, the contractor will take all required

measures to prevent any temporary or permanent change in the drainage pattern of

the area.


Contractor

8. Degradation of Water

Quality

It will be ensured by the contractor that any surface run off during construction

activities will be diverted through garland drains into a collection tank wherein it

will be separated for oil and silt, thereby making it fit to be used for construction

activities or disposal to nearby water bodies.


Contractor

Pollution

9. Water Pollution from

Construction Wastes

The Contractor will take all precautionary measures to prevent the wastewater

generated during construction from entering into streams, water bodies or the

irrigation system.

All waste arising from the proposed development will be disposed off as per the

norms of State Pollution Control Board.


Contractor

10. Water Pollution from The contractor will ensure that all construction vehicle parking location, Project Proponent through


Gurgaon




Fuel and Lubricants fuel/lubricants storage sites, vehicle, machinery and equipment maintenance and

refueling sites will be located close to the project site.

All location and lay-out plans of such sites will be submitted by the Contractor

prior to their establishment and will be approved by M/s Commander Realtors Pvt.

Ltd

Contractor will ensure that all vehicle/machinery and equipment operation,

maintenance and refueling will be carried out in such a way that spillage of fuels

and lubricants does not contaminate the ground. Oil interceptors will be provided

for vehicle parking, wash down and refueling areas as per the design provided.

Contractor will arrange for collection and storing and disposal of oily wastes and

the same will be sold to vendors authorized by MoEF for recycling. All spills and

collected petroleum products will be disposed off in accordance with MoEF and

state PCB guidelines.

Contractor will certify that all arrangements comply with the guidelines of

SPCB/MoEF or any other relevant laws.

Contractor

11. Dust Pollution

It will be ensured by the contractor that the construction equipments conform to

relevant dust emission control legislation and that they are located close to the site,

preferably in downwind direction.

The dust pollution during construction activities will be reduced through water

sprinkling, encapsulation of dust source and by erection of screen/barriers.

The pollution monitoring will be conducted as per the monitoring plan.


Contractor

12. Emission from

Construction Vehicles,

Contractor will ensure that all vehicles, equipment and machinery used for

construction are regularly maintained and confirm that pollution emission levels


Contractor


Gurgaon




Equipment and

Machineries

comply with the relevant requirements of SPCB.

The Contractor will submit PUC certificates for all vehicles/ equipment/machinery

used for the project.

13.

Noise Pollution: Noise

from Vehicles, Plants

and Equipments

The Contractor will confirm the following:

All plants and equipment used in construction (including crushing plant) shall

strictly conform to the MoEF/CPCB noise standards.

All vehicles and equipment used in construction will have valid PUC. Servicing of

all construction vehicles and machinery will be done regularly and during routine

servicing operations, the effectiveness of exhaust silencers will be checked and if

found defective will be replaced.

At the construction sites within 250 m of the nearest habitation, noisy construction

work such as concrete mixing, batching will be stopped during the night time

between 10.00 pm to 6.00 am.

Monitoring shall be carried out at the construction sites as per the monitoring

schedule and results will be submitted to M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd.

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will be required to inspect regularly to ensure

the compliance of EMP.


Contractor

Safety

14. Personal Safety

Measures for Labour

Contractor will provide:

Personal Protective Equipments (PPE) will be provided to all the labourers during

construction phase.

Adequate safety measures for workers during handling of materials at site will be


Contractor


Gurgaon




taken up.

The contractor will comply with all the precautions as required for ensuring the

safety of the workmen as per the International Labor Organization (ILO)

Convention No. 62 as far as those are applicable to this contract.

The Contractor will mark ‘hard hat’ and ‘no smoking’ and other ‘high risk’ areas

and enforce non-compliance of use of PPE with zero tolerance. These will be

reflected in the Construction Safety Plan to be prepared by the Contractor during

mobilization and will be approved by M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd

15. Traffic and Safety

The contractor will take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic during

construction and provide, erect and maintain such barricades, including signs,

markings, flags, lights and flagmen as proposed in the Traffic Control

Plan/Drawings for the information and protection of traffic approaching or passing

through the section of any existing cross roads.

The contractor will ensure that all signs, barricades, pavement markings are

provided as per the MoRTH specifications.


Contractor

16. Risk from Electrical

Equipment(s)

The Contractor will take all required precautions to prevent danger from electrical

equipment and ensure that -

No material will be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to

any person or the public.

All necessary fencing and lights will be provided to protect the public in

construction zones.

All machines to be used in the construction will conform to the relevant Indian

Standards (IS) codes, will be free from patent defect, will be kept in good working


Contractor


Gurgaon




order, will be regularly inspected and properly maintained as per IS provision.

17. Risk Force Measure

The contractor will take all reasonable precautions to prevent danger to the

workers and public from fire, flood etc. resulting due to construction activities.

The contractor will make required arrangements so that in case of any mishap all

necessary steps can be taken for prompt first aid treatment. Construction Safety

Plan prepared by the Contractor will identify necessary actions in the event of an

emergency.


Contractor

18. First Aid

The contractor will arrange for -

A readily available first aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing

materials and appliances as per the Factories Rules in every work zone

Availability of suitable transport at all times to take injured or sick person(s) to the

nearest hospital.


Contractor

19. Informatory Signs and

Hoardings

The contractor will provide, erect and maintain informatory/safety signs, hoardings

written in English, Hindi and local language, wherever required.


Contractor

Flora & Fauna (Plantation, Preservation, Conservation Measures)

20. Flora and Fauna

The contractor will take reasonable precaution to prevent his workmen or any

other persons from removing and damaging any flora (plant/vegetation) and fauna

(animal).

If any carcass of any wild animal/ wetland bird is found near the construction site

at any point of time, the contractor will immediately take necessary actions for


Contractor


Gurgaon




dealing with the same.

Labour Camp Management

21. Accommodation

Contractor will follow all relevant provisions of the Factories Act, 1948 and the

Building and the other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and

Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 for construction and maintenance of labor camp.

The contractor will maintain necessary living accommodation and ancillary

facilities in functional and hygienic manner.

It will also be ensured that, local labour will be hired to the maximum extent

possible.


Contractor

22. Potable Water

The Contractor will construct and maintain all labor accommodation in such a way

that uncontaminated water is available for drinking, cooking and washing.

The contractor will also guarantee the following:

a) Supply of sufficient quantity of potable water (as per IS) in every

workplace/labor camp site at suitable and regular maintenance of such facilities.

b) If any water storage tank is provided that will be kept such that the bottom of

the tank at least 1m from the surrounding ground level.

c) Testing of water will be done every month as per parameters prescribed in IS

10500:1991.


Contractor

23. Sanitation and Sewage

System

The contractor will ensure that

- the sewage system for the camp are designed, built and operated in such a way

that no health hazards occurs and no pollution to the air, ground water or adjacent


Contractor


Gurgaon




water courses take place

- separate toilets/bathrooms, wherever required, screened from those from men

(marked in vernacular) are to be provided for women

- adequate water supply is to be provided in all toilets and urinals

- all toilets in workplaces are with dry-earth system (receptacles) which are to be

cleaned and kept in a strict sanitary condition

- human excreta is to be disposed of by putting layer of it at the bottom of a

permanent tank prepared for the purpose and covered with 15 cm layer of waste or

refuse and then covered with a layer of earth for a fortnight.

24. Waste Disposal

The contractor will provide garbage bins in the camps and ensure that these are

regularly emptied and disposed off in a hygienic manner as per the Comprehensive

Solid Waste Management Plan, provided by M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd


Contractor

Contractor’s Demobilization

25.

Clean-up Operations,

Restoration and

Rehabilitation

Contractor will prepare site restoration plans. The clean-up and restoration

operations will be implemented by the contractor prior to demobilization. The

contractor will clear all temporary strouctures; dispose all garbage as per

Comprehensive Waste Management Plan, provided by M/s Commander Realtors

Pvt. Ltd.

All disposal pits or trenches will be filled in and effectively sealed off.

All construction zones including road-side areas, camps, hot mix plant sites, ,

batching plant sites and any other area used/affected by the project will be left

clean and tidy, at the contractor's expense, to the entire satisfaction of M/s


Contractor.


Gurgaon




Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd.

Operation Phase

1. Monitoring Operation

Performance

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will monitor the operational performance of the

various mitigation/ enhancement measures carried out as a part of the project.

The indicators selected for monitoring include the survival rate of trees; status of

rehabilitation of borrows areas; and utility of noise barriers.


Project Proponent.

2. Maintenance of

Drainage

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure that all drains (side drains, median

drain and all cross drainages) are periodically cleared especially before monsoon

season to facilitate the quick passage of rainwater and avoid flooding.

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will also ensure that all the sediment and oil and

grease traps set up at the water bodies are cleared once in every three months.

Facility Management Team of

Project Proponent

3. Pollution Monitoring

The periodic monitoring of the ambient air quality, noise level, water (both ground

and surface water) quality, soil pollution/contamination in the selected locations as

suggested in pollution monitoring plan will be responsibility of M/s Commander

Realtors Pvt. Ltd, for which approved pollution monitoring agency will be hired.


Project Proponent through MoEF /

NABL Accredited Laboratory

4. Air Pollution

Ambient air concentrations of various pollutants will be monitored as envisaged in

the pollution-monitoring plan.

Green belt development will be carried out and maintained.




5. Noise Pollution

Noise pollution will be monitored as per monitoring plan at different zones. Noise

control programs will be enforced strictly.

Monitoring the effectiveness of the pollution attenuation barriers, if there is any,





Gurgaon




will be taken up thrice in the operation period.

6. Soil Erosion Visual monitoring and inspection of soil erosion will be carried out once in every

three months as suggested in monitoring plan.


Project Proponent

7. Maintenance of surface

water bodies

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure that no effluent from the proposed

development will be discharged into any surface water bodies. It will ensure that

water conservation measures are being implemented and that the treated effluent is

effectively reused within the site.


Project Proponent.

8. Energy Conservation

Measures

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure that effective energy conservation

measures are being adopted so as to reduce the power demand.


Project Proponent

9. Solid waste

Management

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure that the municipal solid waste

generated during the operation phase of the proposed project will be handled as per

the Municipal Solid Waste Management & Handling Rules, 2000. The generated

municipal solid waste will be stored in the bins and then transfer to the centralized

system. From there it will be transported to the outside to an existing SWM

facility. The E-waste generated will be handled as per the E-Waste Management &

Handling Rules, 2010, biomedical waste will be sent to authorize biomedical

recyclers as per notified Biomedical Waste Management Handling (Amendment)

Rules, 1998 and the hazardous waste will be stored within the site and will be

handled as per the Hazardous Waste Management Handling and Transboundary

Movement (Amendment) Rules, 2009.


Project Proponent

10. Water Sourcing M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure that water for the proposed

development, water from the existing public supply will be used; however, in case

of extraction of water from ground water, necessary permission will be taken from


Project Proponent


Gurgaon




CGWA and subsequently, the ground water recharge will be done through rain

water harvesting techniques.

11. Wastewater Treatment

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure that no wastewater will be

discharged outside the project premises. It will be ensured that the wastewater

generated is treated in STP and is reused for landscaping, flushing and HVAC

purposes within the development. Care will be taken for zero discharge of treated

effluent outside.


Project Proponent

12. Water Conservation

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will ensure water recycling for landscaping,

flushing and HVAC & DG cooling purposes within the project premises. Apart

from recycling, rainwater harvesting will also be carried out within the proposed

development in order to recharge groundwater so as to reduce the freshwater

consumption demand and conserve water resources.


Project Proponent




The detailed Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required to mitigate the adverse

environmental impacts during construction and operation phase of the project are as given below:

6.5 EMP FOR AIR ENVIRONMENT

To minimize the pollutant concentration levels, mitigation measures primarily to minimize the use of

private vehicles would be implemented for further emission reduction as presented in this section. It

is, therefore, assumed that if these measures were implemented, the concentrations of all pollutants as

presented above will be much lower in value and would contribute very less impact on the project site

and at the receptor locations as well.

CONSTRUCTION PHASE

6.5.1 Site Preparation

Environmental impacts during construction phase will mainly arise due to civil works such as site

preparation, RCC foundation, construction etc., material and machinery transportation, fabrication and

erection etc. The construction phase impacts are temporary and localized phenomena except the

permanent change in local landscape and land use pattern at the project site. However, they require

due consideration with importance during project execution and also wherever applicable detailed

procedures shall be implemented to prevent/mitigate adverse impacts and occupational hazards.

To mitigate the impact of dust during the construction phase of the proposed project, the following

measures are recommended for implementation:

A dust control plan; and

Procedural changes to construction activities.

Dust Control Plan

Appropriate measures have been recommended and will be implemented to mitigate the adverse

impacts of dust on health of construction workers and the settlements around the site. The following

measures have been recommended:

Paving: The major access roads to the site will be paved as a part of the overall development

plan. The material storage areas will also be paved for dust control.

Graveling: Locally found gravel will be applied to the other access roads to serve as a

protective layer over the exposed soil.

Water Sprinkling: Water sprinkling will be carried out for the surfaces exposed to high wind

speeds or heavy vehicular movement.

Reducing Vehicle Speed: High vehicle speeds increase the amount of fugitive dust created

from unpaved areas. Speed bumps will be provided to ensure speed reduction on unpaved

areas.




Material Storage: All material storage areas will be adequately covered and contained so that

they are not exposed to high wind speeds on site leading to dust/particulate emissions. Fabrics

and plastics will be used for covering soils and debris to reduce fugitive dust emissions.

Procedural Changes to Construction Activities

Production and Transportation of Material - The transport of materials such as concrete and asphalt

to the construction sites generate significant amount of road dust, especially for sites that are

relatively far from material manufacturers. Setting up temporary portable concrete plants and/or

asphalt plants at construction sites can eliminate haulage of materials.

Idling Time Reduction - Construction equipment is commonly left idling while the operators are on

break or waiting for the completion of another task. Emissions from idling equipment tend to be high,

since catalytic converters cool down, thus reducing the efficiency of hydrocarbon and carbon

monoxide oxidation. Existing idling control technologies, which automatically shut the engine off

after a preset time can reduce emissions, without intervention from the operators.

Improved Maintenance - Recognizing that significant emission reductions can be achieved through

regular equipment maintenance, contractors will be asked to provide maintenance records for their

fleet as part of the contract bid and at regular intervals throughout the life of the contract.

To mitigate the impacts of DG set operation it will be ensured that the DG set would have sufficient

stack height to disperse the pollutants.

6.5.2 Noise Environment

To mitigate the impact of noise from the construction equipments on site, the following measures are

recommended for implementation:

Time of Operation: Minimum construction activities will be scheduled during night time. Material

transport will be strictly limited to daytime hours to ensure minimum incremental noise during night

hours.

Job Rotation: Workers employed in high noise areas will be engaged in shifts to minimise exposure.

Protective Equipments: Earplugs/muffs or other hearing protective wear will be provided to those

working very close to the noise generating machinery.

Vibration Control: For vibration control, damped tools will be used and the working hours will be

limited. The detailed Noise & Vibration Control Plan is enclosed as Annexure 6.1

To mitigate the impacts of noise generation due to DG sets, it will be ensured that DG set is enclosed

in acoustic enclosure and has adequate stack height so as to disperse the emissions.




6.5.3 Construction Material Management

The major construction material to be used for construction include bricks, coarse aggregates, cement,

coarse sand, reinforcement steel, structural steel, aluminium doors & windows, granite and vitrified

tiles for flooring and other water supply & sanitary fittings. The material will be loaded and unloaded

by the engaged labour on site.

The duties of the contractor will include monitoring all aspects of construction activities, commencing

with the storing, loading of construction materials and equipment in order to maintain the quality.

The work should be completed as per the final construction schedule. Bricks should be stacked neatly

at designated place of storage yard. Cement should be stored in stacks as shown in Figure 6.2. Other

material like aggregate, reinforcement and consumables should also be tidily stored in place and

released for use without causing litter around.

The contractor shall be responsible for management of such construction material during entire

construction period of the project. Sufficient quantity of materials should be available before starting

the each activity.

The contractor should test the all the materials in the Government labs or Government approved labs

in order to ensure the quality of materials before construction. This is also the responsibility of the

contractor, which would be clearly mentioned in the contractor’s agreement.

As soon as the construction activity is over the surplus earth shall be utilized to fill up the low-lying

areas, if any. All stationary machines shall be inspected weekly for maintenance and will be fitted

with exhaust pollution control devices.




Figure 6.2 Schematic layout of Cement Godown

OPERATION PHASE

To mitigate the impact of pollutants from vehicular traffic as discussed in Section 6.3 during the

operational phase of the site the following measures are recommended for implementation:

Vehicle emission controls and alternatives; and

Greenbelt development.

6.5.4 Vehicle Emission Controls and Alternatives

Parking Provisions: Adequate parking provisions for 1397 cars are made within the project site. The car

parking facility at the proposed project will be provided only at Stilt level.

Table 6.2 shows the car parking details in the proposed Independent Floors project. Traffic

Circulation and Parking Plan at Stilt is given in Figures 6.3 to Figure 6.5.




Table 6:2 Parking Details – Independent Floors Project

S.No Details Parking Numbers

1 Parking Requirement as per MoEF Norms

1.1

Residential @ 1 ECS per 2 tenements of BUA 101 to 200 sq m

(Ref: Annexure 6.2 area requirement for car parking, MoEF Manual

on Large Construction Project)

627 ECS

2 Parking Requirement as per HUDA Norms

2.1

Residential @ 1.5 ECS for each Dwelling Units

(Ref: Zoning Plan for Independent Floors 18.138 Acres issued by

DTCP)

828 ECS

3 Total Parking Proposed 1397 ECS

3.3 Stilt 1397 ECS

4 Additional parking over and above the MoEF norms for

future requirement 122.81% ( 770 ECS)

5 Additional parking over and above the HUDA norms for

future requirement 68.72 % (569 ECS)

Proper Road Network: A proper road network shall be constructed within the site boundary for

approach to various equipment/ installations in the site.

Footpaths, and Pedestrian Ways - Adequate footpaths, and pedestrian ways shall be provided at the

site to encourage non-polluting methods of transportation.

Greenbelt Development: Increasing vegetation in the form of greenbelt is one of the preferred

methods to mitigate air pollution. Plants serve as a sink for pollutants, act as a barrier to break the

wind speed as well as allow the dust and other particulates to settle out there. It also helps to reduce

the noise level to some extent. Hence, the project will be so developed that approximately 13% (9,710

sqm) of the area is designated for exclusive green area/landscaping in which 8% of the site area is

designated for peripheral and roadside planting. Details of Greenbelt development are given in

Section 6.10.3. The trees for green belt development that are proposed to be grown as barrier to Air

pollution are given in Table 6.3.

Table 6:3 Trees that can be used as barrier for Air Pollution

Air Pollution Attenuation Dust Barriers

Ficus glomerata (Guler) Azadirachta indica (Neem)




Peltophorum pterocarpum (Copper Pod)

Polyalthia longifolia (Ashok)

Nerium odorata (Kaner)

Melia azaderach (Mahaneem, Bakain)

Butea monosperma (Palash)

Cassia fistula (Amaltas)

Bauhinia variegata (Kachnar)



Figure 6.3 Traffic Circulation and Parking Plan



Figure 6.4 Traffic Circulation & Parking Plan: Stilt Level (A4 type Typical)



Figure 6.5 Traffic Circulation & Parking Plan: Stilt Level (A3 type Typical)



M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. Page | 158

6.6 EMP FOR NOISE ENVIRONMENT

6.6.1 Construction Phase

During the construction phase, there would be a temporary increase in ambient noise levels due to

construction machinery operation and movement of construction vehicles. Though the industrial

countries have specified limits for occupational noise exposure, the permissible noise exposure limit

for industrial workers is primarily concerned with harmful effects of noise and its objective is to

protect the hearing of working people. The American Conference on Government of Industrial

Hygienists (ACGIH), USA, has prescribed the following permissible noise exposure limits for

industrial workers as given in Table 6.4.

Table 6:4 Standards for Occupational Exposure

Exposure time in hours/day Limit in dB(A)

8 90

4 93

2 96

½ 99

¼ 102

1/8 105

1/16 111

1/32 115

Exposure to continuous and intermittent noise levels louder than 115 dB(A) should not be permitted.

Following mitigation / management measures shall be adopted during construction period:

For protection of construction workers, earplugs should be provided to those workers who will be

working very close to noise generation source.

Servicing of all construction vehicles and machinery shall be done regularly and during routine

servicing operations, the effectiveness of exhaust silencers shall be checked and if found defective

will be replaced. Vehicles hired for bringing construction materials at sight shall conform to the

noise emission standards and shall be operated during non peak hours.

Workers employed in high noise areas will be rotated. Earplugs/muffs, or other hearing protective

wear will be provided to those working very close to the noise generating machinery.

Smooth flow of traffic should be ensured on the internal road to avoid idling and honking of

vehicles.




Ambient Noise level monitoring shall be conducted at suitable locations at periodic intervals

during construction phase to conform to the stipulated standards both during day and night time.

Data shall be reviewed and analysed by the project manager for adhering to any strict measure.

Noise levels will also be monitored at point sources for occupational noise exposure and ensuring

health risk.

6.6.2 Operation Phase

To mitigate the impact of noise due to vehicular movement during the operational phase the greenbelt

development is recommended as per the details mentioned in Section 6.10.3 and proper traffic

management is also proposed to be implemented.

6.7 EMP FOR WATER ENVIRONMENT


To prevent degradation and maintain the quality of the water source, adequate control measures have

been proposed to check the surface run-off, as well as uncontrolled flow of water into any water body.

Following management measures are suggested to protect the water quality during the construction

phase.

- Avoid excavation during monsoon season.

- Care should be taken to avoid soil erosion.

- Pit latrines and community toilets with temporary septic tanks shall be constructed on the site

during construction phase to prevent wastewater from entering the water bodies.

- To prevent surface and ground water contamination by oil/grease, leak proof containers should be

used for storage and transportation of oil/grease. The floors of oil/grease handling area should be

kept effectively impervious. Any wash off from the oil/grease handling area or workshop shall be

drained through impervious drains, Clarifiers or oil/water separators shall be constructed and

effluent should be treated appropriately before releasing it.

- Construction activities generate disturbed soil, concrete fines, fertilizer, oils and other wastes. On-

site collection and settling of storm water, prohibition of equipment wash downs, and prevention

of soil loss and toxic releases from the construction site are necessary to minimize water

pollution.

- All stacking and loading areas should be provided with proper garland drains equipped with

baffles to prevent run off from the site to enter any water body.




OPERATION PHASE

In the operation phase of the project, water conservation and development measures need to be taken

including all possible potential for conservation of water, reuse, harvesting and recycling of water.

These could be in the form of the following:

- Water source Development

- Minimizing water consumption

- Promoting reuse of water after treatment and development of closed loop systems for different

water streams.

6.7.2 Water Source Development

Water source development shall be practiced by installation of scientifically design Rainwater

harvesting system.

Rainwater Harvesting Design

Rainwater harvesting promotes self-sufficiency and fosters an appreciation for water as a resource. It

is proposed to have recharge structures at 8 locations (16 Nos.) within the proposed project. 2 Nos. of

pits are located at each location.

In order to calculate the potential for Artificial Recharge, rainfall intensity of 45 mm per hour has

been considered for Gurgaon. The run-off coefficient parameters considered for calculation of the run-

off are given in Table 6.5.

Table 6:5 Run-Off Coefficient Parameters

S. No. Type of Surface Runoff Coefficient

1. Roof Top 0.9

2. Paved Area 0.65

3. Landscape Area 0.2

However, for the purpose of design of recharge structure, the higher value of runoff coefficient is

being considered in view of unpredictable nature of rainfall for arriving at total storage volumes.

Taking into the consideration the above run off coefficient the total run-off of proposed project is

1051.38 m3/ hour. The details design calculation for rainwater harvesting in proposed project is given

in Annexure 6.3.

The recharge structure is the gravel filled recharge well with sedimentation trap and oil & grease trap.

In the project design, it shall be ensured that no mixing of the storm water with waste effluent takes

place. All the storm water will be diverted to rain water-harvesting pits proposed in the project. The




typical section of the rainwater harvesting pit is shown in Figure 6.6 and the location of rainwater

harvesting pits is showing in Figure 6.7

Figure 6.6 Section of RWH Pit Proposed






6.7.3 Provision of Water Body

The provision of about 5.0 % of the net zoned area of the project in green area for the water body for

rainwater harvesting purpose has been made. Approx. 1005 sqm of area has been proposed as

waterbody in the project area and location of water bodies is shown in the Site Plan.

Minimizing Water Consumption

Water consumption will be minimized by a combination of water saving devices such as

implementing fixtures that are low flow and water efficient models together with other water

conservation measures. Furthermore, to ensure ongoing water conservation, an employee education

and awareness programme will be introduced for the residents of the proposed project. Following

section discusses the specific measures, which shall be implemented;

DOMESTIC USAGE

- Use of water efficient plumbing fixtures (low flow toilets and urinals). Water efficient plumbing

fixtures use less water with no marked reduction in quality and service.

- Leak detection and repair techniques.

- Sweep with a broom and pan where possible, rather than hose down for external areas;

- Meter water usage, employ measurement & verification methods. Monitoring water use is a

precursor for management.

- Awareness campaign to disseminate knowledge on strategies and technologies that can be used

for water conservation.

HORTICULTURE

- Plants with similar water requirements shall be grouped on common zones to match precipitation

heads and emitters.

- Use of low-volume, low-angle sprinklers for lawn areas.

- Select controllers with adjustable watering schedules and moisture sensors to account for seasonal

variations, and calibrate them during commissioning.

- Selecting a drought resistant grass, and using lawn chemicals and fertilizer sparingly also reduces

watering needs.

- Place 3 to 5 in. of mulch on planting beds to minimize evaporation.

6.7.4 Promoting Reuse of Water after Treatment

To promote reuse and development of closed loop system for water, segregation of two schemes are

proposed namely:




(i) Wastewater Treatment scheme

(ii) Storm water management scheme.

WASTEWATER TREATMENT SCHEME:

As explained in Section 5.6.2, the total reclaimed water available from proposed STP is 249 KLD out

of which 115 KLD will be used to meet the flushing requirement; 49 KLD for landscaping purpose,

54 KLD for Road Maintenance and 31 KLD for other construction activities.

Sanitation infrastructure for Wastewater Treatment and its reuse will consist of:

- Wastewater collection & conveyance system.

- Wastewater treatment & disposal arrangement.

Wastewater collection and conveyance system shall be an underground sewer network that the total

wastewater generated from the proposed project is expected to be in the order of 277 KLD which will

be treated in STP of capacity 320 KLD to be installed at project site. The location of STP and dual

plumbing plan for conveyance of fresh water and treated wastewater is given in Figure 6.8






Design Details of STP based on Membrane Bioreactor along with provision of UV treatment.

The wastewater generated will be treated in an on-site sewage treatment plant based on Membrane

Bioreactor along with provision of UV treatment. The characteristics of the wastewater and of the

effluent after treatment are likely to be as given in Table 6.6.

Table 6:6 Wastewater Inlet and Outlet Characteristics

Parameter Inlet (Mg/l)

Treated Effluent from Tertiary

Treatment with Unit (Mg/l)

pH 6.5-8.5 6.5 – 7.5

BOD 300 <5

COD 350 <10

Suspended Solids 250 <5

Oil & Grease 10 < 3

The hydraulic design details of STP based on Membrane Bioreactor with UV treatment of wastewater

generated from proposed project is enclosed as Annexure 6.4.

Storm Water Management:

As discussed earlier (refer section 6.7.2), most of the storm water produced on site will be harvested

for ground water recharge, thus proper management of this resource is must to ensure that it is free of

contamination. Contamination of storm water is possible from the following sources:

Diesel and oil spills in the Diesel Power Generator and fuel storage area

Waste spills in the Solid/ hazardous waste storage area

Oil spills and leaks in vehicle parking lots

Silt from soil erosion in gardens

Spillage of sludge from sludge drying area of sewage treatment plan.

A detailed “Storm Water Management Plan” will be developed which will consider the above sources.

The plan will incorporate best management practices which will include following:

Regular inspection and cleaning of storm drains.




Cover waste storage areas.

Avoid application of pesticides and herbicides before wet season.

Secondary containment and dykes in fuel/oil storage facilities.

Conducting routine inspections to ensure cleanliness.

Preparation of spill response plans, particularly for fuel and oil storage areas.

Provision of slit traps in storm water drains.

Good housekeeping in the above areas.

6.8 EMP FOR LAND ENVIRONMENT

CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Waste generated from construction activity includes construction debris, biomass from land clearing

activities, waste from the labour camp, and. hazardous waste. Following section discusses

management of each type of waste. Besides management of topsoil is an important area for which

management measures are required

6.8.1 Construction Debris

Construction debris is bulky and heavy and re-utilization and recycling is an important strategy for

management of such waste. As concrete and masonry constitute the majority of waste generated,

recycling of this waste by conversion to aggregate can offer benefits of reduced landfill space and

reduced extraction of raw material for new construction activity. This is particularly applicable to the

proposed project site as the construction is to be completed in a phased manner.

Recycled aggregate will be used for filler application, and as a sub-base for road construction. Mixed

debris with high gypsum, plaster, shall not be used as fill, as they are highly susceptible to

contamination, and will be given to recyclers.

Construction contractors shall remove metal scrap from structural steel, piping, concrete

reinforcement and sheet metal work from the site. A significant portion of wood scrap can be reused

on site. Recyclable wastes such as plastics, glass fiber insulation, roofing etc shall be sold to recyclers.

6.8.2 Waste from Labour Colonies & Biomass

Waste generated from labour camps will mainly comprise of household domestic waste, which shall

be collected and composted on site along with the biomass from the land clearing activities. The non-

compostable and non-recyclable portion of the waste shall be collected and transported to the nearest

solid waste dumping site.




6.8.3 Topsoil Management

To minimise disruption of soil and for conservation of topsoil, the contractor shall take the topsoil out

separately and stockpile it. After the construction activity is over, topsoil shall be utilised for

landscaping activity. Other measures, which would be followed to prevent soil erosion and

contamination include:

- Maximize use of organic fertilizer for landscaping and green belt development.

- To prevent soil contamination by oil/grease, leak proof containers should be used for storage and

transportation of oil/grease and wash off from the oil/grease handling area shall be drained

through impervious drains and treated appropriately before disposal.

- Removal of as little vegetation as possible during the development, and re-vegetation of bare

areas after the project.

- Working in a small area at a point of time (phase wise construction).

- Construction of erosion prevention troughs / berms.

OPERATIONAL PHASE

6.8.4 Solid Waste Management

The philosophy of solid waste management at the proposed project will be to encourage the four R’s

of waste i.e. waste reduction, reuse, recycling, and recovery (materials & energy). This will result in

lesser reliance on land filling. Regular public awareness meetings will be conducted to involve the

residents in the proper segregation, storage, recycling and composting options and techniques.

The Environmental Management Plan for the solid waste will focus on two major components during

the life cycle of the waste management system i.e. collection & transportation, treatment or disposal

Collection and Transportation

During the collection stage, the bio-degradable and non recyclable/non biodegradable waste will be

stored and collected separately. The segregation, transportation and disposal of wastes will be done by

the project management or may be outsourced to authorized private waste management agency.

To minimize littering and odours, waste will be stored in well-designed containers/bins that will be

located at strategic locations to minimize disturbance in traffic flow.

Care should be taken so that the collection vehicles are well maintained and minimize noise and

emissions. During transporting of the waste, it will be covered to avoid littering.

Treatment & Disposal




The waste collected shall be segregated at site into bio-degradable and non-biodegradable. The non-

biodegradable waste shall be disposed off to the recyclers / and inert shall be disposed off at HUDA

waste disposal site. The biodegradable shall be treated on-site. The hazardous waste (used oil from

DG Sets) will be stored in HDPE drums in isolated covered facility and disposed off through

registered recycles only as per the Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handliing and Trans Boundary

Movement) Rules, 2008

The waste management flow diagram is presented in Figure 6.9.




Figure 6.7 Waste Management Flow Diagram

6.9 EMP FOR E-WASTE MANAGEMENT

The e-waste will be generated from the proposed development which will be stored at a warehouse to

be setup within site and will be sent to authorized recyclers or e-waste processing plants for treatment

as per E- Waste [Management & Handling] Rules, 2010

Household Waste (Segregation and Storage at Source)

1018.4 kg/day (81.47 %)

Primary Collection (from Source to Community Storage)

Road / Hardscape Sweeping 180.66 kg / day (14.45 %)

Segregation Facility

Community Bins for Segregated Waste

DISPOSAL (HUDA Facility)

Organic Inert Recyclable

Sold to Recyclers Compost Plant

Compost Reject

Used as Manure for Horticulture

TOTAL WASTE GENERATED (~1.25 TPD )

Process

Primar y Level C ollec tion / Stor age

Secondar y Level Collecti on / Storag e

Transportation

Segreg ation

Process and Disposal

Process

Disposal

Transportation to Segregation Facility

Horticulture Waste

29.13 kg / day (2.33 %)

Sludge from STP

20 kg / day (1.6 %)

Secure Room (Liquid Hazardous Waste Such as Spent Oil, etc. in

HDPE Drums)

Sold to Authorized Recyclers of HSPCB

Hazardous waste

E Waste




6.10 EMP FOR ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

The proposed site exhibits typical semi-arid landscape. The soil is very sandy, loose and virtually

devoid of humus leading to the poor representation of vegetative cover. It supports thorn scrub of the

dry deciduous type: a sparse cover of drought resistant trees such as Ficus religiosa (pipall),

Azadirachta indica Neem), Albizzia lebbek (Sirin) species interspersed with thorny shrubs, herbs and

wild grasses. The existing land use pattern of the proposed site is not very productive. Hence,

appropriate measures shall be taken during greenbelt development at the site. Increased vegetation in

the form of greenbelt will not only enhance the aesthetics of the site but will also mitigate air

pollution and reduce noise pollution.


Restrictions on location of labor camps and offices for project staff near the project area to

avoid human induced secondary additional impacts on the left over flora and fauna species of

the surrounding areas.

Cutting, uprooting, of trees or small trees present around the project site for cooking, burning

or heating purposes by the laborers shall be prohibited and suitable alternatives for this

purpose shall be made available.

Along with the major construction work, the multi layered peripheral green belt shall be

developed with native plant species.

6.10.2 Operational Phase

The newly planted site will be especially vulnerable to erosion until the plants have become fully

grown. Temporary stabilization barriers shall be used as required to prevent erosion during plant

growth. These barriers may include hay bales, erosion control blankets, temporary seeding, nurse

crops, and erosion control netting.

During the development of the green belt within the project area, it will be emphasized that the plant

species likely to be planted belong to the existing forest type besides the nitrogen fixing tree species,

species of ornamental values, and species of very fast growth with good canopy cover.

6.10.3 Green Belt Plan

a. General Principles in Greenbelt Design

Plants grown in such a way so as to function as pollutant sinks are collectively referred as greenbelts.

These plants should also provide an aesthetic backdrop for persons using the site and for the

surroundings and the community.

General principles in greenbelt design considered for this study are:




Type of pollution (air, noise, water and land pollution) likely from the activities at the site.

Agro-climatic zone and sub-zone where the greenbelt is located (and hence the plant species

which can be planted in the area.

Water quantity and quality available in the area

Soil quality in the area.

The plants should exhibit the following desirable characteristic in order to be selected for plantation.

The species should be fast growing and providing optimum penetrability.

The species should be wind-firm and deep rooted.

The species should form a dense canopy.

As far as possible, the species should be indigenous and locally available

Species tolerance to air pollutants like particulate matter, SO2 & NOx should be preferred.

The species should be permeable to help create air turbulence and mixing within the belt.

There should be no large gaps for the air to spill through.

Trees with high foliage density, leaves with larger leaf area and hairy on both the surfaces.

Ability to withstand conditions like inundation and drought.

Soil improving plants (Nitrogen fixing, rapidly decomposable leaf litter).

Attractive appearance with good flowering and fruit bearing.

Bird and insect attracting tree species.

Sustainable green cover with minimal maintenance.

Greenbelt is designed to minimize the predicted levels of the possible air and noise pollutants. While

designing the scheme the following facilities are considered:

Site Perimeter and approach road

Along the internal roads

In and around the residential area.

6.10.4 Greenbelt Design for Site

The selection of the trees is based on their phenology (thus roadside trees will not have leaf fall during

summer and rainy seasons when shade is most needed. Trees with more litter fall have been avoided).

The selection criteria of the species are based on pollution mitigation capacity (including particulate

matter), large leaf surface area, deep root system and less litter fall. Faster growing trees with lighter




canopy will be planted alternatively with relatively slow growing trees with wider canopy. Trees will

be planted as per CPCB guidelines.

Landscape Plan: The project will have approximately 9710 sq m (~13% of the site area) under

exclusive green area/landscaping in which 5964 sq m (8 % of the site area) is designated for site

peripheral and avenue plantation. Apart from other open area, the site area will also have saucer shape

water body of an area 1005 sq m (5% of net zoned area). The Landscape plan showing the details of

green area for proposed project is enclosed as Figure 6.10.

The plant species proposed for green belt development is specified in Table No. 6.7






Table 6:7: Proposed List of Plant Species

Botanical Name Nos.

Plumeria Alba 12

Azadirachta Indica 46

Ficus Benjamina 76

Cassia Fistula 68

Delonix Regia 42

Bauhinia Blakeana 48

Tabebuia Aurea

28

Tabebuia Rosea

Anthocephalus Cadamba 4

TOTAL 324

6.11 EMP FOR SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

The management plan has been designed in order to regularly gauge the social environment in which the

project shall operate, take proactive steps and adopt best practices, which are sensitive to the socio-

cultural setting of the region. Such an approach will not only result in the better management of the

project but also increase its goodwill among the locals. The management plan envisages ongoing

communication with the stakeholders including the public, surrounding areas, pollution control board or

the Ministry of Environment & Forests, etc. Management practices discussed here are pro-active steps to

address potential concerns during the various stages of the project.

A committee shall be formed in order to formalize the community relations of the project proponents.

The committee will address the issues of people as well as ensure that the mitigative measures

mentioned within the Environment Management Plan (EMP) are abided with.

6.11.1 Mitigative Measures

Transport and road safety: Since the project involves the movement of vehicles and machineries in

the area, the health and safety of pedestrians and residents accessing the communities is an issue of

concern. Considering this, the project proponents shall mitigate the impact by drawing traffic

management plans, so that any mishap due to traffic thenceforth can be avoided. Taking this into

concern, following aspects should be kept in mind:

Proper precautionary signage shall be installed.




Training to the drivers.

Installation of adequate speed breakers at correct locations.

6.11.2 Social Activities Proposed to be undertaken

The following social activities are proposed to be undertaken:

1. Empowerment of Communities, inclusive of Socio-Economic growth

a. Skill development/vocational training (For Men & Women)

2. Community Healthcare

a. General Health camps

b. Specialised Health camps

c. Specialised Medical treatment (Indoor treatment)

d. Health Awareness camps (HIV/AIDS, General Health etc.)

3. Other activities

a. Promotion of Art & Culture

b. Promotion of local Sports & Games

c. Awareness Programs (In-house & External).

The expenditure on the above mentioned CSR activities will be carried out in accordance to the

Companies Act, 2013.

6.12 EMP FOR ENERGY CONSERVATION

Energy conservation program will be implemented through measures taken both on energy demand

and supply.

Supply

Energy

Conservation Demand

Reduce consumption

Use energy-efficient

appliances

Create Guest Awareness

Utilize energy-efficient diesel

generators

Exploring the possibilities of

introducing renewable energy

Energy conservation will be one of the focuses during the project planning and operation stages. The

conservation efforts would consist of the following:




6.12.1 Solar Passive Techniques

The proposed site plan is designed to capture the positive seasonal climatic forces to mitigate

building’s resource consumption and environmental impacts. The vision for the proposed

development is to minimise its reliance on grid electricity and fossil fuels.

PASSIVE: The project is planned as row of low rise buildings each defining a green space that not

only enhances the visual environment but also contributes to biodiversity and air quality. Strategies

include insulated envelope, solar control glass, air tight construction and design for daylight. The

design ensures that every unit has the potential for passive cross-ventilation. Open spaces at front and

back allow for this and encourage air-flow. Architectural strategies have also been taken to reduce

heat gain by managing window sizes and at the same time, placing the most glazing under balconies

avoiding direct sun exposure to enter living spaces.

The majority of exterior envelope surface will be in a light, reflective color, which ensures that heat

energy is not absorbed by wall surfaces thus reducing cooling costs. Moreover, insulation is added to

the roof composition in order to reduce heat gain. The use of local material is also another initiative to

reduce energy consumption in construction.

The vast majority of the project's parking requirements have been located at stilts and designated off

street parking spaces coupled with the design of the grade level landscaping which includes a large

number of trees, in so reducing the "heat island" effect and migrating overheating of the site. It is

intended to create a landscaped street-scape that is focused on being pedestrian friendly and has

shared surfaces to slow down the traffic, while not compromising on smooth circulation and

aesthetics. Large planting zones along the street and a large central park is planned to be used for

sustainable storm water recharge utilizations.

ACTIVE:. High efficiency lighting with daylight controls to further reduce building’s electric use.

The use of energy-efficient lighting and electronic equipment shall release less energy thus

contributing to less internal heat loads inside the space.

RENEWABLE: Roof top solar thermal system sized to meet part of the service hot water load.

Photovoltaic panels to power external lighting for the site.

Above mentioned provisions have stemmed from fundamental ideas studied in the early concept

stages of the project ensuring the development to be sustainable and responsible to the surrounding

environment.




6.12.2 Adoption of Lighting Control

The lighting installation will be developed to suit the needs and particular functions of each area

within the residential towers and clubhouse Areas and comply with the recommendations of CIBSE

Lighting Codes.

The lighting will be developed in conjunction with the interior design. Luminaries and lamp sources

will be selected to match the local desired ambiance, where possible the lighting sources will be

selected to be low energy dimmable type, to work in conjunction with the lighting control system.

In the circulation areas including staircases and corridors, high efficacy fluorescent lighting with high

frequency electronic

Lighting Controls

A fully programmable lighting control system will be provided for control of lighting. This will

comprise distributed, networked panels. The panels will be interfaced to local switch plates in public

areas. The system will be programmable centrally and locally. The club house areas will be provided

with dimmable lighting control with daylight and occupancy sensors in the common areas.

Automatic Controls

The MEP systems described above for the proposed project will be controlled and monitored by a

dedicated Building Management System (BMS).

The BMS will be based on a series of standalone Strategic Command Centers (SCC) linked via a

LAN network and accessed via a Web Browser to a BMS Head End Command Centre(s). Should the

Landlord prefer this as a solution for the long term management of the Ireo development there will be

a facility allowed for remote monitoring,

The BMS will monitor the operation of each piece of equipment, including raising an alarm should

any one piece of equipment fail and providing a maintenance schedule for each piece of equipment

based on hours run. Specific equipment will be individually monitored for energy consumption, as

will specific distribution points in the different MEP systems, such as each retail unit's power

consumption.

The BMS will control the different MEP systems, such as the operation of the cooling plant. This will

include rotating which of the individual pieces of plant is operant to ensure even wear of equipment,

for example the rotation of the duty standby stair pressurization fans.

Generally the MEP equipment will all derive their power via the SCCs, however larger items of plant,

such as the cooling towers, will derive their electrical power direct from the electrical distribution

switchboards as noted within the electrical services section of this Report.




6.12.3 Light Power Density (LPD)

Light Power Density (LPD) as per ECBC has been considered in the project so as to reduce Energy

Consumption. The LPD considered for residential towers and clubhouse is given in Table 6.8.

Table 6:8 LPD Levels for the Design of Residential Block

Space LPD (W/m2) Space LPD (W/m2)

Bedroom 15 Master Bedroom 15

Living Room 15 Kitchen 15

Dining Room 15 Study Room 15

Home Theatre 15 Pooja Room 10

Gym 15 Household Help 15

Toilet 15 Common Area 15

Lobbies 20 Communication Corridors 15

Communication Staircases 15 Terrace 10

6.12.4 Use of renewable energy system

- Use of Solar Photovoltaic (SPV) system for direct conversion of sunlight into electricity

for landscape and street lighting.

- Use of solar heating system as per norms of HAREDA

6.12.5 Use of Energy Efficient Building Material

Use of Fly Ash in Road Construction

Fly ash is a lightweight material, as compared to commonly used fill material (local soils), therefore,

causes lesser settlements. It is especially attractive for road construction over a wide range of moisture

content, and therefore, results in less variation in density with changes in moisture content. Fly ash is

easy to handle and compact because the material is light and there are no large lumps.

Use of fly ash in road works results in reduction in construction cost by about 10 to 20 per cent. The

use of fly ash in pavement construction results in significant savings due to savings in cost of road

aggregates. Utilisation of fly ash will not only minimize the disposal problem but will also help in

utilizing precious land in a better way. Construction of road embankments using fly ash, involves

encapsulation of fly ash in earthen core or with RCC facing panels. Since there is no seepage of rain




water into the fly ash core, leaching of heavy metals is also prevented. When fly ash is used in

concrete, it chemically reacts with cement and reduces any leaching effect. Even when it is used in

stabilisation work, a similar chemical reaction takes place which binds fly ash particles. Hence

chances of pollution due to use of fly ash in road works are negligible.

Use of Fly Ash Bricks in wall construction

Fly-Ash Bricks are an environment friendly cost saving building product. These bricks are three times

stronger than conventional bricks with consistent strength. These bricks are ideally suited for internal,

external, load bearing and non-load bearing walls. These Bricks with higher strength/weight ratio

(about 3 to 4 times that of burnt clay bricks) aid in designing stronger, yet more economic structures.

Fly Ash Bricks are durable, have Low water absorption, less consumption of mortar, Economical &

eco-friendly, Low energy consumption and No emission of green house gases. These bricks are not

affected by environmental conditions and remain static thus ensuring longer life of the building. Also,

the savings with regard to wastages in fly ash bricks are considerable during unloading and

construction due to true shape and size, consistency in quality, and the workability of the fly ash

bricks unlike traditional clay bricks. These bricks are very economical / cost effective, nil wastage

while transporting and handling.

Features

Some of the attributes of fly ash bricks are as follows:

Eco friendly

Low water absorption

Dimensional accuracy

High compressive strength

Environment friendly- uses by product of thermal power stations.

Advantages:

1. High Strength

Production process of flyash bricks does not involve sintering where as normal burnt clay bricks

onvolve sintering. So there is no burning of fossil fuel required in the manufacturing of Fly ash bricks.

So CO2 emission problem is not there in the manufacturing of Fly ash bricks and contributes to the

reduction of greenhouse gas emissions.

2. Less Water & Energy

http://www.flyashbricksindia.com/index1.html




Use less energy & water – Much energy is onsumed in firing clay bricks in kilns. By using fly ash

bricks instead of clay bricks, much energy is saved in brick manufacturing.

3. Eco-Friendly

Reduce air pollution- Fossil fuel is used in heating clay bricks in kilns. Burning such fuel generates air

pollution and greenhouse gas (CO2), contributing to global warming. Fly ash bricks are manufactured

at room temperature and there is no fossil fuel burning and emission of green house gas (CO2).

4. Accuracy

Due to high strength, there is practically no breakage during transport & use.

Due to uniform size of bricks mortar required for joints and plaster reduces almost by 50%.

Due to lower water penetration, seepage of water through bricks is considerably reduced.

Gypsum plaster (plaster of paris) can be directly applied on these bricks without a backing coat of

lime plaster.

These bricks do not require soaking in water for 24 hours. Sprinkling of water before use is enough.

5. Saves agricultural land which is used for manufacturing clay bricks.

6. Can be manufactured at construction site also.

Use of China Mosaic/ High SRI (Solar Refractive Indiax) Paints in Roof Top

Roofs with high SRI Paints/ china mosaic are capable of delivering high solar reflectance (the ability

to reflect the visible, infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths of the sun, reducing heat transfer to the

building) and high thermal emittance (the ability to radiate absorbed or non-reflected solar energy).

The benefits associated with roofs with High SRI material (Cool roofs) include reduced cooling

energy load, reduced air pollution and greenhouse gas emission, and improved human health and

comfort. They may extend the roof service life and help mitigating the urban heat island effect. It also

achieves cooling energy savings in hot summers.

Use of Materials with Recycled Content

The project will utilize the building materials with recycled content such that the total recycled

content constitutes at least 10% of total civil materials cost (excluding labor & equipment). While the

focus remains on selecting as many materials as possible with high recycled content, it also reduces

the impact produced from the extraction and processing of virgin materials. Table 6.9 shows the list

of the materials with recycled content that are likely to be used during the construction.




Table 6:9 Used of Material with Recycled Contents

S. No. Name of Material

1 Concrete

a Reinforcement steel

b Cement

c Fly-Ash

2 Masonry

a Hollow Blocks

3 Metals

a MS/SS Works

b Aluminium Work

4 Glass and Glazing

a Glass

5 Finishes

a Ceramic & Vitrified Tiles

6.12.6 Thermal Properties of Building Components

The thermal factor adopted for building design for both Residential Tower and Club house are given

in Table 6.10 & Table 6.11.

Table 6:10 Thermal Factors for Building component

Component U- Factor (W/m2.K)

Exterior Wall Construction 0.44

Roof Construction 0.261

Fenestration U-Value 3.3

Fenestration SHGC 0.25

6.12.7 Thermal Properties of Enhance Building Material

To achieve the minimum heat load (thermal stresses) in the building occupancy, Table 6.11 shows the

specify the building design features and list of enhanced building materials proposed to be adopted in

the project with reference to thermal conductivity (k- value), density (d-value), specific heat(), surface




resistance®, and solar heat gain factor(SHGF), projection factor (PF), M—factor (orientation factor),

minimum visible transmission of glazing for vertical projection (VT) as per MOEF GI guidelines

Table 6:11 Thermal Properties of Enhance Building Material

S.N

o.

Description

Densi

ty

Conductiv

ityb

Conducta

nce

Resistance (R) Specific

Heat 1/k, For

kg/m

3

(K),W/(m

K)

(C)2,K

m2/W

Km2

/w

Thickn

ess

Listed

(1/C)

Km2

/W

kJ/(kg K)

1 BUILDING BOARD

1a Gypsum or plaster board. 800 — 17.6 — 0.056 1.09

1b Hardboard 880 0.82 — 8.46 — 1.34

2 FINISH FLOORING MATERIALS

2a

Tile-asphalt, linoleum,

vinyl,rubber — — 113.6 — 0.009 1.26

2b ceramic — — — — — 0.8

3 INSULATING MATERIAL

3a Expanded polystyrene 29-56 0.029 — 34.7 — 1.21

3b

Reflective material — — 1.76 — 0.57 —

4 SIDING MATERIALS

4a Wood — — 6.53 — 0.15 1.3

5 PLASTERING MATERIALS

5a

Cement plaster, sand

aggregate 1860 0.72 — 1.39 — 0.84

5b

Gypsum plaster:Lightweight

aggregate 720 — 17.7 — 0.056 —




6 MASONRY MATERIALS

6a Concrete blocks — — 5.1-5.8 —

0.20-

0.17 0.92

6b

Concretes- Sand and gravel

or stone aggregate

concretes 2400 1.4-2.9 —

0.69-

0.35 — —

6c

Lightweight aggregate

concretes 1920 0.9-1.3 —

1.08-

0.76 — —

6.13 ENERGY BALANCE

The Energy (Power) balance plan takes in account of various aspects like total energy required,

sources of energy inputs and outputs. Energy calculations are done for the different building i.e.

residential towers and EWS along with club house, School and retail to calculate the total power

consumption of the project. During construction phase, power will be met through DG sets and during

the operation phase will be sourced from Dakshin Haryana Bijlee Vitran Nigam Limited (DHBVNL),

with back-up power supply during operation phase of the proposed development.

The calculations are done with Whole Building Compliance Method. The energy consumption is

calculated by taking into account various Energy Conservation Measures and enhanced specification

of the materials. To calculate the energy savings in the project, buildings (Independent Floors) are

compared with a Base case building model which is based on stringent ECBC specifications.

The design criteria for the proposed residential towers are set to meet and exceed the minimum

requirements of the code. The following energy conservation measures have been incorporated in the

design of the proposed residential towers:

Energy Conservation Measures

Building Parameter Description

External Fenestration High performance insulating glass compared to base case glass

resulting is reduced heat gain and loss in the perimeter spaces.

External Shading

Staggering floor plates and balconies on the west facade are

designed to shade the floors below during summers. Louvers and

screens are provided on the western facade to block out afternoon

sun. Opaque insulated panels provide the required opacity on the




Energy Conservation Measures

Building Parameter Description

east and south facade to further reduce the solar gains.

Natural ventilation

Operable windows to allow for free cooling during shoulder

months and night time.

PV powered lighting

Photovoltaic panels will be provided for external lamps to provide

common external lighting load.

6.13.1 Shadow Analysis

A shadow study provides an understanding of how the building mass in relation to the position of sun

will determine the amount of light that a space will receive. This analysis will inform the landscape

programme as well as the planting character of the space. The different relationships between the

towers and the adjacent outdoor spaces help create a range of spaces in full or partial shade.

Therefore, the shadow analysis has been carried out for the proposed group hosuing and the same is

shown below:

Sun Path Analysis: 21st March – 08 am.




Sun Path Analysis: 21st March – 12 noon.

Sun Path Analysis: 21st March – 5 pm.




Sun Path Analysis: 21st June – 08 am.

Sun Path Analysis: 21st June – 12 noon.




Sun Path Analysis: 21st June – 5 pm.




Sun Path Analysis: 23rd

September – 08 am.


September – 12 noon.


September – 5 pm.





December – 08 am.


December – 12 noon.





December – 5 pm.

6.13.2 Ventilation

Ventilation Plan of a building takes into account various aspects of a building which includes various

ventilation techniques and building design features. As the project comprise of Residential and

Clubhouse which has Mechanical Ventilation defined as zones. The Ventilation Plan for basement

and ventilation calculations is attached in Annexure 6.5.

6.13.3 Energy Consumption

42.45 Watt per sqm of built-up area. Energy saving devices/policies will be pursued during

construction and operation phases to achieve energy savings. Alternate sources of energy i.e. solar and

recycling of waste will be promoted to enhance savings of conventional energy.

The electrical line diagarns showing the energy distribution in the project is shown in the Figure 6.11

6.13.4 Energy Saving in the Project

Total of about 460 kW-h energy saving is being estimated using non-conventional sources of energy

(solar heating). The energy saving calculation for Solar Water Heating for proposed project is





Apart from this 27.05 % energy saving has been achieved using energy efficient appliances. The

energy saving calculation through energy efficient appliances in proposed Independent Floors project







6.14 STRUCTURAL SAFETY MEASURES

The project falls in the category of zone-4, specify the standards and codes used in building

construction to minimize the risk of natural calamities like wind, load, seismic load (earthquake),

thunder storm/lightning etc. as per NBC 2005

Table 6:12 List of Codes Adopted for Structural Safety

S.No Strtured Design Codes Adopted

1 National Building Code SP 7:2005

2 Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete – to IS 456 Sp16:1980

3 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete IS 456:2000

4 Code of practice for general construction in steel IS 800:2007

5

Code of practice for design loads (other than

earthquake) for buildings and structures – Dead

Loads

IS 875:Part 1:1987

6

Code of practice for design loads (other than

earthquake) for buildings and structures – Wind

Loads

IS 875:Part 3:1987

7 Criteria for Earthquake Resistance Design of

Structures – General Provisions and Buidings IS1893:2002

6.15 ELECTRICAL HAZARDOUS AND SAFETY MEASURE PLAN

Following Guidelines have been followed for implementation of Electrical Hazard / Safety

precautions at the construction Site and thereafter at the Premises during operations.

Definition Electrical Hazard – A dangerous condition such that contact or equipment failure can

result in Electric shock, arc-flash burn, thermal burn, or blast. Electrical hazard includes ‘dangerous’

meaning ‘able or likely to inflict injury’; there are high voltage, low current sources that are not

intrinsically dangerous, and there are low-voltage, high-current sources that are not ‘safe’. A

‘harmless’ static electricity shock could cause sufficient startle reaction to make a worker fall off a

ladder. A hazard analysis is necessary to identify electrical hazards and determine the degree of risk.

Measures for preventing Electrical Hazards




1. Safe Electrical Installation

Installation of new electrical systems to a suitable IS standard. Requirements for electrical

installations, and then maintain them in a safe condition;

Provision of enough socket-outlets - overloading socket-outlets by using adaptors which can cause

fire.

2. Provision of safe and suitable equipment

There will be proper selection of equipment that will suit our working environment;

Electrical risks will be eliminated by using air, hydraulic or hand powered tools. These will be

especially used only in harsh conditions;

There will be provision of an accessible and clearly identified switch near each fixed machine

to cut off power in an emergency;

For portable equipment, there will be use of socket-outlets which are close by so that

equipment will be easily disconnected in an emergency;

The ends of flexible cables will always have the outer sheath of the cable firmly clamped to

stop the wires (particularly the earth) pulling out of the terminals;

Damaged sections of cable will be replaced completely;

There will be use of proper connectors or cable couplers to join lengths of cable;

There will be proper protection of light bulbs and other equipment which could easily be

damaged in use. And also creates risk of electric shock if they are broken;

Electrical equipment used in flammable/explosive atmospheres will be designed to stop it

from causing ignition.

i) Reduction of Voltage

One of the best ways of reducing the risk of injury when using electrical equipment is to limit the

supply voltage to the lowest needed to get the job done, such as: Temporary lighting can be run at

lower voltages, e.g. 12, 25, 50 or 110 volts; Where electrically powered tools are used, battery

operated will be safest; Portable tools are readily available which are designed to be run from a 110

volts centre-tapped-to-earth supply.

ii) Provision of safety device

If equipment will be operated at 230 volts or on higher, then the provision of an RCD (residual current

device) will be provided as an additional safety. An RCD is a device which detects some, but not all,

faults in the electrical system and rapidly switches off the supply. RCD will be built into the main

switchboard or the socket-outlet, as this means that the supply cables will be permanently protected.




Additionally a plug incorporating an RCD, or a plug-in RCD adaptor, will also be provided for an

additional safety. RCDs for protecting people have a rated tripping current (sensitivity) of not more

than 30 milliamps (MA).

An RCD is a valuable safety device, never bypass it;

If the RCD trips, it is a sign there is a fault;

The RCD will have a test button to check that its mechanism is free and functioning.

iii) Work safely

We will make sure that people who are working with electricity are competent to do the

job. Even simple tasks such as wiring a plug can lead to danger – we will ensure that

people know what they are doing before they start.

We must not allow work on or near exposed live parts of equipment unless it is absolutely

unavoidable and suitable precautions will be taken to prevent injury, both to the workers

and to anyone else who may be in the area.

iv) Underground Power Cables

Always assume cables will be present when digging in the street, pavement or near

buildings. The usage will be up-to-date service plans, cable avoidance tools and safe

digging practice to avoid danger.

v) Overhead Power Lines

When working near overhead lines, it may be possible to have them switched off. So, we

will keep the safe working distance from the cables.

6.15.1.1 Basic Precautions

There are various ways of protecting people from the hazards caused by electricity, including

insulation, guarding, grounding and electrical protective devices. We will significantly reduce

electrical hazards by following some basic precautions.

i) Insulation

All electrical cords will have sufficient insulation to prevent direct contact with wires. All

cords will be checked before each use, since corrosive chemicals or solvent vapors may

erode the insulation. Damaged cords will be repaired or taken out of service immediately,

especially in wet environments such as cold rooms

ii) Guarding

Live parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more




will be guarded against accidental contact. Plexiglas shields may be used to protect

against exposed live parts.

iii) Grounding

Only equipment with three-prong plugs will be used. The third prong provides a path to

ground that helps prevent the buildup of voltages that may result in an electrical shock or

spark.

iv) Circuit Protection Devices

Circuit protection devices will be designed to automatically limit

or shut off the flow of electricity in the event of a ground-fault,

overload, or short circuit in the wiring system. Fuses, circuit

breakers, and ground-fault circuit interrupters are three well-

known examples of such devices.

Fuses and circuit breakers prevent over-heating of wires and

components that might otherwise create hazards for operators.

They disconnect the circuit when it becomes overloaded. The

ground-fault circuit interrupter or GFCI, will be used to shutoff electric power if a ground

fault is detected. The GFCI will be particularly used near sinks and wet locations. Since

GFCIs will cause equipment to shutdown unexpectedly, they may not be appropriate for

certain apparatus. Portable GFCI adapters (available in most safety supply catalogs) may

be used with a non-GFCI outlet.

v) Safe Work Practices

The following practices will be used to reduce the risk of injury or fire when working with electrical

equipment:

Avoid contact with energized electrical circuits.

Disconnect the power source before servicing or repairing electrical equipment.

When it is necessary to handle equipment that is plugged in, be sure hands are dry and,

when possible, wear nonconductive gloves and shoes with insulated soles.

If it is not unsafe to do so, work with only one hand, keeping the other hand at your side

or in your pocket, away from all conductive material. This precaution reduces the

likelihood of accidents that result in current passing through the chest cavity.

If water or a chemical is spilled onto equipment, shut off power at the main switch or

circuit breaker and unplug the equipment.




If an individual comes in contact with a live electrical conductor, do not touch the

equipment, cord or person. Disconnect the power source from the circuit breaker or pull

out the plug using a leather belt.

vi) High Voltage or Current

Repairs of high voltage or high current equipment will be performed by trained electricians.

Individuals who are experienced in such tasks and would like to perform such work on their own

equipment must first receive specialized electrical safety related work practices training by EHS staff.

The following additional precautions will be taken:

Always assume a high voltage potential exists within a device while servicing it, even if it is

de-energized and disconnected from its power source.

Avoid becoming grounded by staying at least 6 inches away from walls, water, and all metal

materials, including pipes.

Use of voltmeters and test equipment with ratings and leads sufficient to measure the highest

potential voltage expected to be found inside the equipment being serviced.

After servicing, check equipment with a multi-meter or appropriate device to ensure it is

grounded before reconnecting to the power source.

Earthing Pits layout Plan and Lighting Arrestors Layout Plan are given in Figure 6.12and Figure

6.13 respectively. The list of electrical codes and standards considered are enclosed as Annexure 6.8





Figure 6.8 Location of Lightning Arrestors in Proposed Project (TYPICAL UNIT)

Environment Impact Assessment Report Proposed Independent Floor Development (18.138 Acres), Sector-61, Village

Ullawas, Gurgaon


6.16 EMP FOR GREEN HOUSE EFFECTS, RADIATION EFFECTS, OZONE DEPLETION

EFFECTS AND ACID RAIN EFFECTS

Particular Source Impact of Project Mitigation Measures

Green House Effect -Emission of green

house gases like Cox,

Nox due to combustion

of fuel during

vehicular traffic.

-Running of DG sets

also cause emission of

green house gas like

Nox etc

-Add pollutant load in

the baseline

environment of the

project area

-Impact on the health

of construction workers

during the construction

phase

-Impact on flora and

fauna of the area

-Greenbelt

development to

mitigate air pollution

-Ensuring proper stack

height of DG sets to

disperse the pollutant

properly which in turn

reduce the ground

level conc. near the

project site.

-Water sprinkling will

be adopted

-Use of scrubbers

which trap pollutants

before they are

released into the

atmosphere

– use of catalytic

converters in cars to

reduce the emissions

of pollutant

Radiation Effect Depletion of ozone

layer due to ozone

depletion substance

cause entry of UV rays

on earth, which further

cause skin cancer and

other harmful effect on

human health.

-Impact on

construction workers

health during the

construction phase

-Impact on flora and

fauna of the area

The construction

workers shall be

provided with

adequate safety

equipments during the

cutting, welding and

other activities of

construction phase and

the same has been


Ullawas, Gurgaon



Source-Construction

work, metal cutting,

welding operation etc

are the different source

of ozone gas and

nitrous gas emission

discussed below :-

Welding shall be done

only in designated

areas

Protective clothes shall

be provided during

welding activities

Flame proof gauntlet

gloves,

leather apron and high

top shoes shall be

provided to the

construction labours

Specifically designed,

leak proof helmet

equipped with filter

plates shall be

provided to protect

against ultraviolet,

infrared and visible

radiation.

Ozone Depletion

Effect

-Emission of CFCs

from air conditioners

and refrigerators

-The destruction of the

ozone layer means the

loss of the natural

barrier against the sun's

harmful ultraviolet

rays, particularly UV-

B, which can harm the

eyes (cataracts) and

contribute to skin

cancer (melanoma) and

suppress the efficiency


Ullawas, Gurgaon



of the body's immune

system.

-UV-B also produces

changes in the

chemical makeup of

plant species.

Acid Rain Effect -Acid rain is caused by

emissions of sulphur

dioxide and nitrogen

oxides from running of

DG sets and Vehicular

emission, which react

with the water

molecules in the

atmosphere to and

produce acids.

-It can have harmful

effects on plants, and

proposed

infrastructure.

-Use of scrubbers

which trap pollutants

before they are

released into the

atmosphere

– use catalytic

converters in cars to

reduce their emissions

6.17 EMP FOR FIRE FIGHTING

The fire protection system will be generally designed based on Part IV, Group I of National Building

Code (NBC) of India (2001), Tariff Advisory Committee’s TAC, fire protection manual (1998) and

the latest Indian and International standards/codes. The fire protection system will cover external as

well as internal premises of the building

Following systems are planned to be provided within the entire Independent Floors:

Wet riser cum down comer system

Portable Fire Extinguisher

The proposed fire tender plan is shown in Figure 6.14.

The fire escape route plans for proposed project are shown in Figure 6.15.

2 nos. of fire fighting water tanks having capacity of 150 m3 each is provided for fire fighting

purpose.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sulfur_dioxide

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sulfur_dioxide

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitrogen_oxide

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitrogen_oxide

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water



Figure 6.9 Fire Tender Plan for Proposed Independent Floors Project




Ullawas, Gurgaon


6.18 HEALTH AND WELFARE PLAN

The health, safety and welfare plan for the building workers has been prepared as per the clauses of

the Haryana Building and Other construction Workers (Regulation of Employment (RE) &

Condition of Service (CS)) Act, 1996 and Rules 2005 and such other Rules, Regulations and Laws

as may be applicable.

The detailed provisions regarding Health, Safety and Welfare are as follows:-

6.18.1 Fixation of Hours of Work and Interval of Rest & Spread Over

a. No building worker employed shall be required or allowed to work more than nine hours a

day or forty eight hours a week

b. No building worker hall be required or allowed to work continuously for more than five hours

unless he had an interval of rest of not less than half an hour

c. The working day of the building workers employed in the construction shall be so arranged

that inclusive of the interval of rest shall not be spread over than 12 hours on any day

d. When a building worker work for more than 9 hours on any day or for more than 48 hours in

any week, he shall, in respect of over time work, be entitiles to wages at double the ordinary

rate of wages.

6.18.2 Weekly rest, payment of work dones on the day of rest at overtime rate, etc.

a. Workers employed in construction work shall be allowed a day rest in every seven days for all

building workers

b. No worker shall allowed to work on rest day unless he already had or will have substituted

rest day for whole day on one of the five days immediately before or after such rest day

6.18.3 Notice of Wage Period

a. Provision of display board to the conspicuous place at the work site showing the rates of

wages, hour of working, wage period, date of payment of wages, name and address of

grievance redressal officer.

b. The display board shall be in english and local language understood by majority of workers

c. Muster roll, wages register, deduction register and overtime register shall be maintained as

per the provision of Clause 88, Part III, Chapter VI, B. The Haryana Building and Other

construction Workers (RE & CS) Rules 2005

6.18.4 Accommodation

a. The contractor shall provide, free of charge temporary living accommodation to all workers

employed by him till the construction work is in progress.


Ullawas, Gurgaon


b. The temporary accommodation shall have separate cooking place, bathing, washing and

lavatory facilities.

c. Incase, more than fifty female building workers are ordinarily employed, there shall provide

and maintain suitable room for the use of children under the age of six of such female.

d. All room shall have adequate light & ventilation and will be maintained

6.18.5 Latrine and Urinal

a. Effective arrangement to provide and maintain at suitable points sufficient supply of

wholesome drinking water as per IS 10500. All such points will be situated within six meter

of any washing place, urinal or latrine

b. Provision of urinal and latrine at conveniently located such that may be accessible to workers

at all times while they are in such place.

c. Every latrine shall be under cover and so partitioned off as to secure privacy and shall have a

proper door and fastening.

d. Where in both male and female building workers are employed, there shall be displayed

outside each block of latrines and urinals, written in the landuage understood by the majority

of workers

e. Every latrine or urinal shall be adequately lighted with energy efficient lighting and shall be

maintained in a clean and sanitary condition at all the time.

f. Water shall be provided by means of a tap or otherwise so as to be conveniently accessible in

or near by every latrine or urinal

g. The walls, ceiling and partitions of very latrine or urinal shall be white washed once in every

period of four months.

h. Every latrine and urinal shall be connected to flush system and shall wastewater shall be

disposed off through mobile STP.

6.18.6 Canteens

a. Provision of canteen which shall accommodate building workers, kitchen, store room, pantry

and washing places separately for building workers and utensils

b. The canteen shall be sufficiently lighted with energy efficient lights.

c. The floor of the canteen should be made smooth and impervious and shall be lime washed or

color washed atleast once in six months.

d. The precincts of canteen shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition


Ullawas, Gurgaon


e. Wastewater from the canteen shall be carried away in covered drain and shall not be allowed

to accumulate in the surrounding of canteen

f. Adequate number of bins shall be provided at kitchen, dining area, utensil washing area and

hand washing area. Arrangement shall be made for daily collection

g. The canteen should not be situated at the distance not less than 15.2 meters from any latrine or

urinal or any source of dust, smoke or obnoxious fumes

h. At the location where the canteen is located more than 2 km from the work place, provision of

place for serving tea and light refreshment shall be made for the building workers.

6.18.7 Medical Facilities

a. The Project Proponent shall ensure that the Contractor shall provide full fledged First Aid

Centre (24 hours facility available) with one full time medical officer including once nurse,

once dresser-cum-compounder.

b. There shall be Ambulance 24 hours available at project site

c. The medical examination for all building workers shall be carried out before employing, after

illness or injury.

d. If it appears that the illness or injury might have affected workers fitness and thereafter,

medical examination once in every two years upto age of forty and once in a year there after

shall be done.

e. Complete and confidential record of medical examination shall be maintained by the

employers or the authorized physician

f. The medical examination shall include:

Full medical and occupational history

Vision

Hearing

Breathing

Upper Limbs (adequate arm function and grip)

Lower Limbs (adequate leg and foot function

Spine

General mental alertness and stability with good eye, hand and foot coordination.


Ullawas, Gurgaon


6.18.8 Emergency Care Services or Emergency Treatment

a. Project Proponent shall ensure that the provision for essential life saving aides and required to

handle following shall be made:

Head injuries and spinal injuries

Bleeding

Fractures and dislocations of bones and joints

Crush injuries

Shock including electric shocks

Dehydration due to any cause

Snake bite, insect bite, scorpion and bee sting

Burns including chemical burns

Sunstroke and frost bite

The above shall be provided and maintained under the supervision of Medical Officer,

appointed by the contractor

6.19 SAFETY MEASURES

6.19.1 General Safety Measures

a. The proponent shall form safety committee consisting of members of project proponent,

contractor, and workers.

b. The project proponent shall appoint a safety officer who shall possess such qualification and

perform such duties as may be prescribe

c. The project proponent shall ensure that the contractor shall provide safe access and safety to

any work place, including the provision of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various stage

where work cannot be done from the ground or from any part of a building or from a ladder.

d. The erection, installation, use and maintenance of transporting equipment such as

locomotives, trucks, wagons and other vehicles and trailers shall be done by appointing

competent persons to drive or operate such equipment.

e. The project proponent shall ensure adequate and suitable energy efficient lighting to every

work place and approach.

f. The precautions to be taken to prevent inhalation of dust, fumes, gases during any grinding,

cleaning, spraying of any material and steps to be taken to secure and maintain adequate

ventilation of every working place or confined space.


Ullawas, Gurgaon


g. The project proponent shall ensure that the contractor shall take all precautions to prevent

danger to workers from live electric wire or apparatus including electrical machinery and

tools and from overhead wires

h. The project proponent shall ensure that the contractor shall provide safety nets, safety sheets

and safety belts where specific nature or circumstance of work render then necessary for the

safety of the workers.

i. The project proponent shall ensure that the contractor shall abide by and follow EHS policy of

M/s Faithbuildtech Realtors Pvt. Ltd.

j. The project proponent shall appoint of Inspecting Staff as per the directives of Chapter VIII,

Inspecting Staff & Chapter IX Special Provisions, The Haryana Building and Other

construction Workers (RE & CS) Act, 1996.

k. The project proponent will penalize contractor for contravention of provision of safety

measures.

6.19.2 Safety for Welding & Cutting

1. Welding and gas cutting operations shall be done only by qualified and authorized persons

and as per IS Specifications and code of Practice.

2. Welding and gas cutting shall not be carried out in places where flammable or combustible

materials are kept and where there is danger of explosion due to presence of gaseous

mixtures.

3. Welding and gas cutting equipment including hoses and cables shall be maintained in good

condition.

4. Barriers shall be erected to protect other persons from harmful rays from the work. When

welding or gas cutting is done in elevated positions, precautions shall be taken to prevent

sparks or hot metal falling on persons or flammable materials.

5. Suitable type of protective clothing consisting of fire resistant gauntlet gloves, leggings, boots

and aprons shall be provided to workers as protection from heat and hot metal splashes.

Welding shields with filter glasses of appropriate shade shall be worn as face protection.

6. Adequate ventilation shall be provided while welding in confined space or while brazing,

cutting or welding zinc, brass, bronze, galvanized or lead coated materials.

7. Welding and gas cutting shall not be done on drums, barrels, tanks or other containers unless

they have been emptied, cleaned thoroughly and it is made certain that no flammable material

is present.


Ullawas, Gurgaon


8. Fire extinguisher shall be available near the location of welding operations. Fire safety permit

shall be obtained for working at volnearable areas and operating areas before flame

cutting/welding is taken up.


Ullawas, Gurgaon


7 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

7.1 GENERAL

An environmental monitoring plan provides feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a

project and helps to judge the adequacy of the mitigation measures in protecting the environment. The

purpose of environmental monitoring is to evaluate the effectiveness of implementation of

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) by periodically monitoring the important environmental

parameters within the impact area, so that any adverse effects are detected and timely action can be

taken.

7.2 OBJECTIVES OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

The key objective of the environment monitoring program will be as follows:

1 Ensure compliance with the mitigation measures as identified in the EIA;

2 Determine the project’s actual environmental impacts so that modifications can be made to the

project’s mitigation measures;

3 Describe the extent of environmental effects and resource losses;

4 Provide scientific information about the response of an ecosystem to a given set of human

activities and mitigation measures;

7.3 SUGGESTED ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

The environmental monitoring plan for the proposed Independent Floors development has been

conceptualized in view of the institutional, scientific and fiscal issues pertaining to the project. The

monitoring plan aims to collect data on the environmental indicator to provide information about the

environmental impacts. For developing the monitoring plan, appropriate components which are likely

to be affected have been identified. For each component, suitable measurable environmental

indicators which are appropriate to the impact mechanism and scale of disturbance and which have a

low natural variability, broad applicability and an existing data series have been defined.

The monitoring plan has been designed for the construction and the operation phase of the project and

the details of the plan have been presented in Table 7.1.




Table 7:1: Recommended Environmental Monitoring Plan

S.N Performance

Indicator

Component Parameters Locations Frequency Measurement

methodology

Preconstruction Phase

1 Concentration

of SPM to

assess the

effectiveness

of dust

control

measures

Ambient Air

Quality

PM2.5 and

PM10

Project site Quarterly

IS 5182 ( Part –

IV), 1973

IS 5182 ( Part –

XXIII), 1973

Emissions

from DG

sets

Quarterly

2 Equivalent

noise level

Ambient

Noise

Quality

Noise

emissions

from DG set

Project site Quarterly Operational

manual of noise

level meter

Construction Phase

1 Oil and

grease, heavy

metal

concentration

Soil Quality pH,

electrical

conductance,

cation

exchange

capacity,

Sodium

Absorption

Ratio (SAR),

water

holding

capacity,

phosphorous,

Copper,

Zinc, iron,

calcium,

One location

within

project site

Annually Practical methods

in Ecology and

Environmental

Sciences




S.N Performance

Indicator


methodology

magnesium,

sodium,

potassium,

boron,

Nitrogen,

porosity,

permeability,

infiltration

capacity,

bulk density,

organic

content

texture, etc.,

2 Concentration

of SPM to

assess the

`effectiveness

of Dust

control plan

Ambient Air

Quality

PM2.5 and

PM10

Project site Quarterly

IS 5182 ( Part –

IV), 1973

IS 5182 ( Part –

XXIII), 1973

Emissions

from DG set

of admin

block

Quarterly

3 Equivalent

noise level

Ambient

Noise

Quality

Hourly Leq Project site Monthly Operational

manual of noise

level meter Noise

emissions

from DG set

operation

during

construction

work

Monthly




S.N Performance

Indicator


methodology

Operation Phase

1 Ground water

table level

Rainwater

harvesting

and ground

water

recharge

plan

Ground

water table

Near the

ground

water

recharge pit

Twice in a

year

As per standard

practice

2 Greenbelt

survival rate

Greenbelt

development

plan

Greenbelt At the

greenbelt

development

corridor

Twice in a

year

3 % Savings of

energy

Energy

conservation

measure

Rating of

energy

consumption

At all

installation

Monthly As per standard

practice of BEE

4 Potability,

taste, odour

Groundwater

Quality

Parameters

as listed in

IS

10500:1991

Water intake

structure

Half

Yearly

Standard method

for the

examination of

water and

wastewater, 21st

Edition, edited by

Lenore S.

Clesceri, Arnold

E. Greenberg,

Andre D. Eton

5 Efficiency of

the STP (%)

Treated

effluent

Quality

pH, Color,

Odor,

Turbidity,

EC,

Alkalinity ,

Hardness,

STP Outlet Twice a

month for

1st three

months,

monthly

for next

Standard method

for the

examination of

water and

wastewater, 21st

Edition, edited by




S.N Performance

Indicator


methodology

BOD, COD,

Total

Dissolved

Solids,

Suspended

Solids, Total

Coliform,

Volatile

solids ,

Heavy

Metals

three

months

and

quarterly

Lenore S.

Clesceri, Arnold

E. Greenberg,

Andre D. Eton

# - The performance of the proposed STP will be evaluated on a regular basis by the operator, in terms of quick

check of different physical and physicochemical parameters




7.3.1 Data Analysis

The monitored data will be analyzed and compared with the baseline levels as established in the EIA

study and the regulatory standards specified by different government agencies. The standards against

which the different environmental components will be compared are as per Table 7.2.

Table 7:2: Applicable Standards for different Environmental Components

S.N Component Applicable Standards

1 Ambient Air Quality National Ambient Air Quality standards, CPCB

2 Noise Quality Ambient Air Quality Standards with Respect to Noise,

CPCB

3 Surface water quality Water Standards, CPCB

4 Groundwater quality IS: 10500 Standards, BIS

5 Soil Quality --

6 Treated sewage water quality IS 2490(1974) – Discharge into surface water, IS

3306(1974) – Discharge on land, IS 3307(1974)- Discharge

for agricultural use

7.3.2 Reporting Schedule

The monitoring results of the different environmental components will be analyzed and compiled

every six months during the construction phase and every twelve months during the operation phase.

The report will also list the project activities along with the environmental mitigation measures and

will evaluate the efficacy of the Environmental Management Plan.

7.3.3 Emergency Procedures/Corrective Measures

Corrective measures will be adopted if the review of the monitoring report reveals that the

environmental management plan is inadequate or has not been implemented properly. A detailed

review will be carried out by the interdisciplinary team of experts in the Environment Management

Cell for assessing the gaps in the EMP and the addressal of EMP. A corrective action plan will be

worked out for the environmental component and a rigorous follow up of environmental monitoring

plan will be carried out.




8 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.1 INTRODUCTION

A disaster is a natural or man-made (or technological) hazard resulting in an event of substantial

extent causing significant physical damage or destruction, loss of life, or drastic change to the

environment. A disaster can be ostensively defined as any tragic event stemming from events such as

earthquakes, floods, catastrophic accidents, fires, or explosions. It is a phenomenon that disasters can

cause damage to life, property and destroy the economic, social and cultural life of people. Disasters

in general, can broadly be grouped under three categories viz. (i) Water and Climate related (ii)

Geology / Geomorphology related and (iii) Accident related. On project site, accident related disasters

from fire, oil spills, and chemical induced and vehicular / operational accidents are quite possible. In

the context of the proposed project it thus becomes imperative to identify the type, pattern and the

potential severity of the hazards, which can cause loss of life, damage to property and environment,

and to assess the vulnerability and risks there from with a view to outlining an appropriate response

mechanism.

The proposed project site is located in Gurgaon district which is the sixth largest city of Haryana

State. For the last two decades, it has been on the faster pace of the development and emerged as the

industrial and financial hub of Haryana. Hazard Risk in Gurgaon are compounded by increasing

vulnerabilities related to the high population growth, rapid-urbanization, increasing Industrialization,

rapid development within high risk seismic zone (Zone IV), environmental degradation, climate

change etc.

Therefore, the Disaster Management Plan is required to encompass all the administrative and

operational programmes and responses to reduce the risk of emergencies of hazardous events likely to

occur at any point of time during construction and operational phases of the project.

8.2 HAZARD

Risk assessment is the systematic identification of the hazards associated with construction work and

the evaluation of the risks associated with those hazards. A hazard - risk assessment shall take account

of all the work activities and consideration shall also be given to anyone else who could be affected

by the work activities.

8.3 RISK

Risk is the “the combination of the frequency, or probability of occurrence, and consequence of a

specified hazardous event”. Where frequency of exposure is an issue then duration of exposure is also

considered. Risk is the level to which a hazard poses a threat to life, limb or property. This will vary

from a minor laceration to a permanent disability, an illness such as cancer, or death.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Natural_disaster

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Man-made_disaster

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hazard

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Environment_(biophysical)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ostensive_definition

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Earthquake

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Flood

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Accident

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fire

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Explosion




8.4 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND RISK ASSESSMENT DURING THE

CONSTRUCTION PHASE

The purpose of Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment is to identify all the significant hazards,

which may occur during the construction phase, and to rank them according to their severity. Having

ranked the risks by severity the measures shall be introduced to mitigate the effects of that risk.

Risk assessment analysis process shall identify certain activities for which detailed written method

statement or safe systems of work are required to ensure that the activities are properly controlled and

executed safely and without risk to health and the environment. All such written safe systems of work

shall clearly identify the objective, the sequence of operations, foreseeable hazards, precautionary and

protective measures required and shall be easily understood by the personnel who are to supervise and

carry out the work.

8.5 METHOD STATEMENTS

As a result of the Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment detailed method statements shall need to

be produced for medium and high risk activities including amongst others the following:

Concreting.

Scaffolding erection/dismantling.

Excavations.

Work in confined spaces

Temporary Works

Chemical Cleaning

Work on Energized Electrical Equipment

Craneage of items in excess of 1 tonne

Inflammable materials – the use and storage

Use and storage of explosives

8.6 SAFE WORK METHOD STATEMENT STEP BY STEP

A method statement should contain sufficient information to enable the task to be undertaken safely

and should contain as a minimum the following information

Company Name;

A description of the work activity or task to be undertaken;

The date the SWMS was developed;




The name and signature of the person who developed the SWMS;

The project name/number and the name of the Principal Contractor;

The job steps involved in doing the work;

Potential Class 1 and Class 2 hazards associated with the job task to be undertaken;

The controls that will be put in place to eliminate or minimise the potential hazards identified;

Controls as high as practicable on the “best” to “worst” control guide; and

The name of the person/s responsible for ensuring that the control/s is in place.

a description of the work to be undertaken

the step by step sequence in doing the work

the potential hazards associated with the work and with each of its steps

the safety controls that will be used to minimise these hazards

all precautions to be taken to protect health and safety

identification of all health and safety law, standards or codes applicable to the work, and

where these are kept on the worksite

the names and qualifications of those who will supervise the work and inspect and approve

work

description of work area, work methods, protective measures, plant, equipment and power

tools

a description of what training is given to people doing the work

identification of plant and equipment needed on site to do the job eg ladders, scaffolds,

electrical leads, welding machines etc

details of the inspection and maintenance checks that will be, or have been, carried out on the

equipment listed

Site Safety Rules.

Where contractors and or sub-contractors are employed on the project, shall provide similar

assessments covering their respective operations and all Hazard / risk assessments shall be reviewed

and necessary revised as circumstance change.

8.7 PERMITS TO WORK

The Contractor shall develop a permit-to-work system, which is a formal written system used to

control certain types of work that are potentially hazardous. A permit-to-work is a document, which




specifies the work to be done, and the precautions to be taken. Permits-to-work form an essential part

of safe systems of work for many construction activities. They allow work to start only after safe

procedures have been defined and they provide a clear record that all foreseeable hazards have been

considered. Permits to Work are usually required in high-risk areas as identified by the Risk

Assessments.

A permit is needed when construction work can only be carried out if normal safeguards are dropped

or when new hazards are introduced by the work. Examples of high risk activities include but are not

limited to:

a) Work close to 25kV overhead Catenery

b) Entry into Confined Spaces. (SAF 010)

c) Work In Close Proximity to Overhead Power lines and Telecommunication Cables.

d) Hot Work.

e) To dig—where underground services may be located.

f) Work with moving construction locomotives.

g) Working On Electrical Apparatus.

h) The permit-to-work system should be fully documented, laying down:

i) how the system works;

j) the jobs it is to be used for;

k) the responsibilities and training of those involved; and

l) how to check its operation;

The permit-to-work form must help communication between everyone involved. It should be designed

by the Contractor issuing the permit, taking into account individual site conditions and requirements.

Separate permit forms may be required for different tasks, such as hot work and entry into confined

spaces, so that sufficient emphasis can be given to the particular hazards present and precautions

required.

The permit to work form should contain:

a) clear identification of who may authorise particular jobs (and any limits to their authority);

b) clear identification of who is responsible for specifying the necessary precautions (e.g.

c) isolation, emergency arrangements, etc);

d) a detailed description of the task clearly identifying the work to be done and the associated




hazards;

e) plans and diagrams be used if appropriate to assist in the description of the work to be done,

its location and limitations;

f) identity of the hazards and the precautions to be taken;

g) clear rules about how the job should be controlled or abandoned in the case of an emergency;

h) the time limitations should be stated;

i) job specific toolbox talk conducted by the supervisor

A Permit to Work authorisation form shall be completed with the maximum duration period not

exceeding twenty four hours.

A copy of each Permit to Work shall be displayed, during its validity, in a conspicuous location in

close proximity to the actual works location to which it applies.

A pre-permit activation job specific toolbox talk shall be conducted by the supervisor including

amongst others the following.

a) All identified hazards are explained;

b) Risk mitigation process clarified;

c) Method of work explained stressing points (a) and (b) above;

d) Emergency response procedure is clarified and persons assigned tasks in the event of an

emergency;

e) PPE requirements including PPE serviceability checks and training if required;

All workers and supervision shall attend the toolbox talk and sign the toolbox attendance register.

Any person/s coming late to the work site shall be given the toolbox talk and sign the attendance

register

8.8 RISK ASSESSMENT DURING THE OPERATION PHASE

8.8.1 Earthquake Hazard

The entire region of Gurgaon falls in high risk seismic zone IV and corresponds to MSK intensity

VIII making it highly vulnerable to Earthquakes. The major tectonics features affecting Gurgaon are

as follows:

The Sohna Fault

Junction of Aravali and Alluvium near Delhi

Moradabad Fault

Delhi Moradabad Fault




Delhi-Haridwar Fault

Although no major earthquake have occurred in Gurgaon in recent year, yet tremors have been felt

whenever there is an earthquake in the Himalayan foothills. The NCR has fairly high seismicity with

general occurrence of earthquakes of 5-6 magnitude, a few of magnitude 6-7 and occasional incident

of 7.5-8.0 magnitude shocks. Subsequent traumatic events have occurred in 1803, 1819, 1905, 1924,

1937, 1945, 1949, 1958, 1960, 1966, 1975, 1980 and 1994 during which the intensities level on

Richter scale between VII and IX are believed to have been experienced as indicated by the damage

pattern. The most important earthquake which affected Gurgaon was on 27th August, 1960 with the

magnitude of 6.0. The epicentre of this earthquake was between Delhi cantonment and Gurgaon.

8.8.2 Drought

Rapid industrialization, urbanization and withdrawal of huge ground water are leading factors for the

occurrence of drought in Gurgaon district. The droughts in 1987 & 2001 were worst droughts in the

state of Haryana. Gurgaon receives most of its rainfall from the ‘summer’ monsoon and continuous up

to the middle of August. The summer monsoon sets during the month of July and starts withdrawing

from the end of August or first week of September. Due to this uncertain rainfall pattern the entire

district receive less than one month of rainy session. Hence the department of agriculture and

cooperation, ministry of agriculture and government of India has categorized Gurgaon in chronically

in drought affected area.

8.8.3 Flood

The main cause of flood in the Gurgaon district can be attributed to the heterogeneous topography. As

such there is no perennial river in the district, on the other hand a number of Barsati Nallahs/Hills

torrent are found, which criss cross the entire region and become the cause of floods during rainy

season. Besides this, rapid urbanization in the district also leads to floods because heavy pressure of

the existing infrastructure development over the natural drainage system. Low lying areas of Gurgaon

are under the threat of water logging even if there is a minor rain.

8.8.4 Fire

The short circuits, LPG blasts and chemical industrial fire are the major reasons to worry in the

district. Most of the reported accidents are in the city of Gurgaon, mainly due to the inadequate safety

measures in the electrical installation and chemical and LPG blasts, as well as careless practices while

handling and storage of inflammable materials. However, a broad identification of the types of

locations where there is a positional threat of fire is possible. These are:

Storage area of flammable/explosive material in the vicinity of populated area;

Multi storey buildings especially in the cities, with inadequate fire safety measures;




Narrow lanes, congested and overcrowded buildings, and old building with poor internal

wiring.

The facilities in each fire station are appropriate to the municipality’s financial position. However,

due to the paucity of funds in most municipalities, except in Gurgaon city in the district, the fire-

stations are poorly equipped. In addition to combating fire related hazards, fire frightening services

are also required during building collapse, road accidents, and industrial hazards and earthquake etc

Therefore, the need for a well equipped, well maintained, and adequate fire station cannot be under

estimated.

8.9 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Disaster management plan prepared to avoid any risk assessed during the construction phase has been

discussed below

Scaffolding at site is considered as one of the major hazards at a construction site and can be

mitigated by following measures

a. Inspection and certification (tagging) of the erection.

b. Intermediate guard rails,

c. Barrier and warning notices,

d. Regular inspection of the scaffold.

e. Provision of toe guards to prevent items from rolling over the edge

Power access equipment causes hazards and should be managed by using good quality tools as

well as regular maintenance.

Hazard of ladder can be mitigated by proper erection and regular check up and vigilance during

use of ladders.

a. Secure fixing

b. ladder condition,

c. position and foundation,

d. suitability

e. Slippery sideways.

Plant and machinery hazards are very major and can be mitigated by using proper pre-approved

and certified equipment with regular periodic maintenance.

Fire and Emergency is one of the most common hazards at construction site, this can be

mitigated by

a. availability of extinguishers,

b. reducing the possibility of ignition sources,

c. provision of exit alarms,




d. personnel awareness of the risks

e. emergency procedures

f. regular training of responsible “fire marshals”

Hazardous Substance is considered as a low risk hazard but should be taken care by preserving

the material at right place and in approved conditions.

8.10 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR OPERATION PHASE

8.10.1 On Site Emergency Management Plan

Earthquake

Spatial and temporal impacts of earthquake are large. Resource requirements are both intensive and

extensive for management of earthquake. Though the project impact area comes under seismic zone-

IV, the probability of occurrence of earthquake in future is not ruled out. In the case earthquake occur,

following management plan will be adopted:

Since earthquake is the most uncertain natural occurrence giving birth to massive calamities on

both life and property, adequate care has been taken into account while designing the

infrastructure facilities for the proposed site as per seismic zone.

Extensive rescue operations are required to shift the injured persons to the nearest medical units

and evacuate the trapped individuals to safer places. Appropriate medical services are necessary

to control epidemics in the post earthquake period.

Suitable steps on war footing basis need to be adopted to restore all the essential services like,

electricity, water and food supply, telecommunication, transportation, etc. Proper steps should

also ensure the protection and safeguard of properties.

Damage to road access due to landslides/land subsidence would need immediate clearing for

which operations in close coordination with the concerned departments/agencies in the district

will have to be made.

Areas indicating signs of liquefaction should be declared out of bounds and district vigil should

be kept to prohibit trespassing.

Foundations of the structures prone to liquefaction will require technical assessment.

Alteration in the river, creek and canal water flow that may inundate the site areas would

require immediate evacuation of people and properties in coordination with the district

authorities.

Fire

Though fire in general is a localized problem it may assume unmanageable proportions if immediate

care is not taken. Following management plan shall be adopted:




Storage of fuel will be as per the rules and guidelines as laid down in the relevant statutes.

Adequate fire safety equipments e.g. extinguishers, dry chemicals, carbon dioxide, foam spray;

water spray should be kept in the complex.

IS codes for cables to be applied for preventing short circuits in wiring.

Adequate Immediate actions call for the extinguishing of fire by using proper devices

necessary, depending on the nature of the fire keeping in consideration that the fires are not

spread further to cause greater loss of life and properties.

Immediate rescue operations will be initiated for which assistance of the local fire service

authorities to be sought.

Emergency medical attention will be extended to the affected / injured persons immediately.

Serious burn cases should be transported to General hospital in town or private health care units

in the vicinity.

Despite all efforts and the measures provided for, it is within the realm of possibility that emergencies

and accidents can take place. The primary objective of Emergency Management Plan is to defend the

men, material and property against such hazards and restore normalcy as soon as possible. An

Emergency Management Group (EMG) is thus constituted with such objective and to provide help to

those in need in the times of disaster. The EMG constitutes of personnel having various duties and

responsibilities which work in tandem with each other and proper hierarchy to mitigate the adverse

impacts of disasters and return to normalcy with immediate effect. All the personnel of EMG operate

through Emergency Control Centre (ECC) that is a nodal point for all communications and record of

observations and data logging.

8.11 KEY PERSONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

For effective handling of the emergency, there will be a designated Site Main Controller (SMC),

Work Incident Controller (WIC) and various other key persons. The key responsibilities of all the

personnel that form the part of EMG are as follows:

8.11.1 Site Main Controller

He will report to the Emergency Control Center and will assume overall responsibility of the site and

its personnel. The main duties of SMC comprises of:

Assessing the magnitude of the situation and decide whether a major emergency exists or is

likely to develop, requiring external assistance.

Inform District emergency chief (i.e. District Collector) accordingly.

Ensure that the key personnel are called in promptly.

Maintain a continuous review of possible developments and assess these to determine most

probable course of events.




Assume the head of ECC and oversee all the functions are performed as planned.

8.11.2 Work Incident Controller

The WIC will report to the SMC and would act in such a manner as to manage the hazardous

situation, put in control and mitigate. The main duties of WIC comprises of:

Exercise direct operational control of the affected area.

Ensure the accounting for personnel and arrange for non essential workers to be sent to

assembly point.

Arrange for a chronological record of the emergency to be maintained.

Establish communication link with the ECC (through phone or messenger) and keep the SMC

informed about the developments at the incident site

8.11.3 Safety Coordinator

The Safety Coordinator would assist the WIC in removal of unsafe situations and act as overseer to

monitor that all the activities for emergency management are performed safely and will not escalate

the situation.

8.11.4 Medical Officer

The M.O. will rush to the scene of emergency on receipt of information and ensure that casualties are

receiving adequate help. The WIC is to be informed of the steps taken and seek advice for further

mobilization of medical resources from within and outside the site.

8.11.5 Maintenance Support Officer

He will provide assistance as per the demand of WIC / Safety Officer and will be responsible for

electrical supply cut-off / restoration and other mechanical and workshop help.

8.11.6 Civil Support Officer

His responsibility is to provide fabrication/construction manpower for any demolition/ construction as

per the emergent situation and provide temporary barricade to the affected location.

8.11.7 Material Support Officer

He has to ensure that the stores remain open through out the period of emergency for providing

material assistance together with providing assistance to the Maintenance Support officer and Civil

Support officer for receiving adequate supplies of machinery spares and material.

8.11.8 Area Staff

They will ensure removal of non essential workers to the assembly points and will facilitate Roll

Caller to verify the causality.




8.11.9 Running Messengers

Running messengers will act as per the direction of respective key personnel.

8.11.10 Employees

All the employees are responsible to inform their section in charge about the mishap. The employees

of the emergency area except involved in the emergency handling must assemble at the designated

assembly points.

8.11.11 Technical Coordinator

The persons in charge of the respective sections are designated as Technical Coordinators. They will

ensure that all operations are put in safe and standby condition.

8.11.12 Utilities Coordinator

The utilities coordinator will hold the responsibility of examining and assessing the requirement of

water for the purpose of fire fighting and other requirements like drinking and processing water. If

required, he will shut down the main power supply to the site and arrange for safe backup power in

the affected area and the emergency control center.

8.11.13 Liaison and Public Relations Coordinator

The liaison and Public Relations coordinator may be a separate person or the duties may be performed

by SMC only. He will liaise with local police/ law enforcing authority, District Collector, Chief

Medical Officer, District Fire Officer, etc. for possible help, if needed.

8.11.14 Transportation Coordinator

The transportation coordinator will have the responsibility of ensuring that all vehicles are in good

state of repair and maintain a log of all vehicle movement and remain standby for any immediate

situation.

8.11.15 Communication Coordinator

Communications officer will provide information to the emergency services as directed by SMC and

shall have all available means and messengers to communicate.

8.12 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS

In addition to planning and delegating responsibilities to the identified key persons, the proposed land

parcel will be adequately equipped in terms of safety equipment and facilities in order to be

completely prepared for combating emergencies.




8.12.1 Fire Detection and Fire Fighting

All the fire risks in the site like electrical substation, etc. will be adequately armed with fire detection

systems and will be equipped with fire extinguishers.

8.12.2 Personal Protective Equipment

The PPEs act as last line of defense and provide physical protection to the personnel. Sufficient

supplies of PPEs like helmets, gloves, ear muffs/plugs, face mask, fire escape masks, water gel

blankets, goggles etc. will be maintained at the proposed site.

8.12.3 Communication System

Communication facilities play a key role in notification, coordination and even for calling external

help during emergency situations. In view of this, adequate communication arrangements shall be

made as given below:

External telephones

Facsimile

Internal telephones in all sections

Public Address System

Walkie-talkies

In addition to the above, a siren with adequate audible range to cover the entire site will be available.

8.12.4 Training

Workers will be trained in fire-fighting and safety aspects through demonstration exercises and mock-

drills.

8.12.5 Emergency Control Center

It is necessary that the emergency is controlled from one specific point so that all the inputs are

available at the Emergency Control Center (ECC). At ECC a list of emergency telephone numbers,

communication facilities & necessary documents for emergency management will be available.

8.13 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE

It has been observed that pre-planned and practiced procedures for management of emergency

substantially reduce the damage potential of an accident. Thus, for any facility it is necessary to have

clear-cut procedures for different functions of emergency planning and management.

All occupants within the land parcel will be authorized to report the emergency. If the incident is of a

serious nature, the security in-charge of the shift will contact the site in-charge to report the situation

who will then mobilize suitable personnel to asses the situation and declare the emergency

accordingly. The SMC shall perform the following broad duties:




Emergency Shut-Down

Accounting of Personnel

Evacuation

Rehabilitation

Inform relatives of the affected people

Terminate the emergency procedures

These will be followed by:

Head count of all the individuals at the assembly point.

Constitution of the committee to investigate the cause of disaster, which will submit a detailed

report of the findings.

Based on the findings and lessons learned during emergency, the on-site plan will be suitably

modified to make it more effective.

Mock-drills will be carried out on the on-site plan to check its effectiveness and for

identification of areas for improvement.

Regular training programs through audio-visual aides will be conducted to enhance the

preparedness of all workers, specially the emergency combat personnel.

8.14 OFF-SITE EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS PLAN

Off-site emergency plan follows the on-site emergency plan. When the consequences of an emergency

situation go beyond the site boundaries, an off-site emergency comes into play. Off-site emergency is

essentially the responsibility of the public administration however; the site management will provide

public administration along with technical information relating to the nature, quantum and probable

consequences on the neighboring population.

The off-site plan in detail will be based on those events which are most likely to occur, but other less

likely events which have severe consequence will also be considered. Incidents which have very

severe consequences yet have a small probability of occurrence should also be considered during the

preparation of the plan. However, the key feature of a good off-site emergency plan is flexibility in its

application to emergencies other than those specifically included in the formation of the plan.

The main aspects which should be included in the off-site emergency plan are:

Organization/ hierarchy

Communication systems

Specialized knowledge experts or agencies

Voluntary organizations

Meteorological information

Humanitarian arrangements




Public information

Assessment of emergency plan

8.14.1 Emergency Code of Practices

The following are the code of practices (COP) that will be followed by IREO during the disasters

from natural hazards which can affect the proposed land parcel:

Objective

To provide relief to the affected people in quick and efficient manner

Earthquake Preparedness

The earthquake susceptibility in the proposed land parcel will be studied and the earthquake

protection measures will be accordingly incorporated in the building design stage itself.

Line of Action

Earthquakes are situations that do not affect a particular identified location. Thus, after the earthquake

the SMC will perform the following duties-

Patrolling of sensitive locations and the entire facility

Instruct communication officer to contact all department heads to give status of their respective

areas, men and machinery.

If any help is sought at some place, mobilize the resources accordingly

Immediate attendance of all the staff and visitors

8.14.2 Fire fighting COP

Objective

The main objective of this Code of Practice is to detect the source and location of the fire and

extinguish followed by the evacuation of victims and goods to a safe area.

Fire fighting Preparedness

The critical areas should be provided with fire alarm, extinguisher and automatic fire hydrant system.

Caution and awareness signage shall be strategically installed at regular interval in those areas.

Line of Action

Immediately on the breakout of the fire, the following line of action shall be adopted:

To reach the location of crisis at the earliest

To identify the source of fire and take necessary action to diminish the cause

To make sure all the fire automatic fire hydrants are operational

To evacuate the area as early as possible




Instruct communication officer to contact all department heads to give status of their respective

areas, men and machinery.

Immediate attendance of all the staff and visitors

Providing of medical on site aid to affected people

Call ambulance on immediate basis for the affected people and send them to nearest hospital

8.15 MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORKS AND CONCLUSION

The overarching objective of the project is the economic development of the region / State/ country

and improvement in the quality of life of the local population in general. It therefore becomes

necessary to develop an appropriate response mechanism, which would act in close coordination with

the District Collector / DDMA of the district. For this purpose, the authority should set up a Disaster

Management Cell with a small team of dedicated personnel trained in relief and rescue operations

required for the anticipated emergencies. In addition to the above the following should be undertaken

by the authority.

Extensive afforestation programme will be undertaken with appropriate native species as per

guidelines of CPCB.

Timely warning to the local residents will be made through an effective communication system.

Timely alerting the key personnel in Disaster Management Cell of the district for taking

emergency action.

A Disaster Management Committee will be set up involving all the stakeholders particularly the

local community and NGOs and a list of personnel with allocated responsibilities will be kept at

the office and in all the concerned local body offices.

All power supply lines and connections, public address systems, etc. will be thoroughly checked

before onset of the monsoon months and special mock drills should be will be organised to put

all concerned on alert.

The administrative machinery of the project along with local NGOs will organize regular

awareness campaigns with the help of the local authorities where women and school children

from the community should be involved. Involvement of NGOs is necessary in mobilizing

community efforts for the control of epidemics by ensuring standards of environmental

sanitation, disposal of waste and personal hygiene.

The buildings in the project site will be allowed to be used as safe shelters during emergencies.

Volunteers’ Handbook for Disaster Preparedness of the UNDP will be circulated during

awareness campaigns.

8.15.1 Coordination with Concerned Authorities

The policy of the Govt. of India emphasizes on sustainable disaster/risk reduction in all states/UTs by

building capacities at all levels to institutionalize disaster risk management in the country. For




strengthening the overall capacities for emergency/disaster response in the country, the Govt. of India

is systematically assessing the existing systems at the national, state and district levels. Mock drills

with the community should be carried out regularly which may be helpful while formulating the

disaster response mechanism by the authorities.




9 CORPORATE ENVIROMENT RESPONSIBILITY

9.1 ENVIRONMENT POLICY

As mentioned earlier in Chapter 1, M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd. is one of the subsidiary

companies of Ireo Pvt. Ltd (IREO). All the policies and standard operating procedures followed by

Ireo Pvt. Ltd. are applicable to and are abide by all its subsidiary companies.

The IREO, along with its all subsidiary companies, has its own Environment, Occupational, Health

and Safety (EHS) Policy that focuses on the commitment to excellence in Environmental,

Occupational Health and Safety stewardship of all its activities and services. The Policy shows the

organization commitments towards:

1. Compliance to all applicable EHS legislation, statutory and regulatory requirements

2. Continual enhancement of EHS performance through sound practices.

3. Design, build and operate its facilities in an environmentally responsible manner, conserving

energy, water, other natural resources; minimizing waste generation and preventing pollution

thereby contributing to environmentally sustainable growth.

4. Accountability for ensuring a safe and healthy environment.

5. Providing training, awareness and resources to accomplish above mentioned EHS

commitments.

The commitment made under the above said policy is applicable to M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd

and is being followed as it is.

9.2 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

As said above M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd will strictly abide by the IREO’s standardized

operating procedures for project planning and execution phase of the project. The standard operating

procedures (SOP’s) have been divided under five heads based on project stages as follows:

Stage 1. Project Concept and Definition

Stage 2. Feasibility Study

Stage 3. Design Brief and Appointment of Consultants

Stage 4. Design Development and Production of Good for Construction (GFC’s) Drawings

Stage 5. Project Execution

The Annexure 9.1 Shows the process flow of above mentioned stages along with the inter-linkages of

various department s and inputs to be provided at all five stages.

9.3 HIERARCHICAL SYSTEM OF THE ORGANIZATION

The hierarchical system of the M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd is presented in Figure 9.1.




Figure 9.1 Hierarchical System of the Organisation

9.4 REPORTING MECHANISM OF NON-COMPLIANCE

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd has team of qualified environmental experts personals to ensure the

implementation of environmental requirements. The environmental team proposes to conduct site

inspections as site requirements. Any non-compliance during the site inspections will be reported /

closed as per the reporting mechanism given in Figure 9.2.




Figure 9.2 Reporting Mechanism of Non-Compliance




10 DISCLOSURE OF EIA PREPARES

The EIA report has been prepared as per approved ToR by the experts of :

1. The Project Proponent – M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd

2. EIA Consultants – GreenC India Consulting Pvt. Ltd.

10.1 THE PROJECT PROPONENT - M/S COMMANDER REALTORS PVT. LTD.

The name of experts of Project Proponent and there brief resume are as given below:

S.No Expert Name Education Qualification Area of Expertise Experience

1. Dr Asha Sharma Ph.D, M.Sc. Hons (Gold

Medalist) and B.Sc. Hons

EIA Cordinator & Team

Leader

+30 Years

2. Arijit Das B. Arch & BEM Architect/ Planning 18 years

3. Mukut Sharma B.E. (BITS Pilani) - Hons Infrastructure Planning 28 Years

4. Rajiv Piparia B. Tech – Civil Engg, IIT-

Kanpur Structure 27 Years

5. Geetha Manoj B.Tech (Civil) Plumbing & Fire Fighting 21 Years

6. Santosh A George B.Tech (Agriculture), M.

Arch (Landscape) Landscape 23 Years

7. Ashok Chaudhary B. Arch Land & Revenue 16 Years

8. Abhishek Sharma B. Arch Architect/ Planning 16 years

9. Richa Sharma B. Arch & PGDPM (CM-

NICMAR) Architect/ Planning 7 Years

10. Prashant Jain B.E. (Civil), PGD

(NICMAR) & MBA (IMI) Infrastructure planning 12 Years

11. Pankaj Jain M.E. (Env. Engg.) B.E.

(Civil) Infrastructure planning 18 Years

12. Vikas Chand

Sharma

M.Plan (Env. Planning) &

BE (Env Engg.), IGBC

EIA study & Green

Building 13 Years




S.No Expert Name Education Qualification Area of Expertise Experience

(AP)

13. Saket Verma M.SC (Env. Science) &

B.SC (PCM)

EIA study & Env.

Monitoring Coordinator 12 Years

14. Kamal kant Ujinwal M Tech (Env. Engg.) &

BE (Agriculture)

Environment Monitoring

& Survey 6 Years

15. Renu Singh

B.Arch, IGBC (AP),

GRIHA Trainer,

LEED Green Associate

Green Building & Energy

Simulation 8 Years

16. Neha Prakash M.BEM & B.Arch, IGBC

(AP)

Green Building & Energy

Simulation 3.5 Years

17. Varidhi Sharma

M.Tech (Energy & Env.

Mgt) & B.Tech (Bio-

Technology)

Env. Baseline Study 3 years

18. Environment Monitoring Laboratory ITL Labs Pvt. Ltd.

(NABL/MoEF Accredited)

19. Architect Consultant SCDA Architect Pte. Ltd.

20. MEP Consultant CP Vidya & Associates.

21. EIA Consultant GreenC India Consulting Pvt.Ltd.

10.2 EIA CONSULTANTS – GREENC INDIA CONSULTING PRIVATE LIMITED

GreenC India Consulting Private Limited (Formerly known as GIS Enabled Environment & Neo-

Graphic Centre) (hereinafter referred to as "GCPL") is an ISO 9001:2008, 14001:2004, OHSAS

18001 and NABET certified company with a vision to take up paradigm of development planning in

sustainable economic development and environment protection. The primary aim of the company is to

sensitize policy planner and local people about their development needs through capacity building

process. The main objects of the Company are as follows:

To carry on the business of providing all types of consultancy services not limited to social and

environmental assessment, environment action plan, tribal development plan, resettlement and




rehabilitation action plan, project information report, Detailed project report, Need Assessment

Report, Corporate Social Responsibility, Forest Diversion Plan, Wildlife Conservation Plan,

Environment, Social & Land related legal services and any other consultancy services & Studies

related to Urban Development, Rural Development, Environment, Forest and Legal aspects.

To provide consultancy services in environment monitoring, sample collection of Air, Water, Soil,

meteorological data’s and publish testing results for the collected samples

To Undertake research study not limited to the field of Environment, Social, legal, agriculture,

Urban Planning, Rural Planning, Alternate Sources of Energy etc and provide

consultancy/advisory/Training services in these field to Government, Quasi-Government, Non-

government and private institutions.

To providing consultancy services not limited to social and environmental standards, grievance

Mechanism, action plan and management system, review and categorization of the project and

independent review and monitoring of all the acts and things necessary for the attainment of above

objects.

To provide IFC performance standard not limited to labour and working conditions, EPFI reporting,

Drainage Plan and Hydrogeology, environmental and social impact Assessment according to IFC

guidelines and equator principles.

To provide consultancy services to Government, Quasi-Government, Non-government, private

institutions etc in field no limited to Environment, Social, legal, agriculture, Urban Planning, Rural

Planning, Alternate Sources of Energy etc. in all stages of project cycle i.e Project

conceptualization, Project planning, Project execution, Project operation.

The technical resources within GCPL include many engineering disciplines, physical and natural

sciences, mathematics, statistics, and computer sciences. One of our strengths is our desire to

continually build upon our abilities in our areas of technical expertise, providing exceptional

knowledge and insight into our clients needs. This concentrated technical effort is looked upon

favorably by our clients that continually uses our services and retain us as technical experts.

10.3 AREA OF EXPERTISE (GCPL)

Environmental Impact Assessment: GCPL have done many EIA studies and clearances for

Building Construction Sector, Thermal Power Plant; Road & highways; Special Economic Zones

(SEZs); Urban Infrastructure Projects etc. The areas of specialization are as follows:

Environmental Management Plan

Disaster Management Plan

Risk Assessment




Rehabilitation & Resettlement Plan

Pre-feasibility Report

Detailed Project Report

Geo-Technical Investigation

National, Regional and Urban Plans

Management Information System and Geographic Information system

Urban Infrastructure Development including Water Supply and Solid Waste Management

Environmental Monitoring and Assessments

Impact Assessment Formulate Policies & Mitigation Measures R&R

Natural Resource Management

Terminal Planning and Design

Institutional Strengthening

Development, Functional and Strategic Planning and Design

Preparation of Manuals

Conduct of Training Programmes

10.4 QCI/NABET ACCREDITATION STATUS OF THE EIA CONSULTANT

As on date, Greencindia Consulting Pvt. Ltd. has been granted accreditation by the Quality Council of

India / National Accreditation Board for Education & Training (QCI / NABET) in 9 sectors vide

Certificate No. NABET/EIA/RA014/041 valid up to February 18, 2017. The certificate of

accreditation is enclosed below:







10.5 BRIEF RESUME OF TEAM MEMBERS

GCPL comprises of group of professionals drawn from development related fields. The core

members of GCPL team hold experiences in Developmental Planning, Pollution Control, Economic

Analysis, Social Work and Information Technologies. In addition there is a panel of senior associates

and young voluntaries facilitating the various programmes. The brief resume of the Environment

Coordinator and Functional Area experts are discussed below:-

Rahul Singh (EC): Mr. Singh is the EIA coordinator of the Infrastructure projects and has an

experience of 12 years. He is a coordinator with rich experience in city planning, site planning,

terminal designs and preparation of environment reports and management plant. He has numerous

national and international projects related in his credit. He has in depth understanding of environment

legislations applicable in India and has also undertaken an assessment of legislative framework on the

development projects.

Ankur Agarwal (AFAE-LU): Mr. Agrawal has an experience of 7 years in field of Landuse

Planning and is Planner with rich experience in site planning, and preparation of Map. He has in depth

understanding of environment legislations applicable in India and has also undertaken an assessment

of legislative framework on the development projects.

AP Singh (FAE- WP & RH): Mr. Singh has a rich experience of 42 years in field of environment

and safety. He has conducted Environment Impact Assessment , study for greenfield as well as

expansion/modernization of Nitrogenous and Phosphoric Fertilizers Plants and Power Plants w.r.t to

fly ash/grit re-firing, fly ash & grate ash handling & disposal system & implementation of its

mitigation measures & to introduce surplus Coke Oven Gas to minimize dust pollution in Power

plant.

He has co-ordinate work related to HSE for IFFCO Fertiliser plants & was Technical advisor,

National Safety Council (UP Chapter). Mr. Singh has conducted studies related to Hazard

Identification & Risk Analysis of Nitrogenus and Phosphatic Fertiliser Plants, Petroleum Storages,

Gas pipelines, chlorine storage & handling etc using “ Building Block Principle”, Dow/ Mond Index

etc using mathematical analysis, TNO, ALOHA models & Conducted Risk Analysis and HAZOP

studies for Ammonia Storage, Petroleum Storage tanks and LPG storages, including Preparation &

mock drill of Onsite Plan, Safety Audits, Safety Reports, Compliances of Factories Acts & Rules.

Delivered talk on “Quantitative Methods of Risk Assessment at National Level Seminar conducted by

FAI.

Nilanjan Das (FAE-SE): Mr. Das has 17 years of experience and acquired expertise in rural habitat

planning through understanding people’s perception. He has worked on various rural development

projects in villages of Orissa, West Bengal and Gujarat. His area of expertise includes Socio-

Economic Study, R&R Plan, Participatory Rural Appraisal Technique, forestry and rural development




planning principles. As part of EIA activity, Mr. Das has been involved in more than 25 EIA Studies

and has prepared Socio-economic Studies, Social Impact Assessment and Management Plan. He has

also been actively involved for more than 15 R&R Reports.

Sanjay Singh (FAE-NV): Mr. Singh has an experience of more than 20 Years in field of

Environment Impact Studies. He has working experience on more than 50 projects in the field of

Environment Impact Assessment Studies. He is having NABET Accreditation for NV. His primary

strength is the quantitative assessment of noise and vibration study in the field of mining, railway and

construction projects. He is well versed with the Indian Legislative Framework for Environment.

Dr. PC Kuniyal (FAE-EB&SC): Dr. Kuniyal has 7years of experience in study of ecology in

himalayan and sub-himalayan region. He has in-depth insight in study and interpretation of flora and

fauna species across various climatic zone of country. He has specific training in field of impact

assessment and ecological monitoring. He also has working experience of the application of

taxonomy in resource inventory in numerous projects across country. Dr. Kuniyal also have

experience in assessment of fertility and characterization of soil and assess the impact of gaseous,

liquid and solid pollutants on the soil in large and medium size projects.

Dr. Manoj Kumar (FAE-HG & GEO): Mr. Manoj has 20 years of National & International

experience in the field of geology and involved in more than fifty projects across country to study the

geology and hydrogeology of the area with respect to aquifer characteristics, determination of impact

of ground water withdrawal of groundwater and suggested mitigation measures. He has also

developed geological maps by undertaking geology & geo-morphological analysis in the projects

undertaken by him. He has also involved in mining development incorporating environmental aspects

like top soil preservation, waste dump management, reclamation/rehabilitation of mined out areas in

various states of country.

Dipannita Das (AFAE-AP, AQ & SHW): Ms. Das has 3 years experience in the study of Air

Quality Assessment & Air Pollution Assessment and was involved in several EIA project as well as in

construction project. She has also experience in the field of Solid & Hazardous Waste Management.

10.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING LABORATORY

M/s ITL Labs Pvt. Ltd. has been hired for the environmental baseline monitoring carried out for the

proposed project. M/s ITL Labs Private Limited is a recognized and approved laboratory by Ministry

of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India for specialized testing and analysis of samples from their

laboratory. It is well equipped with the sophisticated & versatile analytical instruments & having

updated technology for various analytical applications in the field of environment. It provides a wide

range of services in the following area of environment:




Monitoring & testing of Atmospheric Air; Process Emissions; Water; Wastewater; Solid

Waste; Toxic & Hazardous Wastes; Noise & Vibration etc.

Complete Arrangement for Testing of Industrial Gases.

Site Survey & Industrial Risk Assessment including Disaster Management; Hazardous

Management etc.

Biological & Socio - economic studies.

Environmental Impact Assessment.

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) & Environmental Audits.

Micro meteorological Data.

Dispersion Modeling.

Estimation of Priority Pollutants in Environment

Soil Characterization

The copy of MoEF accreditation of ITL Labs Private Limited is enclosed as Annexure 10.1.




11 SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS

11.1 INTRODUCTION

M/s Commander Realtors Pvt. Ltd., proposing to develop Independent Floors at Sector 61, Village

Ullawas, Tehsil Sohna, Dist. Gurgaon, in the State of Haryana as a part of its vision to develop state-

of-the-art infrastructure for the Nation. The establishment of the project will bring more

developmental activities in the area and there will be an enhancement in the living standards of local

people.

An Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study report has been prepared for this project based on

baseline environmental quality data in the project area. Identification & prediction of significant

environmental impacts due to proposed project along with Environmental Impact Statement followed

by delineation of appropriate Environmental Management Plan are included in EIA Report.

The Summary and Conclusions summarize the findings of the EIA study undertaken in accordance

with the EIA guidelines on similar developmental projects.

11.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

11.2.1 Salient Features of the Project

The salient features of the project are discussed below:

Total land requirement : 18.138 acres (73,401.77 sq m)

Major facilities : Independent Floors (S+3) along with basic

infrastructure.

Common facilities : STP, storm water network, Electric sub-station &

Waste Treatment plant

Water Requirement :

Construction phase 80 KLD for construction activities (Treated Water

from HUDA STP)

70 KLD domestic consumption for construction

labors (tanker water)

Operation phase : Total water requirement is 480 KLD.

Fresh water requirement is 231 KLD to be met from

municipal public supply,




Remaining water requirement will be met from

treated effluent obtained from STP

Waste water generation :

Construction phase 57 KLD (construction phase) from labour camps

Operation phase 277 KLD (operation phase)

STP Capacity : STP capacity : 320 KLD

STP Technology : Membrane Bioreactor along with provision of UV

treatment

Solid Waste generation :

Construction phase 0.170 TPD MSW (labor camp)

Operation phase Approximately 1.25 TPD of Municipal solid waste

will be generated from the proposed project

Parking Facilities : Total parking: 1379 Nos.

Stilt Parking – 1379 Nos.

Power Requirement

Construction phase : 1000 kVA during construction phase through DG sets

Operation phase : The total demand load is 6.4 MW which will be

sourced from Dakshin Haryana Bijlee Vitran Nigam

Limited (DHBVNL).

Power Back up :

Construction phase : DG set will be installed to provide power supply

Operation phase : 5 DG sets of (4 nos. x 1500 kVA + 1 nos. x 500)

Project Cost 237.17 Crores

[24.16 (Land Cost) + 213.01 (Constrcution Cost)]




11.3 CONCLUSIONS

Based on the environmental assessment, all possible environment aspects have been adequately

assessed and necessary control measures have been formulated to meet with statutory requirements, in

the preparation of the EIA-EMP.

The proposed project is aimed at the infrastructural development of the area. The project will provide

impetus to further future growth of the concerned area and its surroundings. Thus implementing this

project will not have any significant negative impacts, thereby encourage acceptance in terms of

regional development and may be facilitate with environmental clearance.

11.4 OVERALL JUSTIFICATION FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE PROJECT

The proposed project will entail development of physical and social infrastructure in the region which

includes all utility services, overhead and underground, as well as all telecommunication facilities and

roads. The proposed land use pattern for this development envisages residential, commercial, IT

sectors’ development and emergence of social infrastructure in the region. Depending upon these

different land use patterns, the development would be envisaged in housing facilities, transportation

and communication, recreational and business opportunities.

The associated benefit from this development could be summarized as below:

1 Improvement in Physical Infrastructure

2 Improvement in Social Infrastructure

3 Employment Potential-Skilled, Semi-Skilled and Unskilled

4 Trigger growth in the district and of the region due to increased land requirement;

5 Other Tangible benefits - Improvement in quality of life of the local population;

Date post:	16-Mar-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	truongkhanh
View:	213 times
Download:	0 times

Table of Contents -...

Documents